Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on Hbrary shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at |http : //books . google . com/|

/^i

i '^

.<i if

\ ■•'

/<^

THE-

CHINESE GOVERNMENT.

A MANUAL OF CHINESE TITLES,
CATEGORICALLY ARRANGED AND EXPLAINED,

WITH AN APPENDIX.

BY

WILLIAM FREDERICK MAYERS,

CHINESE SECRETARY TO HER BRITANNIC M AJESTy's

LEGATION AT PEKING; AUTHOR OF

" THE CHINESE READER'S MANUAL,"

etc., etc.

SECOND EDITION.

With additions by
G. M. H. PLAYFAIR, H.B.M. Acting Vice-Consul, Shanghai.

SHANGHAI, HONGKONG, & YOKOHAMA:

KELLY & \A/'ALSH, LIMITED.

LONDON: TRUBNEB & CO., 57 & 59, LuDOATi HiLL.

1886.

d:l 12* I, a.

^

/^HARVARD
UNIVERSITY
1 LIBRARY
V MAY 3 1961

SHANOHAI :

KELLT & WALSB, LIMITED, PBHTTEBS,

THK BUND & NAUKINa BOAD,

PREFACE TO THE ORIGINAL EDITION.

The object with which the present work has been undertaken
is sufficiently expressed in its Title to leave little to be said in
explanation of its intended scope. A happily increasing interest
in Chinese studies, and the necessity which is becoming more and
more widely felt for an enlarged appreciation of the modes of
action adhered to by the Chinese government, justify the belief
that every new contribution to the means of reference will meet
with welcome; whilst, in the present instance, the labour of which
the results are embodied in the ensuing pages has been stimulated
by an obvious requirement of the public service. The urgent
need of a key to the designations in use, in both Chinese and
English, for the titles of public functionaries, which might be
accepted by translators as a common rule, was represented several
years ago by Sir Walter Medhurst, at that time Her Britannic
Majesty's Consul at Shanghai, in an official communication
addressed to Her Majesty's Minister; and the writer, who had
long contemplated the preparation of some such work, owes to
this circumstance the immediate inducement which has hastened
the fulfilment of his design. As in many other tasks of a like
description, however, the plan originally conceived soon betrayed
the necessity of development in a degree unloolced for at the
outset; and a variety of circumstances, besides, have intervened
to delay its execution for a considerable length of time. A period
of comparative leisure having allowed the design to be once more
taken in hand, it has now been carried to a conclusion on a scale
the tendency of which has been continually toward enlargement.

A cursory inspection of the ensuing pages will suffice to shew
that two main objects have been held in view in the course of
their preparation. Whilst it has been sought, in the first place.

IV PREFACE.

to meet the requirements of the translator from Chinese texts,
the attenfpt Jias iiiso been made to furnish explanations, with due
regard for conciseness, which may bedf service in -fhroWkig Tight
upon the varied details of the Chinese administrative fabric, for
the benefit of the more general enquirer. The materials which
have been arranged, with a view to facility of reference, in the
twelve Parts of which the main body of the work consists, have
been drawn from the immense stores of information offered by
the Ta TsHng Hioei Tien, or Collected Institutes of the dynasty
now occupying the throne of China. In the successive categories
of ordinances and supplementary enactments which constitute this
enormous work, occupying, when bound in European fashion, no
less than seventy-six volumes of folio size, every detail of 'the
Chinese polity is anticipated and prescribed for. The regulations
they set forth, extending in date from the middle of seventeenth
to the first decades of the present century, form in reality 'a code
of law by which every act of the imperisd government, from the
daily movements of the sovereign to the conduct of the lowest
official functionary, is strictly bound to be guided. The student
to whom this repertory is accessible will have little difficulty in
recognizing the fact, which to others may perhaps, though in a 'less
marked degree, be made clear by the present woi*k, that the found-
ations of the Chinese State repose upon an all-pervading officifdism,
a bureaucracy trained through the national system of education to
apply the maxims of government enunciated centuries before the
dawn of the Christian era, and impelled by motives of self-interest
to reject the introduction of all principles at variance with these
venerable dogmas. An appreciation of this condition of ai&irs
may possibly tend to correct the too sanguine views whieh have
been entertained of a speedy entrance of the Chinese, as a. govern-
ment and people, upon the path of European progress. In order
that such a result should be accomplished to any tangible exteilt,
it would be necessary that the most cherished principles of the
national religion should be abandoned, the ideals of literary wor^hfip
dethroned, and the recognized fountain of all honour deseiHied^n

PRXITAtlS. 'V

favour of pursuits and doctrines which are now contemptuously
ignored. A change such as this may, and perhaps will, be pro-
duced under the pressure of imperious necessity if not as the
consequence of revolution ; but it would be a delusion to anticipate
it as'brougltt about by voluntary development.

The dvnastic Institutes beinc^ thus reooornized as the livins:
constitutional law of China, they have naturally been taken as the
basis for the present work ; but, on the other hand, the divisions
under which the subject-matter has been arranged have been
decided upon with reference exclusively toHhe. convenience of the
'European reader. For the explanatory matter, a number of
authorities have been relied upon, the most important of which are
acknowledged in their respective places. The most detailed
attempts at explanation have been devoted to those branches of the
subject which are comparatively remote from the beaten track of
study, and upon which, consequently, a new source of information
is likely to be the more useful. This has been especially the case
with reference to the Chinese system of literary examination and
titular distinctions, as also in connection with the distribution of
authority in Mongolia, Turkestan, and Tibet In those portions of
the work which deal more directly with the Chinese governing
body, it has been the writer's endeavour to supply a want, only too
familiar to students of the language, in the shape of a systematic
grouping of the synonyms and epithets of courtsey which are con-
tinually met with as the substitutes for official titles. A radical
Index, at the end of the work, provides a ready means of identify-
ing any one of these combinations by reference to the numbered
paragraphs. The Appendix will be found to include explanatory
notices with regard to the constitution and mode of working of the
Chinese administrative organization, and also to certain peculiarities
of the written style in relation to official matters which are invested,
to an appreciable extent, with political as well as literary import-
ance. A concluding section of the Appendix completes the task
undertaken with a special eye to the requirements of a translator,
in the list of renderings afforded for such European titles as are

VI PBEFAOE.

most generally in use. Many of these renderings are already
current, and are established by long usage; others, principally
those relating to the superior offices of government abroad, have
been devised by the writer in consultation with scholars to whose
judgment he has in more than one instance deferred; and others
again are suggested by an obvious analogy.

In conclusion the writer feels bound to express an acknow-
ledgment of the services rendered to him, in the course of compil-
ing the materials for the present work, by his two Chinese assistants
Liu Yxih-ts^ai ^^^ and Yiih How-ngan 3i J^ ^, to whom
he has repeatedly been indebted for the elucidation of difficult
questions and who have materially co-operated in the execution of
his task.

Peking, November Isty 1877.

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

Review of the First Edition ...
Introduction to the Second Edition
Further Addenda'and Corrigenda
Alphabetical Index to the Chinese IStles

••• ... •••

... ..•

. .• •*. ...

. • •. • • •

•••

. ..

... •••

... •••

• • .

Part I. — ^The Imperial Court

IL— Metropolitan Administration

IIL — Provincial Administration

IV. — Government of Peking • . .

V. — The Three Manchurian Provinces

VI. — The Manchu Military Organization

VII. — The Chinese Army

VIII. — Hereditary Ranks, Titles of Honour, and
Decorations

IX. — Examinations and Official Degrees

X. — Buddhism and Taoism

XI. — Mongolia and Turkestan .

XII. — Tibet and the Lamaist Hierarchy

... ... ...

... ... ... ...

.*•

... ...

...

•«.

.

Page.

«••

• •

vu

...xxvii

... xxix

...

xU

.*•

1

•••

12

...

31

.••

44

•••

48

.••

51

...

59

*•*

62

•••

69

•••

77

•••

80

.*•

97

APPENDIX.
Section L — Chinese Official Ranks 115

„ II. — The Chinese System of Distinctive Colloca-
tion of Characters 121

jy IIL — Chinese Renderings of European Titles 129

Index of Chinese Characters 187

(From the China Rmew.)

Ik the year 1876, Her Majesty the Queen of Qreat
Britain and Ireland decided to add to that title the words
^' and Empress of India." What dwell most in the memory in
connection with this event are^ perhaps, the immense excitement
which ensned on that decision being made known to her subjects,
and the fierce discussions, both in the Houses of Parliament and
among the general public, as to the advisability and fitness of that
addition to the style of the Sovereign. Once, however, the st^
was finally resolved upon, another question arose, viz., how the
title should be rendered so as to convey exactly the desired
significance to Her Majesty's Indian subjects. Simple as the
problem may seem, men whose judgment may be relied on
considered that the gravest interests were concerned in its proper
solution, and the philological result in the shape of KaUer-i-Hmd
was not arrived at without nearly as much deliberation as had been
brought to bear on the political potentiality of the new title.

Difiering in much, Qri^ital nations are found to agree in
attaching an exaggerated importance to ceremony and etiquette ; a
name has something in it to ihe native of India or Ohina, and, in
intercourse with them, much often depends on a nice appreciation
of the significance a name or title is intended to convey. In
China, especially, it is well known that ignorance of etiquette and
of ceremonial observances on the part of a foreigner may easily be
construed by the punctilious official class into either intentional
rudeness or barbariaii want of culture, a still less acceptable
alternative. It follows that, for the foreign official, an intimate
acquaintance with Chinese ceremony and its technical terms is, if
not absolutely indispensable, at least highly desirable, not only for
use in his intercourse with the native authorities, but to enable
him to understand the full significance of passing events. To
illustrate this latter point by an example : The bestowal on Li

I

• ••

VIU

Hung-chang, the Governor-General of Chih-li, of the title Win-
Hwa^Tien Ta-Hioh-She (see page 13, No. 135) is a signal proof
that the political influence ascribed to that official is fully
appreciated by the Court of Peking, but all the importance of this
step could only be appreciated by those who know that the bearer
of that title is ex officio the first civilian in the Empire ; while the
fact that such a distinction was granted to one of the subject race,
in preference to a Manchu, still further enhances the significance
of the act.*

It is, as Mr, Mayers states in his Preface, chiefly to meet
the wants of the foreign official class that' the work under
review has been written. " The labour of which the results are
embodied in the ensuing pages has been stimulated by an obvious
requirement of the public service. The urgent need of a key to
the designations in use, in both Chinese and English, for the titles
of public functionaries, which might be accepted by translators as
a common rule, was represented several years ago by Sir Walter
Medhurst, at that time Her Britannic Misyesty's Consul at
Shanghai, in an official communication addressed to Her Majesty's
Minister; and the writer, who had long contemplated the
preparation of some such work, owes to this circumstance the
immediate inducement which has hastened the fulfilment of his
design."!

Had Mr. Mayers merely given a list of Chinese titles side by
side with authorised equivalents in English, he would even then
have conferred a boon on the official classy of foreigners, for " a

key fWhich might be accepted by translators as a common

rule," would of itself shorten the toil of the translator and obviate
many of those explanatory notes which have hitherto been so often
necessary ; such a key would play in fact mdch the same labour-
saving r6le as logarithmic tables do in Mathematics.

* See Decree of January 9th, 1875, in "Translations of the PeUng Gazette^'
for that year.

t PrefacCi iii.

IZ

The author has not, however, confined himself to such a
perfunctory accomplishment of his task. Beyond the mere
translation of titles and terms, Mr. Mayers has supplied many
details of customs and usag^es, besides notes of a geographical and
historical description, which make the volume of inLst and
value for reference to those who may have no use for it as a
translator's companion. So much less is promised to the reader
by the title-page than the work really contains, that it is to be
feared many may forego acquiring it, misled by a title which
seems to herald a course of exclusively dry reading, to be
undergone only by those to whom a knowledge of technical details
happens to be necessary. This is far from being the case ; the
latter half of the work, especially, has more of the character of an
Encyclopaedia than of a dictionary, and contains in a convenient
form much information only to be gleaned elsewhere from many
not always accessible sources.

In his Preface Mr. Mayers has set forth the raison d^Stre and
the object of his new Manual, as well as the sources of his informa-
tion. With a few exceptions the latter is drawn entirely from
the Ta TsHng Hwei Tierij or " Collected Institutes " of the
Dynasty now occupying the throne of China. These '* form in
reality a code of law by which every act of the Imperial
Government, from the daily movements of the sovereign to the
conduct of the lowest official functionary, is strictly bound to be
guided."* Moreover, any one acquainted with the Collected

Institutes "will have little difficulty in recognizing that the

foundations of the Chinese State repose upon an all pervading
officialism." In these passages of the Preface lies the secret of
the mysterious first title of the work. The Chinese Government
reposes on the foundations of an all pervading officialism; the
rules by which the official class is guided are set forth in the Ta
Taking Hwei Tien ; the work under review is to a great extent a
digest of part of the Ta TsHng Hwei Tien; ergo, Mr. Mayers

♦ Profece, iv.

foels bound to name it in tlie first place ^^The CSiinese Gbvernment/'
leaving an alternative designation '^ A Manual of Chinese Titles ''
for those who prefer a simpler and more obviously appropriate
title. It is doubtless hard on an author that he should be denied
the privilege of naming his own work as he pleases, but in this
case it requires little prophetic power to predict that of the two
titles one will be taken and the other left, and that the preference
will not be accorded to the ^* Chinese Government."

For convenience of reference the book is subdivided into
twelve parts, viz. :

I.— The Imperial Court,
II. — Metropolitan Administration,
III. — Provincial Administration,
rV. — Government of Peking,

V. — The Three Manchurian Provinces,
VL — The Manchu Military Organization,
VII. — ^The Chinese Army,
VIII. — Hereditary Ranks, Ac,
IX. — ^Examinations and official degrees,
X.— Buddhism and Taoism,
XI. — Mongolia and Turkestan,
XII. — ^Tibet and the Lamaist Hierarchy,

followed by an appendix in three Sections, treating of |

j
1. — Chinese Official Banks,

2. — Chinese System of distinctive Collocation of Characters, |

3. — Chinese renderings of European Titles. I

Hm subdivision does away with the necessity for an Index
in English, and any Chinese character standing first in a title,
can be traced to the page on which it occurs by reference to the
Badical Index at the end of the work. The twelve parts above
may be classed in a general way into two divisions, the first
extending to the end of Part VII, and more strictly devoted to
the consideration of the titles of public functionaries in China ; the
Second division has to do with Titles of Honour, and with those

XL

partfi of the Chinese Empire ontside the Eighteen Provinees. It
is to the former, as the more practically useful, that it is proposed
to accord most attention in this notice.

Part I deals with the Emperor and the Imperial Family, the
Imperial Nobility, and the OfBces and Departments connected
with the Court, ending with an enumeration of the Imperial
Mausolea, or ^^ Eastern and Western Tombs," as they are
generally called by foreigners.

The first personage presented is, of course, the Emperor, and
a transcription in full will give a good idea of the manner in
which Mr. Mayers arranges his material :

HwAl^G-Ti ^ *^ — The Emperor. Ordinary designation
Hwang Shang § JL; Shang Jl- Title of respect T^ien-tsze
yZ jy the Son of Heaven. Popular appellation Tang-kin Foh-
yeU S* -^ ^ ^? the Buddha of the present day. Also Chu
Tsze i "X* ^^'9 ^^^ Master, or Lord; and, in adulatory addresses.
Wan Sui Yeh ^ ^ ^, t.^.. Lord of Ten Thousand Years.

This is sufficiently concise; perhaps too brief a notice to give of
the head and front of the Government of China. A list of the Im-
perial expressions for 7, (or rather, as usage in the West requires, toe^)
such as chin j^v? chSn-kung ^\^j &c., would have been most useful.
Again, if Hwang Shang is the ordinary designation of the Emperor,
what species of designation is Hwang Ti f It is commonly known
that Hwang Ti is the term employed in Treaties and in reference to
deceased Sovereigns, and presents some analogy with the '^ Caesar"
of the Boman Emperors, while Hwang Shang is a colloquial
expression, used also of the reigning Emperor in the Court
Circular, Memorials, &c. But, in such contexts, each of these
designations is ordinary^ and Mr. Mayers would have conferred a
favour in drawing the requisite distinction between the two usages
at the cost of a few extra lines. Lastly, Tang-kin Foh-yeh and
Wan Sui Yeh are by no means the only expressions metaphorically
applied to the Emperor. He is occasionally alluded to as the
^^ One that looks towards the South," and is flattered by being

Zll

likened to dragons of various kinds and descriptions. The word
Shing 1^; holy, appears in many locutions designating his person
and his acts, and though he apparently arrogates to himself
neither cousinship with the sun nor brotherhood with the moon,
he can fairly claim many more appellations than Mr. Mayers has
enumerated.

The Empress and other denizens of the Harem, the Princes,
Princesses and Hereditary Imperial Nobility are next noticed. It
may be remarked that many of the titles of the last named are
compounded partly, some entirely, of Manchu words of which the
signification is of a martial nature. Thus Ho-sheh (No. 17)* and
Ku-shan (No. 20) each represent Manchu words meaning a banner
(analogous to the word chH ]^ still used to denote the divisions of
the modern Manchu and Mongol soldiery), while hei-Uh (No. 19)
is said to have the signification of a leader. The same idea is
found in those of the titles of nobility which are in Chinese ; as in
the epithets Chen-kwoh ^ ^ and Fu-kwoh ^ ^ (No. 21 to
28) the " Defenders and Supporters of the State," and in the very
title I'siang-kiln 3^ ^j a more literal equivalent of our Duke, or
dux, than ^ hung. For further information respecting the titles
and designations of the Emperors and their kindred, the reader
is referred by Mr. Mayers to his article on the " Chinese Imperial
Family" appended to " Translations of the Peking Gazette for 1875."
He will there find that Gioro (No. 30) f is equivalent to the Chinese
word Shih ^j a family, and it is there incidental allusion is made
to the common practice in Peking of styling the Imperial uncles
of the present and late Emperors the ^^ seventh Prince " " sixth
Prince," and so on, accordingly as they are the seventh, sixth, &c.,
sons of Hien Feng.

* The Chinese Manchu Dictionary ^ffia ^t ^^ ^^ translates Uo-sheh by

jj a square, -to a corner, &c.

t The Dictionary referred to in the previous note translates GiOTO by
i< forehead.**

ZIU

The remainder of Part I is taken up with a list of the various
Courts and Establishments connected with the Imperial Family,
and of the officials belonging to them, winding up with the names
of the Imperial Mausolea.

Part II. elaborates, in a satisfactory and exhaustive manner?
the Metropolitan Administration (or, as more generally called, the
Central Government), and its members. The term " Metropolitan
Administration" must be carefully distinguished from the
" Government of Peking " which is subsequently treated in
Part IV.

The Central Government is administered by the Councils of
State, viz., the Grand Council (^ ^ ;^)j and the Grand
Secretariat (^ y^j generally translated heretofore "Inner
Council ") ; the Six Boards ; the Gensorate ; the Five Courts ; the
Han-lin College, and the Imperial Academy. The work of these
various Councils, Boards and Departments necessitates an
enormous staff of officials of various ranks. The titles and duties
of these are translated and explained categorically, with the
addition of much information about many of them which throws
still farther light on their ftinctions and attributes.

Another trace of the military basis on which the government
of the Manchu dynasty is organised is found in the title of the
Council of State, which is, literally interpreted, "the Place of
Plans for the Army.'' Mr. Mayers states that "this institution
derives its origin from the practice instituted by the earlier
Emperors of the present dynasty of treating public affairs on the
footing of a military council, whence the title adopted in about
the year 1730, for the council as it at present exists." The date
given is that of the 8th year of the Emperor Yung ChSng, a
sovereign whose renown depends less on feats of arms than on the
excellent Chinese in which his Decrees are written. His sole
campaigns seem to have been two expeditions against the Kal-
mucks or Eleuths, but perhaps it was at this epoch that the
Council of State obtained its new title, and superseded in

xiv

importance the former Supreme Council, the Grand Secretariat.
The latter stiU retains, however, a nominal prestige which has not
been eclipsed by the Council of State, for ^^ admission to one of
the six posts which constitute its superior ranks confers the highest
distinction attainable by Chinese of&cials." The superior ranks
here alluded to are those of Grand Secretary and Assistant Grand
Secretary, the former four, and the latter two, in number. Of
these six, half in each rank a^e always Manchus and half Chinese*
Since the death of Wfin-hsiang, the second of the Grand
Secretaryships has remained vacant, but the three others are enjoyed
by Li Hung-chang, Governor-General of Chihli, Tso Tsung-t'ang,
Governor-General of Shensi and Kansuh, and Pao-yun, a
prominent member of the Tsungli YamSn and a holHer of several
important offices, both military and civil, at the capital. Attention
has already been called in this article to the important fact that
Li Hung-chang, a Chinese, is the Senior Grand Secretary. Tlie
title of Tung Kohy is, in the Chinese " Red Book," ranked as No. 3
and T^i Jin Koh as No. 4, not in the order Mr. Mayers has
given. If this rearrangement be correct, the Chinese Tso Tsung-
t^ang is Senior to the Manchu Pao-yiin.

Of the Honorary Titles (Nos. 137 to 142), Grand Preceptor,
Grand Tutor, and so on, it may safely be asserted that they are
obsolete. Mr. Mayers seems to have imagined that there is no
distinction to be drawn between the above Preceptorships, Tutor-
ships, &c., of the Emperor, and the same offices in relation to the
Heir Apparents. They are, however, to all intents and purposes,
nominal though the appointments be, essentially distinct. To the
titles given in Nos. 137 to 142 he should have added

vii* jSi^/Si 0i6 Grand Preceptor of the Heir Apparent, 16.
viiL 3^ "^ ^ J# Grand Tutor of the Heir Apparent,.... 16.
ix. ]^ ^F* ^fc ^ Grand Guardian of the Heir Apparent, 16.
X. ^HC "^ d^ 6i6 Junior Preceptor of the Heir Apparent, 2a.
xL ^ "5^ ^ 1§ Junior Tutor of the Heir Apparent, ... 2a.
xiL 3J|C '^^^Jomor Guardian of &e Hair Appareiut, 2a.

XV

The author says, ^^ These titles are now seldom conferred with
the exception of No. VI," i.e., ^ ^, Junior Quardian. As a
matter of fact at the present day this title is never conferred, nor
can it be said that this title is ever bestowed ^^ <m the (nominal)
Guardianship of the Heir Apparent." Mr. Mayers would seem
further to imply that yS^ "jr* ^ 0jjl, Junior Guardianship of the

Heir Apparent, is the sole relic of these ^^ palace honours " J^ "0$
(as they are commonly called). But there are actually four
eminent officials (viz., Tso Tsung-t^ang, Li Hung-chang, Ch^ong-
^hou and Pao-yiin), who all hold the title of Grcmd Guardian of
the Heir ApparenL As this title was held by the late Grand
Secretary, Wen-hsiang, and as it is also held by the three existent
Grand Secretaries, it may fairly be inferred that Grand Guardian-
ship of the Heir Apparent is essentially part of a Grand Secretary's
roll of honours.

Under the head of the "Tsungli Yamte" (No. 152) will be
found an interesting sketch of the institution of that Chinese
Foreign Office. ^^This department, like the Kon^ki-^^u or
Grand Council, is considered not so much a separate organization
with ranks and promotion specially appertaining to itself, as a
species of cabinet formed by the admission of members of other
depai'tments of state." Brought into existence by a Decree of
January 19th, 1861, and comprising among its members all those
of the Council of State, and six other officials of the highest rank,
this Yaniin has been a living fact for seventeen years, and yet the
Chinese ^^Bed Book" continues unconscious of its existence.
This department superintends not merely the affairs incidental to
foreign diplomatic intercourse, but also those institutions in which
foreigners form part of the working staff, such as the Maritime
Customs, the " Peking University," &c. The Departmental work
of this office is conducted by Secretaries, of which the senior are
styled Taung^pan m&i^j and the Junior Cliang^king ^^ ; these
two last-named characters reproduce the sound of a Manchu word

XVI

meaning an " assistant," and which is properly spelled CJiang-chin^
but vulgarly pronounced Chan-yin (see page 13),*

With regard to the Six Boards, it should be remarked that
the order in which they are enumerated is not arbitrary. As in
England where the Treasury is more aristocratic than the India
Office, and the Home Department than the Colonial Office, so in
China the Board of Civil Office ranks first, as would be expected
in this land of officialdom. The literary designation of the Board
of War, viz. {Hsi Pu j^np) is a curious one at first sight, if the
character Hd be taken in the sense of a rhinoceros! It more
probably means, of course, what K^ang-hi calls -^ ^t ^ B^
"strength of martial weapons."

Each of the Six Boards has an almost similar staff of Pre-
sidents, Vice-presidents, Secretaries and clerks, and many of their
titles are held as honorary or purchased distinctions. Thus every
Governor-General is ex officio President of the Board of War, while
Governors of Provinces, and the Directors-General of the Yellow
River, and of the Grain Transport, are similarly Vice-presidents of
same Board. The Secretaryships (Nos. 163 to 166) "are very
largely obtained by purchase or conferred as distinctions without
entailing more than a nominal connection with the Boards to which
they relate." Under these circumstances the title has generally
prefixed to it the characters ^^P Nff4-wai, '* Supernumerary."

This part of the book is remarkable for the conciseness and,
at the same time, the comprehensiveness of its details. Though of
less than twenty pages, it constitutes an excellent epitome of all
the information that can be required to form a very complete idea
of the machinery of the Central Government, but its contents will
not be retained at the student's finger-ends without considerable
study and exercise of memory.

Part III has to do with the Provincial Administration and

* Pih'fieh-she (No. 181) represents the sound of a Manchu word, not hit he shi^
but bit'hS'Shit literally shu-pan j^jfe, from bit-M "a book."

xvii

as such will have a nearer interest for residents at the Ports. The
highest civilian in the provinces is the Tsung^iuh^ or Grovernor-
General ;* he is not necessarily the highest ofEcial in his own pro-
vince, for where there is a Tartar General that officer ranks with
but before him (see No. 426); the Governor ranks with but after
him, so that these three officials are sufficiently close in rank to
make it impossible for any one of them to overbalance the other
two; they form a triangle of which the sides are very nearly equal,
any two sides being necessarily greater than the third. The career
of Ying Han, who was Governor- General at Canton in 1875,
illustrates this point, which is the most pronounced characteristic
of the provincial policy of the present Dynasty. Ying Han, being
a Manchu, might naturally have looked for the support of his
fellow-countryman the Tartar General, Ch*ang Shan, in his pro-
jects, but, as it turned out, the latter sided with the Governor, and
Ying Han found himself overpowered. So strong was this coali-
tion felt to be, that, though the Governor-General had powerful
friends at Court, it was deemed necessary to dismiss him from his
post.

This Chinese system of equipoise (which will be found equally
in force throughout the Central Administration, where every Board
has two Presidents, four Vice-Presidents, and so on), finds a
counterpart in Japan where each post has two incumbents, one of I O
whom acts as a check on the other. To complete the system of '\ •
control over the provinces, the Censors have the power of pronoun-
cing abuses which may come to their knowledge.

♦ Mr. Mayers ignores the title of Viceroy so commonly applied to these
officials. They cannot be held to represent the Sovereign as do our Viceroy of
India and Lord Lieutenants of Ireland, but are more comparable to Our
Governors of Colonies ; while the Siin-fu resemble, in most provinces, what we
call Lieutenant-Governors. Observe, however, that a Tsung-tuh is not a mere
Siin-fu of higher rank. Their functions are essentially different, and it is
expressly stated, with regard to the Governors-General of Ssii-ch*uan, Ean-suh
and Chih-li, that they exercise the duties of Governor, in addition to those of
Governor-General,

• ••

xvm

Of the Financial and Judicial Oommissioners, commonly
called Provincial Treasurer and Judge, each province has one,
excepting Kiang-su, which has two Treasurers, and Fuh-kien,
which may be said to have two Judges, as the Intendant of
Formosa (Taotai of Taiwan) has the rank and powers of a Judicial
Commissioner. The privilege of addressing memorials directly to
the Throne ends with the two Commissioners.

The Taotai, or Intendant of Circuit, forms the link between
the high officials of the province and those who come under the
general designation of ^^ Local Authorities." He is the last of
those who are addressed as Ta-jSuj y^ ^j and the first whose
jurisdiction is limited to a certain defined portion of a province.
To style him ^^ a functionary placed in administrative control over
two or more Prefectures " is too restrictive. A circuit mav, and
often does, comprise not only Prefectures, but also Independent
Pepartments, Independent Sub- Prefectures and even towns which
cannot be classed under any of these designations, such as Urumtsi
and Murui, included in the ChSn-Ti (s|f| ^) circuit, Kansuh;
or Shan-hai-kuan {\1J }$ 9^)^ which is under the control of the
only Taotai in Shingking. There are seveniy-seven territorial
circuits in China, Shensi coming first with eight, and Shingking
last with one. Circuits are variously named ; generally the first
characters of the subordinate cities are strung together, as in the
Chi-Tung-T'ai-Wu-Lin ^M^^}^ circuit in Shantung;
occasionally, however, they adopt the ancient name of the region,
as the Ho-tung fSf j^ circuit, Shansi, and Liug-hsi '^ Q
circuit, Kuangtung ; or their designation implies their orientcUiony
as in the case of the Ch^uan-pei )\\ Hf^ (North Sstich^uan), and
Kuei-hsi ]^ @§ (West Kueicbou) circuits.

It being by Treaty stipulated that Consuls shall rank with
Taotais, it is with the latter that the foreign authorities at the
ports have most to do. Canton forms an exception, for there
being no territorial Taotai resident there, Consuls communicate
directly with the Gk)vemor-GI«neral and Gbvemor. At Tientsin

there is a special post of ^^ Customs Taotai," with whom interna-
tional business is transacted. The exceptional position of the
Taotai of Formosa has already been alluded to.

The "Prefects and Magistrates of different classes constitute
the general administrative body of the provincial civil service."
They are the officials who come most nearly in relation with the
general population, and as such are called the "Father and
Mother* of the people." They are commonly known as the
** local authorities."

In the Eighteen Provinces there are 182 Prefectures; of these
Shensi, as Mr. Mayers remarks, contains the smallest number, viz. ,
seven, but Kiangsi has not the honour of containing the largest,
for Yiinnan comes in first with 14. There are besides two Prefec-
tures in Shingking. Shun-t'ien Fu (Peking) and FSng-t^en Fu
(Moukden) are exceptional Prefectures, and are administered by
Governors called Fuyin )\^ ^ (See Parts IV and V). The
latest addition to the Prefectures of China is T'ai-pei Fu (§ ^K)
in the North of Formosa, a few miles from Tamsui.

Next in rank to the Fu, is the T^ing or Sub-prefecture, which
is of two kinds, either independent of, or subject to, a Prefecture.
Both kinds are found to be established in positions where the
administration of the laws is a matter of difficulty. There are 25
Independent Sub-prefectures in China, Ssu-chuan having the
greatest number, 6, while many provinces have none. Sub-
prefectures, as a rule, are to be found on the outskirts of the
Empire Proper, especially where the Imperial authority is not
very firmly established; others have been founded to control the
aboriginal tribes in the interior of Kuangsi, Kueichou, Yiinnan, &c.
There are a few 'Pings outside the Eighteen Provinces; that of
Hu'-lan in Tsitsihar may be instanced (See No. 374). A new

I

* It may not be so generally known that Assistant Magistrates are, at Peking,
jokingly called 'JM Wh 1^ yi nai-nai the "Aunts and Orand-mothers "
[of the people].

Sub-prefeotare has lately been established in Kansuh (to the South
of Ling Chou ^) with the name Ning-ling ^ ^•

The Independent Departments, or Chih-li chow, correspond in
rank to Sub-prefectures, and are a grade higher than the San-chow
wL /H' ^^ Subordinate Departments. Of the two kinds there are
altogether 243 in China, of which number 45 are in Kuangsi.
This estimate includes, however, 29 native Departments (referred
to under No. 328) which find place in the Chinese '* Red Book."

Of the Sieuj or Districts, there are 1,299 in the Eighteen
Provinces and 7 in Shingking. Chihli comes first with 124 and
Kueichou last with 34. The average for each province is about 70.
Every prefectural city, with the exception of two in Kueichou,
is also a District city, and in some cases, as at Peking for instance,
comprises two District cities within its limits. In one solitary
instance, that of T^ai-ts^ang Chou in Kiangsu, a District city is
coincident with the Chef-lieu of a department. The Hien as a
division of a province, seems to have existed with little or no
variation from very early times. The word itself is explained by
its derivative Bsiian :}§[? thus meaning ^^ dependent [on a Pre-
fecture]." While the ChUn ^ has been superseded by the Fu
)3*> while the Chou tH has dwindled from a province to a de-
partment, the Hien has persisted unchanged.

Prefectures, Departments and Districts, as well as the offices
of the high provincial authorities, are provided with a stafi^ of
assistants, secretaries, clerks, &c., known by the common name of
Tao Tsa ^ ^« With these is concluded the enumeration of the
members of the provincial administration. The Literary Chancellor-
ship (No. 323) is "a special appointment, usually filled by officials
of high literary degrees who leave Peking for three years to serve
in this capacity. They preside at the prefectural examinations and
give the degree of Siu-ts^aV The collection of Customs at Canton
and Hwai-ngan, and the manufactures of silks, &c., at Nanking,
Soochow and Hangchow, are superintended by officials specially
appointed from the Imperial Household. The supervision of the

XXI

Yellow River embankments, and the control of the Transport of
Grain,* are invested in Directors-General, the headquarters in the
former case being in Shantung and in the latter in Kiangsu.
Each of these officials ranks as a Vice-president of the Board of
War and as Junior Vice-president of the Censorate, thus being on
the same footing as Governors of Provinces.

Among the mountain ranges of Kuangtung, Kuangsi, Yiin-
nan, Kueichou and Ssiichu'an there remain to the present day
tracts of country inhabited by aboriginal tribes which the Chinese
have never been able to reduce to complete subjection. The
government of these semi-independent tribes " in general is left in
the hands of their hereditary chieftains, upon whom high sounding
titles of various degrees are bestowed in accordance with a system
introduced originally by the Mongol conquerors of China," The
independence of the aborigines in Formosa is even more complete,
though the island is perhaps on the eve of a change in that respect.
The Japanese expedition awoke the Chinese Government rather
roughly to a sense of its short-comings, and the establishment of a
District (called HSng-ch*un fS ^); at the south of the island,
was the first step in the required direction. Even now (or at
least until very lately) the Magistrate at Heng-ch*un continues to
pay black-mail quarterly to the chief of the neighbouring tribe.

»

The establishment of a second city at Pilam, on the South-east
coast, is now contemplated, and the Formosans may be induced in
process of time to hai t'u wei liu 3sC it ^ im " accept the
rights of citizenship."

Part IV treats of the Government of the City of Peking.
Though nominally a Fuj or Prefecture^ the importance it derives
from being the residence of the Court, necessitates a particular
organisation in its government. Its head is not a Prefect,
Chih'/uy but a Fu-yin ^ ^j which the author translates

* The Director-General of the Grain Transport is, in the Ta Tiding Skei Tien,
stated to be of the higher grade of the seoond rank, not of the lower grade, as
classed by Mr. Mayers.

^^ (Governor," and which has been frequently rendered Mayor, He
has a colleague called ^' Governor Adjoint " and, as subordinates,
a Vice-Grovernor and a Sub-prefect {^/g Pp)j besides the usual
staff of a prefecture. The other officials of the municipal govern-
ment are connected in one way or another with the police of the
metropolis, excepting a few who superintend the Peking Octroi^
Granaries and Mints. This Part contains the only humorous
remark detectable throughout the book; as such it is worth
quoting, and will at once recommend itself to any one who
has visited Peking. '^The Boadway Office. The repair and
maintenance of the streets of the outer (Chinese) City of Peking
are — nominally — cared for by this department.^' Mr. Mayers is
not responsible for the italics.

From the wording of the final paragraph (No. 364), it might
be inferred that all the cash current in China are coined at Peking.
This is not so ; though fewer in number than during the early
reigns of the dynasty, there are still mints in several provinces
which continue to issue copper coin. It is difficult to state any-
thing with certainty with regard to the present reign, but under
T^ung-chih there were mints open in Fuhkien, Shantung, Shansi,
Kiangsu, Hupei, Hunan, Chekiang, Kuangsi, Tiinnan, Sstich^uan,
Taiwan and Chihli (at Paoting Fu). In the Peking Gazette of a
few months ago there appeared a memorial from the Governor-
General of Kansuh, asking to be excused from obeying a decree
ordering him to reopen the Kansuh mint (formerly located at
Kung-ch^ang Fu ^ |§ . )

A brief sketch, in Part Y, of the system of Government
adopted in the three Manchurian provinces, is followed by a very
complete r&nim4 of the Manchu Military organization in Part VL

It is scarcely necessary to point out that herein lies all that is
most characteristic of, and peculiar to, the reigning dynasty. The
civil administration of the Ming Sovereigns suffered little change
by the accession of the Manchu rulers; it is even surprising, as was
pointed out in note in the China Review (Vol. YI, No. 2, page
137), to how small an extent the dominant race participates in the

XXlll

direct Government of the people. The sole tangible precaution
adopted against revolts of the Chinese has been the stationing of
Manehii troops at certain places in the Eighteen Provinces and
Mongolia, to which must be added the (nominally) large garrisons
in and around Peking. The balancing of authority in the pro-
vincial Governments, by which no one official has a dangerous
excess of power in his own hands, has already been adverted to,
and acts as a safeguard against attempted treason among the
official dass; while, finally, the exaggerated reverence for parental
authority, which is so univereal in the Chinese people that the
promises of the Fifth Commandment are by some considered to
have been fulfilled towards this race, is transmuted into a species
of loyalty to the office, if not to the person, of the Emperor.

The Eight Banners, *' under one or another of which all
living Manchus and all descendants of the Mongolian and Chinese
Soldiery of the Conquest, are enrolled," together with the Chinese
provincial troops, or " Army of the Green Standard " (see Part
VII), constitute the standing forces of the Empire. In actual
warfare, however, more practical use is made of the '^ so-called
Yunff ^ braves, or irregulars, enlisted or discharged according
to circumstance*." The regulars of each province are ranged
under three conunands, v£2r.,that of the General-in-Chief (^2^^i-<wA),
of the Governor- General, and of the Governor. The latter
division forms the garrison of the provincial capital, and like that
of the Governor- General, has a commandant with the title of
Chimff-kuriy who fills the post of Adjutant or Military Secretary,
At Canton the Governor-General's Adjutant is known as the
Kuang-hip ^ ^^\ and the Governor's as the Chung-hip ^ fjjj.

There are separate military organisations under the command
of the Directors- General of the Yellow River and of the Grain
Transport, and there is a special squadron to whom is allotted the
duty of patrolling .the Yang-tsze.

Mr. Mayers omits all mention of the marine forces of China.
In many cases, certainly, the designations of the officers are

XXIV

identical with those for the corresponding ranks of the land army,
but their titles would demand a different translation, and should
therefore have been given. There are, besides, some few titles
peculiar to the naval service, of which Kuan Chia Kuan ^ ^ Jg 7
Commander of a gunboat, may, be instanced as one. As it is, if a
naval officer has the title of Yeo-Jci (No. 444), as he very well may,
he must still be styled a *' Major," however incongruous the
rendering may seem to Western ideas.

With Part VII ends that portion of Mr. Mayers' work which
has to do with the titles of public functionaries in China. As re-
gards the rest of the book, it is set forth in the Preface that " the
most detailed attempts at explanation have been devoted to those
branches of the subject which are comparatively remote from the
beaten track of study, and upon which, consequently, a new
source of information is likely to be more useful. This has been
especially the case with reference to the Chinese system of literary
examination and titular distinctions, as also in connection with the
distribution of authority in Mongolia, Turkestan and Tibet."

On these points the reader is referred to the book itself, as
no notice which did not deal largely in quotation could do justice
to the chapters which Mr. Mayers has devoted to them^ and which
are copious enough in details to form treatises by themselves. In
Parts XI and XII, especially, there is packed away a vast store
of information in a marvellously small space.

The Sections of the Appendix are as useful in their way as the
foregoing portion of the book. Section I., on the "Chinese
Official Eanks," may be held to throw ^ general light over the
rest of the work. It is also to some extent supplementary to
Part IX on '^ Examinations and Official Degrees."

The " practice of vacating office by the junior of two relatives
who may be brought into contact with each other, within certain
prescribed limits, in the same provincial areaf" which "is de-
signated hwei pi or ' respectful withdrawal in the presence of a
superior'" (page 119) was well illustrafced on^ th^. appoiatment

XXV

of Liu K^nn-yi in 1875 to the Governor-Generalship of Canton.
Up to that time Liu Ch*ang-yu, of the same familj^ as Liu K^un-
yi, and said to be his unele, was Governor of Kuangsi. The
impossibility of the latter remaining as subordinate to his own
nephew was so obvious that tlie decree appointing Lin Oh^ang-yu
to the Governor-Generalship of Yunnan and Kueiehou appeared
side by side with the announcement of his nephew's appointment
to Canton. This case, it is true, cannot be considered as exactly
fulfilling Mr. Mayers' definition of hwei pi, but shows how the
same desired result can be effected by different means.

Sections II and III will chiefly be interesting and useful to
translators. The system of distinctive collocation of characters is
indeed one " which cannot safely be ignored by any student of the
language," especially if he be at any time engaged in official
correspondence with the Chinese authorities.

The list of Chinese renderings of European titles is, however,
the most welcome addition of all to the body of the work. Its
usefulness can be best expressed by saying that to have omitted it
would have detracted seriously from the completeness of the book.
It is not too much to say that Mr. Mayers is the one man whose
dictum on such a subject is likely to be universally accepted, and
all must be grateful to him that he has published his dicta for the
general benefit. That the renderings Mr. Mayers has sanctioned
will be so accepted is hardly questionable. No list of the sort has
been hitherto in general use, except the few titles employed at
Hongkong, and translators have been reduced to rendering
European titles into Chinese in a rather haphazard way. Among
the Diplomatic titles it will be noticed that Mr. Mayers has lately
adopted a new rendering for the office he himself fills; this is
presumably in consequence of his promotion to the local rank of a
Second Secretary in the Diplomatic Service.

Among the* naval titles, " Commander," was formerly
translated Chu-tsiang 3E W' ^^^ perhaps the reason for the
substitution of Ts^ an-tsiang should have been given, or at least

some notice have been taken of the change. As a whole, however,
the renderings appear to be fairly well selected and adapted.

That the subject selected, and the treatment it has received
combine to make a book which will add to Mr. Mayers' reputation,
and which can be cordially recommended to the student and the
general reader, it is hoped the foregoing pages have made suffi-
ciently plain.

a. M. H. PLAYFAIR.

INTRODUCTION TO THE SECOND EDITION.

The present edition of Mayers' Chinese Government bein^
merely a reprint of the original publication and not a revision, the
publishers have entrtistdicl to me the task of embodying in an
Introduction such information reorardinsj administrative changes
during the past eight years as shall compensate to some extent
for the emendations which would have more fittingly found a
place in the body of the work. Some alterations were suggested
by me in the China Review when criticising the book shortfv afler
its apj^earance, and need not here be further alluded to, as the
critique in question is appended to this re-issue. Sundry further
corrections of the original text have occurred to me since and
others have become necessary o\ying to the reorganisation of
certain provinces by Imjierial Decree. I propose to add a few
notes, which I consider likely to be of general interest, on what
may be called Curiosities of Chinese Officialdom. The addition,
finally, of an index to the Chinese titles, arranged alphabetically
according to the author's own system of orthography, will prove,
I trust, a means of speedier reference than the original Radical
Index.

G. M. H. PLAYFAIR.

Shanghai, June 14th, 1886.

1 !

FURTHER ADDENDA AND CORBIGBNDA.

.<•♦►-

During the minority of the Emperor T^ung Chih, in 1862,
the Prince of Kung was appointed Regent of the Empire. The
style adopted to designate his position gives us a useful phrase, viz. :

I ChSng Wang H |j; 2*— Priw<^ Regent.

Another phrase, necessitated by the minority of the present
Emperor, is —

Hwang T'ai How Lin Ch^ao S iC JS^ tt 4B :— -Empress
Dowager Regent. Her Majesty's act of regency is also described
by the expresssion Ch^ui Lien T^ing Ch4ng £ H M( iSfc> literally,
*' To drop the curtain and administer the CJovernment," as the
ministers' eyes may not gaze on the Empress's face.

No. 143. — Of the ten 8ttbchancellors, six are bannermen

and four Chinese.

<

No. 144, — Of the iew Readers, six are . banaermen and
four Chinese.

No. 145. — ^The Assistant Readers are sixteen in numl^er^
not nine ; fourteen of these are Bannermen and two Chinese.

No. 146. — Of the six Archivists, four are bannermen and
two Chinese.

XXX

FUKTHER ADDENDA AND COKBIOENDA.

No. 200, — Weighty affairs of State are often entrusted to
the deliberations of the ^^Six Boards and Nine Ministries/' but
there is likewise a more select assemblage which has similar
functions, in criminal affairs, viz. :

San Fah Sze H & '9* — Kie Commission of Revision,
consisting of the President bf the Board of Pbnishmbhts, the
President of the Censorate and the Director of the Grand Court of
Revision.

No. 282. — The Epistolary style of a Subprefect isalso Fen

The following is a list of the denominations of Second Cl^ss
Subprefects, indicating the special functions they exercise; the
title l^ung Che @ ^ is to be understood after each ;

mm'
mm

Specially apiKiintefd
tii'coatBol various
classes of evildoers.

^ w ! In charge of water
j> ^&t I communications.

rtKf

mm
mm

~\

>

With control ovei' coast
and river defence.

y

With 'military

jurisdiction.

ASfC

4^ iSt I" charge of naval
construction. '

He &

JT ^^ ^ With jurisdiction ov^r
,^ /^turbulent populations

1$^

and s^ypge tribes.

Some of these hav6 entrusted to them a combination of duties
as indicated by their titles. For instance a H jf T'ung Ch6 has

FUBTHBR ABDENDA AND CORRIGENDA. XXXI

to attend to the Salt Revenue as well as to keep in order turbulent
characters.

No, 283. — Assistant Subprefects enjoy a similar variety of
denominations, as the following list shows (the title j|[ fj being
understood) : —

mm

i! m

^ Ty

mm

m 19

mm.

mtm^m

mR

m^

mm

^m

jSR 9RH

IB M

»w

mm

isnr

No. 284. — The Personal Designation in the recital of titles
Cheng T^ang JE ^ is used of a Department Magistrate as well
as of a Prefect and District Magistrate.

No. 326. — The characters Ho-tung fij ^ in the title of the
Director-General of the Yellow River are said to be a contraction
for -ffo-nan and Shan-^ww^, the two provinces with which he is
chiefly concerned.

No. 329. — There are in the provinces of Kuangsi and
Yunnan certain native Departments {t^u-clum i ffl) and Districts
{t'u'hsien, ;j^ J|^), and one instance in Ssiich^uan of a Township
{t^u-asU, i ^)j <^f which the administration is confided to
hereditary rulers. In about one half of these the official is a
native of the place, but in the remainder the rulers are from
remote provinces of the Empire, notably from Yi-tu Hsien, which
is the head District of Ch^ing-chou Fu, Shantung. It is an
interesting subject of enquiry how these extra-provincials came to
acquire hereditary rule over the native tribes of the southern
frontiers.

Subjoined is a Table of hereditary jurisdictions in Yunnan,
Kuangsi and Ssiich^uan.

xxxii

FUBTHBR ADDENDA AND COBRI0IN3>A.

T.C.== t'u-clwu ± %i T.H.= i'u^hsien ± IK;

T.S,= t^U-88U i -g.

District.

Chieh-an ^ ^
Chi'lun ^ jSi
Ssia-lei "f ^
Hsiang-wu |^J jSf
Lo-yang ^ ^

Ming-ying ^ ||
SsU-ling g §|

Chiu'hsing j\j ^

Kuo-hua ^ ^
An-pHng ^ ^
Chiang f£
Chung Jfe

PHng-hsiang ^ jp|
Shanq^lin Jl ^

&« is

Rank.

T.C.

T.C.

55

T.S.
T.H.

T.C.

55
55
55

T.H.
T.C.

J3

Province.

Kuangsi

5>
55
55
55
55
55
55

Ssuch^uan
Kuangsi
Yunnan

Kuangsi

55
55
55
55
99
55
55
55
55
55

Native Place of Magistrate.

Department

55
55

55

District
Department

55

55

55

.^5

Li-yang Hsien, Kiangsu
T'ai-ts'ang Chou, Kiangsu

Shao-hsing Fu,

Cheh-kiang

Chehkiang

ofaantnng

55

Yi-tu Hsien, Shantung

55

55
55
55

55
>5
55

Nos. 383-384. — It may be noted in connection with the titles
of these two mints that the word Ts^Han j^ here is equivalent to
Tauten @| "money." The latter character is of comparatively recent
introduction into the language and replaced the ancient j^ which
was the original word for money. The character }g has a similar
meaning.

No. 455-ii. The character H is a misprint for f|.

FURTHER ADDENDA AlTD CORRIGENDA. XXXlii

Appendix^ Section I. To his remarks on ranks^ Mr. Mayers
might have added that, besides the nine buttons in common use,
there is a tenth, called 'Pow pHn ting tax S^ iip IK IS ^^ highest
of all, bestowed on eminent officials. The possessor, it is said,
wears a red button of the 1st rank without the usual silk loop.

Appendix, Section III. The following is a list of titles in use
for officials of the Imperial Maritime Customs : —

Inspector-General H % i[f ^ Tsung Shui Wu Sze.

Chief Secretary « S X « «» ^ { ^^Jhf i wTSe''^

Chinese Secretary mnmitimm^ { ^^gl'^k^r^^te.

Commissioner ^ IBf ^ ^h.m Wu Sze.

Deputy Commissoner §lj ^ fSSr ^ Fu Shui Wu Sze.

Assistant ^ |j| Pang Pan.

Divisional Inspector jgj X ^ Siin Kung Sze.

Harbour Master H j|B[ fi Li Ch'wan T4ng.

Tide Surveyor i^ ^ Tsung Siin.

Examiner H g Yen Hwo.

Tidewaiter ^ ^ ^ K'ien Tze Show.

Berthing Officer ^ fg ^ Che Po So.

Recent Administrativb Reorganisation.

Of recent administrative changes the first in chronological
order was the assimilation of the Government of Manchuria to
that of China Proper.

Previous to 1876 the government of the provinces of Kirin
and Hehlungkiang was, as stated in Part V., on a purely military
basis; while that of Shingking, though approximating to the
model of the Eighteen Provinces, was still essentially military.
Since 1876 a gradual- change has been effected. In Shingking
the Military Governor has been invested with the powers of a
Governor-General, the Civil Governor with those of a SUn Fu ; a
new Intendancy, that of the Marches or Eastern Border ^ j{} JJ,

XXXIV FURTHER ADDENDA AUD CORRIGENDA.

has been established, and a prefect rules at Gh^ang-t^u ^ |,
(instead of a Siibprefect) with several recently established Districts
under him.

In 1882 the reorganisation of Kirin commenced. The High
Authorities remain for the present military, but an Intendancy
has been established at Kirin, comprising one prefecture, several
departments and districts and four independent subprefectures (at
Pedne, Ch'ang-ch^un, Pin-chou and Wu-ch'ang).

The remodelling of Hehlungkiang is under consideration but
the details have not yet been published in the Peking Gazette.

The recovery to Chinese rule of the New Dominion by the
late Tso Tsung-t*ang has been followed, after an interval of several
years, by a change in the mode of government, similar to the
modifications in the Manchurian regime. In 1884 the Administrator
of the New Dominion, Liu Chin-t^ang gij ^ ^, was gazetted
Governor of Kansuh (a province which previously had been under
the direct control of a Governor- General) and the New Dominion.
At the same time a Provincial Treasurer was appointed and the
Commander-in-Chief at Urumtsi was transferred to a similar post
in the new province. Up to the present no Provincial Judge has
been appointed. The other high provincial officials are a Brigade-
General at Aksu ; a Taotai at the same town with jurisdiction over
three independent Subprefectures and one independent Department
with several new Districts ; and a Taotai at Kashgar with
jurisdiction over two independent Subprefectures, three in-
dependent Departments and sundry Districts.

Lately steps in the direction of reorganisation have been
taken in Formosa. Up till now a simple Intendancy dependent
on Fuhkien, it is now proposed to change the status of the island
to that of a separate province. The post of Govenor of Fuhkien
will be abolished, the duties of Governorship devolving on the
Governor-General of Min-cheh, who will be thus assimilated to
the Viceroys of Ssuch'uan and Chihli. The present Governor of
Fuhkien will be Governor of T^aiwan, and will reside in Formosa

FURTHER ADDENDA AND CORRIGENDA. XXXV

for six months in each year. Such at least is the present
arrangement, but it is probable he will be required eventually to
pass his whole time there. His provincial capital is yet to be
built, at a point midway between Chia-yi and Chang-hua ; in the
meanwhile T'ai-pei Fu (Bangka) will serve temporarily as the
seat of government. His provincial staff will consist of a
Treasurer (a new post), a Taotai at T^ai-pei, who will also be
Superintendent of Customs, a Taotai at T'ai-wan Fu, who will be
at the same time Provincial Judge and Director of Postal
Communications, Brigade- Generals at the Pescadores, T^ai-wan
and T'ai-pei, Prefects at T*ai-wan, T'ai-pei, Chang-hua and
Pilam and several Department Magistrates, Subprefects and
District Magistrates besides those already existing.

The opening of the southern borders of Kuangsi to French
trade is likely to require the introduction of certain administrative
changes, but so far these have only been hinted at. The British
conquest of Burma cannot fail to entail similar consequences in
the immediate future.

Another important result of the late Franco-Chinese war was
the institution in 1885 of a new Board at Peking styled the
Hai Pu f^ fig, or Admiralty, with the Emperor's father, the Prince
of Chun, as chief. The staff will probably be on much the same
model as that offered by the original Six Boards, but full details
are still wanting.

It is no doubt in connection with the general scheme of naval
reorganisation that the Brigade-General hitherto stationed at
Yang-chiang T'ing in Kwangtung has been transferred [June,
1886] to the port of Pakhoi. This official's command, as that of
his colleague at Kao-chou Fu, in the same province, is now naval
instead of military.

XXXVl FURTHER ADDEin)A AND CORRIGENDA.

NOTES ON SUNDRY OFFICIAL POSTS.

The Central Government.

Thongh not mentioned in the " Chinese Government," each
of the Six Boards and several of the minor departments (such
as the Mongolian Superintendency, the College of Imperial
Physicians, the Courts of Sacrificial Worship, Banqueting and
State Ceremonial) would appear to be normally provided with a
Supervisor [||| 3 ^ ^ -i^ Hf]* Practically these posts are
seldom all filled. For instance, in 1885 there were such
Supervisors over the Boards of Civil Office, Revenue and Works,
while the Boards of Ceremonies, War and Punishments had none.

Precedence amono Metropolitan Officials.

There appears to be no written law regulating precedence
among the higher posts at Peking, but by observing the course of
promotion in the pages of the Gazette, the following scale has
been elaborated and may be, considered fairly accurate.

1. Comptroller-General, Civil Office.

2. do. do. Works.

3. do. do. Mongolian Superintendency.

4. President, Civil Office.

5. do. Revenue.

6. do. Rites.

7. do. War.

8. do. Punishments.

9. do. Works.

10. do. Mongolian Superintendency.

11. do. Censorate.

12. Senior Vice-president, Civil Office.

13. Junior do. do.

14. Senior do. Revenue.

15. Senior Yice-preftident^ Bites.

16. do. do. War.

17. do. do. Punishments.

18. Junior do. Bevenoe.
19« do. do. mtes.

20. do. do. Punishments.

21. Senior do. Works.

22. Supervisor, Instruction.

23. Senior Vice-president, Mongolian Superintendency.

24. Junior do. Works.

25. Senior do. Censorate.

26. President, Imperial Clan Court.

27. Junior Vice-president, War.

28. do. do. Mongolian Superintendency.

29. Junior Vice-president, Censorate.

30. Director, Office of Transmission.

31. do. Court of Revision.

32. do. Court of Sacrificial Worship.

33. . do. Court of the Imperial Stud*

34. do. Banqueting Court.

35. do. Court of State Ceremonial.

36. Deputy Supervisor, Instruction.

37-42. Subdirectors in the same order o^ tlie Directors

given above.

Duplication of Posts.

The posts of President, Vice-presidents Senior and Junior,
and (^ Senior and Junior Censors in the Six Boards, are held in
duplicate, one incumbent being Manchu or Mongol and the other
a Chinese or Chinese Bannerman; such posts are consequently
distinguished as Manchu appointments m ^ and Chinese
appointments ^ jj^.

As a rule Chinese Bannermen are eligible for the Chinese ap-
pointments only, but'tbey are sometimes found occupying aMonohu

XXXVlll FURTfiBR ADDENDA AND CORRIGfiNDA.

post It appears to be in such cases essential that the Bannerman's
name should be on the Manchu pattern. Thus ^ fb, a Chinese
Banuerman who in the Manchu style uses only his ming ig?
would be eligible where ^ jg, also a Bannermen but called by
both his orignial hsing fj^j Haily and his mingy T^ung^ would be
debarred.

The same duplication of posts prevails in the other departments
of government with two exceptions, viz., the Mongolian Super-
intendency, officered exclusively by Manchus and Mongols, and
the College of Imperial Physicians, in which the officials are all
Chinese, and almost invariably natives of Peking.

Supernumerary Vice-president.

There is attached to the Mongolian Superintendency a
Supernumerary Vice-president [ (K ^ f^ J^ ] not mentioned by
Mayers. He is always a Mongol prince.

Mongolia, Turkestan and Thibet.

Previous to the recent reorganisation of the new Dominion
and its partial incorporation in Kansuh, the administration of the
government in Mongolia and Turkestan was reserved for members
of the eight Banners. The only exceptions were the Administrator
of the new Dominion, the Commander-in-Chief at Urumtsi, and
the Brigade-General at Hi.

The Eight Banners.

There is no published information, accessible to the public,
on the personnel of the Banner Corps, except that the Red
Book notes the fact whenever a high Peking official happens
to be Captain-General, Lieutenant-General, or Deputy Lieutenant-
General of a Banner.

Appointments to these commands are, however, usually
notified in the Gazette, and by diligent study of this periodical from

FUUTHER ADDENDA AND COKBIGBNDA. XXXIX

(lay to day, it is possible after a few years to form a tolerably
accurate table of the incumbents of Banner commands* The
following rules seem to hold good for posts in the Banner
organisation :

1. — Bannermen only are eligible.

2. — Any Bannerman is eligible for any post; that is to say,
a Manchu may be in command of a Mongol or Chinese Banner or
vice versa,

3. — But a Bannerman is seemingly never appointed to
command the Banner to which he himself belongs. For instance,
a Manchu of the Plain white Banner might command the Yellow
or the Bordered white, but never the Plain white corps.

In this connection a curious fact may be chronicled.
Ch'ung-yi^3|^ (distinguished as the only Bannerman who ever
attained the distinction of Chuang Yuan ^ %) whose daughter
was selected to be T^ung-Chih's Empress, was by birth a Mongol,
but on becoming the father-in-law of the Emperor, was trans-
ferred to a Manchu Banner. It is not impossible that this
expedient was adopted in order that T^ung-chih's consort might be
nominally of his own race.

A peculiarity in connection with Chinese Bannermen is noticed
above under the head of '' Duplication of Posts."

Provincial Authorities.

With three exceptions all such official posts as are properly
speaking provincial (as opposed to certain special appointments
held directly under the Crown) are open to Chinese and Bannermen
alike. The three exceptions are the position of Commander-in-
Chief J§ '^j whether naval or military, always filled by a Chinese,
and of Tartar General and Deputy Lieutenant-General, invariably
held by Bannermen.

As regards Brigade-Qenerals |t ^ it is the rule that they
should be Chinese, but the rule is not hard and fast. For instance,
in 1879 the Chao-t^ung (Yunnan) and Chungking (Ssuch'uan)

3^1 V^fa^rS&fi ADDENDA AND OORBIGSNDA.

60iiimaiids were in the hands of Manchus. The Brigade-Generals
at Yung-p*ing 'Fu (Ma-lan Ch6n) and Yi Ohou, in Chihli, seem to
be invariably Bannermen ; and such was also the ease, at least
until lately, at Kashgar in Turkestan.

In the matter of the special appointments held directly under
the Crown, viz., the Superintendents of the Hunting-Grounds
lit Jehol ; of Silk Manufactures in Kiangsu and Chehkiang ; of
Customs at Kalgan (Chihli), Huai-an (Kiangsu), Sha-hu-k^ou
(Shan^si), and Canton, the incumbents always belong to a Banner
Corps and are generally Chinese Bannermen.

•
Memorialising the Throne.

In the old days the privilege of directly addressing the
Throne extended even to Prefects. At the present time it has
been much curtiiiled. In the provinces it ceases among civilians
with the Judicial Commissioner, and among military officials with
the Brigade- General. There is an apparent exception in the case of
theTaotai of Taiwan, but he owes the privilege to the circumstance
that he holds brevet rank as Judge, and is moreover ex officio
Literary Chancellor for Formosa. The only cases in which he may
avail himself of the right appear to be when announcing his
assumption of office or reporting on the provincial examinations.

Similarly Brigade-Generals memorialise only when notifying
arrival at a new post.

When addressing the Throne, Chinese speak of themselves as
"ministers" g, Bannermen as "slaves" jj[ ;^. But there are
exceptions to both these rules. Military officials of whatever race
now use the term jjjf ;J^, though formerly the same distinction
existed among military men as among civilians. Among Manchus,
Princes of the Blood use E not jJK ^ •

ALPHABimCAL INDEX.

AO

mm^

CHA
CH'A

CHAN

CH'AN

No.

563
11

39a

537, 604
320

72
312
189
595

221
220

563

CHANG

CH'ANG

:g£

CHAO

Mm

ffilJf

No,

585

598

602

189
75

202
88

598
133, 152,
517, 541

9

439

338

338

32

40

296
296
827
333

xlii

ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

CH^AO

CHE

mm

Via

CH«E

CHf:
CH'f;

■

GflftN

No.

454
473
456

341
114
343
330
273
273
284
281
289
484
300
506
507

456

596

182

25

439
441

CinfcNG

mm

pa

IE-

CH'ENG

mfm

CHIH

mm

fd^tkrb 111

m-^m^n

CHO

No.

479

305

281, 289

App. 1

App. 1

504

115

163

272

456
288
456
506
357
359
371

73
325

284

272

379

App. 1

182

4^W

577, 594

ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

xliii

CHOW

No.

CH'UNG

No.

mn

286

M&mm

472

mmm

286

MrIII

285

CH'WAN

i^l^l

285

«»

477

CHU

ili?9m:k^

172

CHWANG

±igk

166

lESI

227, 292

Ȥ

452

±*

65, 166

tKiC

474

±^

1

mi^mm

597

FAR

f&i^.mm

182

&w

417

ai

587

^'■^mm

182

•

^m:k^

565

FAN

CH'UH

#J^

565

ffi#

477, App. 1

583
477

CH'UN

ff^ffi t^

276

225
223

275
275

182

CHUNG

•

'¥m

147

FANG

'¥B:k^

456

» ^ tn Aju

^ ^ ^^

'i'm

472

150

+S

2

*f6

2V5

4>«II4*«

273, 453
148
149
272

481
344
372
423, 430

+««

272

+»

576

FEI

+»*^

456

+^

135

%

6

xliv

ALPHABSnCAI. IKDEX.

Ff:N

FfiNG

Mm

FU

mmmm

MB

giJIB

giJH

gii^

glllPiMl
gij!l

No.

387

280

456

456

233

88

456

456

27

21

22

28

542
603
338
344
480
187
442
480
471
340
384
164-
58
536
472
334
606
370,381,427
306
442

F\J—eont
g!l^^

mmm

FUH

HA

^mti%

HAI

No.

336
480
448
353, 378
15
56,340,369
339, 368
471

469
26
274
439
274
274
290

m^

16

tSSM

306

numm

306

tmrnk

305

msL

305

3a

473

563

282
324
327

ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

xl

HAN

No.

HIEN

1 No.

WtpK

201

mm

395, 544

379

NlMWi

607

m

App. 1

^mm

182

HIA

fi$)^

291

^k^

42

TSit

379

mk^

44

«

«

HING

HIANG

45
467
412

ffm

157

458
259

till IE

411

HIOH

HIAO

f

mm

323

miE

258, 304

mmm

389,431,545

mm

257

mm^m

383

m-k

323

mm

456

mu

323

mm

472

mm:biE

478

HO

•

%%S»JE

173

HIEH

ft«t«3^

174

ftjiai

14

I^^.IH

266

mtms.

17

raft

439

m\m

318

l&m

136

\iid(

318

l&m-^^

540

nu

326, 439

i&m

428

mim^mt

326

i&»&^

175, 245

^m^^

561

HOW

i&m:km±

136

ts-^

442

m

455

1S1»«

573

^W9t

App. 1

nsi

352

nLm:k^

106

J VI

ALPHABETICAL IIUD&X.

HU

HUN

HUNG
t«tt#

HWA

4bm

HWAN

tfi;$^

HWANG

Im9

No.

391*
397
398
396
34
413
154
564
589

387
467

231

564

30

564

597

458

29

61

2

10
4
1
3
1
11

HWO
HWUI

MR

1

JEN

«B

JU

A

JUH

M«

JUNG

No.
407

78
467, 473

182

557 .
App. 1

198
71
456
563
565

App. 1

580
456
456

484

456

ALPHABETIOAL QfSKC.

xJtii

EA

K'A

•^m

KAI

K'AN

KAO

K'AO
WW

TffiS,

mm

No.

567
567
583
600

517

328

550

588

456
470

182
467

609
45a
610
425
135
143

EI

mnmf
irns

Ka

9m»

KIAH

¥«l

KIANG

98

KIAO

EIEI

No.

188
418
164

455
456

547
383
581

4'98

472
303
305

346
472

xlviii

ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

KIEN

£^

Itftii

K'lEN

^m

KIN

K'lN

fifths

KING

8M

No.

321
209
262
251
263, 264
484
247, App. 1
280
455
339
411

334

589
585

260

K'ING

m

KIOH

ftll

ftH

KIU

K'O

m^

K'OW
KU

339
232
59, 194, 295
295
472

No.

77

196, 232

455

30
499

200
348
456
517

467, App. 1

549

mist^i.

379
20
13

K'U

Mm

297
297

ALFHABETIOAL INDEX.

xlix

Ktr

MA

kOan

SUt

Kt^N

KUNG

s±

mA

'SB

No.

472, App, 1
473

App. 1

133
133

440
282
457
182
279
550
281
41
43
281

471, App. 1

473

158

21-24, 455

12, 13

387

466

456

221

223

226

142

225

K'UNG

KWAN

tin

mm

KWANG

KWBI

JIA

KWOH

a £11
a#

No.

214

460
60

84

App.

347

82
541
261
248
280
317
324
112

230

456

67

5

8

75

215

2

247

I

LA

LAN
LANG

LAO

«9

LI

at

LIANG

mm

AX*rKAKRI0AL IHOSZ.

No.

TiTFiN

No.

58i

ftltt

276

mm

294

liH

452

464

LIN

98

mm&

470

mm

470

168

LING

572

^

289

f[^iK»*e

92

fRW:k^

559

mm

391,494,546

329

mm

439

mm

459

mSttBlif

419

saiiK

267

282

an

585

183

548

LIU

57

548

:^m

188

282

5?;»

247

App. 1

ets

210

287, 345

153

LO

155
App. 1

mm

LUH

329
329

274

278

9Ln&

393

283

mm

47t

566

m»

439

278

m9

439

LUN

««

LUNG
LWAN

MA

i^X

MfJN

m6ng

MI

MIAO

ar^

MIN

ALPHABBXriCAL INDfiX.

No.

387

472

111
110

392, 544

358

535

563

488

329

MING

MD

(tk

MUH

^W

NA

NAN

HI

154

599

NGAN

li

No.

587
289
236

264

548

538

455, App. 1
455
247
329
152
259

152

88

557
334
456
267
469
468

lii

ALPHABETIOAL INDEX.

NG^H

mm

y

NGfiN

NIEH

9k^

NO
NUI

No.

451

588

15

455

471
App. 1

467

455
App. 1

276
276

564, 587

151
83
83
379
482
134
147
143
145
144
146

NUNG

9k^

o

PA

PAH

AM

PAI

fill

PAN

PANG

No.
154

517
547

587
465
448

456

23 (note)

379

471

329

388
560
611
585

561, 565
351
475

ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

liii

PAO

PEH

i&ft

I

fd3S

p6n

PI

mm

p'l

PIEH

SdiK

PIEN

nil

No.

457

363

364

108

182

App. 1

36, 379

37

38

595
337
455
563

182

157
247

312

283, 285

208

PIH

mm

181
181

P'lN

m
&

7
App. 1

PING

343
280
156

FING

nm

POH

1f±

PU

No.

^m^

275

^#3ge.

564

i$#Mj$

167

urn

160, 273

^u

161, 274

%^Bik

169

u^^^

162

n^^n

283

us

294

^mm^

348

^mm

347

^•sm

354

199

240, 252

Uv

ALPHABBTIOAIi INDXX.

PUH

SA

SAN

EM

mil

s6n
sMg

ftJE

No.

23

24

564
517

283
472

79
143
182
142
App. 2
461
292

85
284

94
210

593

494
495
493
492

SHA

SHAN
Ill:g

ttli

mm

SHANG
±

SHAO

No.

590
612
589

491
279
496
497

160
1
379
86
414
458
457
570
563
568

222
294
141
197, 233
142
140
250
162
162
162

AXiPHABBSCICAL IMDKK.

Iv

SBAO—cont.

No.

*pmm

162

^m

162

Pmi6

162

iP^

222, 294

^m

294

vs

439

mm

SfilB

nmm±
nmm±

mm
mmM»M

583
387
454
28, 454
455
10,39
App. 1
App. 1
9
206
204
161
206
203

97

90

95

96
189
574

76
415
236
239

81

SHfeNG

jnB«T«

SHIH

ii'&

SHOU

1km

fit

tff

SHU

mm

Wot

MfS,mJSi

SHUEI

No.

469, App. 1
466

96, 547

150
456
446
446
439
289

181
181
491
210
210
237
101

282
158
439
435
314
316

Ivi

«■

SIAO

SIEN

mm

SIH

«fd

SIN

ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

SHWANG

No.

SIU 1

No.

1
1

1
1

App. 2
462

Htm

469
456
456
207

SI

so

V

2
157
166

I

1

J3f

su

327, 439
557

STANG

illiii=^'iit

564

135

• •

SU

^IBE

SUAN

235

585

418

ma^m

332

200

&^n:km

315

133

sa^

456

Jtttftil

331

i

]

456

SUI

329

^R^^r ^RlW^

592

IRX^

471

StTN

557

mm

272, 274

mm

293

)i«e«

348

mm

306

358

^

1 439

ALPHABETICAL INDBX.

Ivii

SZE

No.

TA— con*.

No

\sRmm

256

:km

441

mwt

548

^mm

479

IS^tiill^lBE

180

*F

289

i>9§$tl^fll:^1il

179

:k^

396

m

439

^%ik

426

m»

305

^m±

135

nB^stB^

224

iziim

200

m-^

152,166,343

:kmi&

162

mjM

422

m3$

575

mm

306

^li^JlM

585

mm

171

^^MH

605

m«

168, 182

n^

375

mm

250

mm^

33

T'AH

mm

mm&^

246
176

m^m

539

mm

170, 302

TAI

mm

152

■rffc^k^h JiU

«*

579

Mn

579

TA

#a

213

*a

585

T'AI

*i*

479

V .■■&. m

*ffA

232

*«#

228

*A

280

±n

138

^m^n

188

±m

247

:kMn

290

±ni^

268

:km^

195

*«

139

:kmm

232

*«#

229

^mm

232

*A

208

*^«

249

±m

137

^mm

162

±'^

281

*«^

162

ik^

162

:km^

162

*^

10

ikmm

162

ia^^p^

142

:km

472

^«

538

:k0

443

^Ht

550

hiH

ALPEULBXnOiU:. INDXX.

TAN

T'AN

mm

TANG

fUMSt

T'ANG

TAO

T]6h

TfeNG

SfHB

No.
App. 2

476

1

182
182

165
162

64

189, 280
502
503
501
5G0
280

608
608

456
456

T6NG

IVMlle

Tl

T'l

TIAO

ISM

TIEH

m^

T'lEH

No.
48»

App. 1

564,578

11

m^

190

%m

182

HM

150,216,485

vbW

309

iSkm

439

m-k

440

m^

440

&nmm

323

H^^PI

347

llt:^

135

464

564, 578

28, 46-54

ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

\ix

TIEN

No.

TU— cow/.

1 No.

212, 253
35

miSL {

1
380, 548.
549, 551'

#(&

294

m^%

74

JIH

241, 254

^m

274

ITS

467, 473

irii^m

279

J

«i^«#

323

«flm

278 ■

T'lEN

«M

439

5^^

1

T'U

182

TING

* - • -

±w

328

^J*

582

jLw^

328

T

547

±jfif

328

T« '

App. 1

328

^

±SI

329

T'ING

(

TUR

mm

196

MtmiT

242

TO :

TUI

$ll^£

18

l^HM^

19

»»t

490

Hn

439, 557

TU

-

TUNG

M^^

184

mm

277

^*^TrW

583

mm

445

$@

135

m^M

189

«»

2, 10

m*

298

«Hig

365

mmm

298

ncim

116

mm

445

ft^

468

mma

200

d^i^Ht

601

Ix

ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

T'UNG

No.

TSANG

JNo.

jitt^

190

m^

587

^^mn

191

mmf^mm

192

m$:^^

456

TS'ANG

mm:k^

456

J» K^ ▲A^i*^ V^

•

mm

283

t^

362

»isr:A:e

152

301

i&^lftJS

279

ASl ^ ^ V^

m^t

481

M^

282, 334

mm±\iik

477

TS'AO

}f^

439

TSAI

\%mmm

327

ffJ»

569

^49

135

TSf:NG

mm

538

USE A

589

«^

469

II

455-6

TSAN

TSI

«1

244
226

mm

591
601

mi^w^

424

TS'AN

^IS

249

««

295

0^}^

443

TSIANG

^P

App. 1

( 367, 426,

0Vk

193

mm.

] 456, 552, •

«m

543

-

(557

?&#

564

*«*E

f 553-4-5
t 558

TSIEH

^31

443

^ii«

182

ALPHABETICAL INDfiX.

Ixi

TS'IEN

^^

TSIN
ll±

m±mk

TS'IN

TSING

TSIOH

ftiS

TSO

2EW

No,

433
405
403
402
401
107
335
447
447
182

473, App.
477
476

100
91
11, 537

411

454

223
225

187
197

TS'0AN

ms

TStTN

^n

TSUNG

TSO— oon<.

No.

ifrMM

264

/lrM1t9

361

&Mn»mm

402

&mmfk

349

&^^

199

&w&i

161

&^m

198

&m

291

&»mA

185

&m

322

£«

288

mm

387,429,544

^H/k

585, 588

£«tt

362

TSOU

^9r«

109

TSU

&ik

255

mm

185

mm^

601

«ff:X:S

63, 420

IB^

441

msftn

152

153

468

Ixii

ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

TSUNG— oon^

ma
mm
mm

m

TS'UNG

TSWAN

m&

TSZE
TS'ZE

MA

No.

562
150
341», 441
272-3
408
218
447

55

55
564
45a
232

29
99

360
App. 1

150, 216

455
456

284
155
243
458

URH

r,a*A

WAI
WAN

WANG

^M

£ffi

WEI

No.

477
456

282
291

508
379
486
483
516
487
450
449

31

152

11

sjtasitt

App. 1

518
327, 439
436, 548

438

437
66
390, 432

AlFRABETIOAL INDKZ.

Ixm

WEI— cone.

mmmwst

wu

i^-X*

Bmn±

YANG
YEH

No.

4G0
355
404
102
38(>
App. 1

135

182
456
273
323

584
178
87
135
182
182
273
189
342
211

265
200, 231

394

571

YEN
YEO

mm

YIH

%H^

-a* A

No.

505
182
313
280
311
312
277

225
223
187
264
361
99
164
198
294
186
402
349
376
377
378
444
444
471

289
319
409,421,438
350
476
456

hdv

ALPEABKTIOAL INDEX.

YIN
liliJEllS

YING

YOH

YtJ

No.

506
App. 1
App. 1
68

190

491

385

382

439
80
410, 452
273

159
177

89
271
247
189
184
105
104
103

YtTAN
Y0EH

YtTH

m,n

YtTN

YUNG

No.

88, 416
585
164
491
270
269

mm

308

mm

327

mm

310

mm

277

^1^

307

mmm

455

mmm

113

^

324
329
473

55

439

MANUAL

OF

CHINESE TITLES.

PART I.-THE IMPERIAL COURT

«^ 1 . — Hwang Ti ^ ^. — The Emperor. Ordinary designation,

Hwang Shang ^ Jl ; Shang J^, Title of respect, T'ien Tsze 55 •?,
the Son of Heaven. Popular appellation, Tang-kin Fo Yeh § ^
^1^, the Buddha of the present day. Also Chu Tsze ^ •^, Le.
the Master, or Lord; and, in adulatory addresses, Wan Sui Yeh
M 31 Mi ^'*^* Lord of Ten Thousand years.

2. — Hwang How ^ jg. — The Empress. Lit designation,
^ Chung Kung tf" §; or when two consorts of equal rank exia^t
together, as in recent times, Tung Kung }|[ flf and Si Kung |f §
with reference to the *' Eastern" and "Western" divisions of the
Palace allotted to their use. Title of respect, Kwoh Mu 3 ^^ ^^
"Mother of the State."

3. — Hwang T^ai How ^ Jjj jg. — ^An Empress Dowager.

4. — Hwang Kwei Fei ^ Jf jfi. — Secondary Consort (Con-
cubine) of the first rank. Concubines of the second rank may
from time to time be advanced, by imperial favour, to this grade,
and from the first rank a secondary consort may be raised to the
degree of Hwang How or Empress Consort.

5. — KwBi Fei ;ft jfi. — Concubine of the second rank.

6. — Fei ^. — Concubine of the third rank.

7. — P*iN jK* — Concubine of the fourth rank. (This character
is also read pin).

8. — Kwei Jen j|; A« — Concubine of the fifth rank.

2 PART I.— THE IMPERIAL COURT.

9.— Ta Ying fg m and Chiang Tsai ^ ;gg.— Female atten-
dants of the Emperor. These may be elevated to the rank of
Kwei JSn. Beneath them, again, is a class of Serving Women, or
She Nu m 35c> ^^^ *r® recruited by annual drafts from the families
appertaining to the Imperial Household, and who serve for a term
of years within the Palace.

10.— T^Ai TszB :fe ^.— The Heir Apparent. Also called
Slie Tsze f^ -J. Lit. des. Hwang ch'u fi^, and Tung Kung ^^^

1 1 . — Hwang Tsze ^ ^. — Princes. The sons of an Emperor
of the present dynasty are known simply as A^-ho P9 9^ ^ render-
ing of the Manchu word ag^h^ unless when designated by the
princely rank bestowed upon them, such as TbHu Wang ^ J, or
lower dignities. Lit. des. Wang Ti 1 1^, or simply TL

12. — Kung Chu^^. — Princess Imperial; daughter of an
Emperor. — See the following ranks:

13. — Ku-LUN Kung-Chu @ iH ^ ^. — Princess Imperial of
the first rank (daughter of an Empress consort). From the
Manchu word jrwrun, =the Chinese Kwoh or State.

14.— Ho-SHBH Kung Chu ft ^ ^ i. — Princess Imperial of
the second rank (daughter of an inferior consort).

1 5. — Ngeh Fu )^ 1^. — Husband of an Imperial princess. In
former dynasties, this position was designated Fu Ma H^ j^.

1 6. — Fu TsiN ^ ^. — Princess Consort (wife of an Imperial
Prince).

Hereditary Imperial Nobility:

The titles conferred on members of the Imperial House of the
present dynasty are of twelve degrees. Imperial princes usually
receive patents of the first or second order on arriving at manhood,
and their sons are invested with the third degree of ranL Titles
of the same degrees are also conferred. on the princes and chieftains
of the various Mongol tribes. They are as follows :

1 7.— i. Ho-SHEH Ts'm Wang ft ^ ^ I.— Prince of the
1st order.

18.— ii. To-LO KuN Wang $ J| IB I-— Prince of the
2nd order.

PART I, — THE niPEBUL COUBT. 8

■

1 9.— 111. To-LO Pbi-lbh $M R Hf.— 5et-teA, or Prince of
the 3rd order.

20.— iv. Ku-SHAN* Pei-Tszb S |I| K ^^—Bei-tsze, or
Prince of the 4th order.

21. — V. Fbng-ngen Chbn Kwoh Kunq $ ^S* i| B &* —
Imperial Duke of the first degree.

22.— vi. Fbng-ngen Fu Kwoh Kung |1 ,B M H &•—
Imperial Duke of the second degree.

23. — vii. Pu-JUH Pah FENf Chen Kwoh Kung /p A A ^
^ B &• — Imperial Duke of the third degree.

24.— viii. Pu-JUH Pah Fen Fu Kwoh Kung ^ A A ^
jm B &' — Imperial Duke of the fourth decrree.

25.— ix. Chen Kwoh Tstang Kun H B ^ 'J[.— Noble of
the Imperial lineafje, ninth in line of descent.

26.— X. Fu Kwoh Tsiang Kun H B W 3?.— Noble of the
Imperial lineage, tenth in line of descent.

27.— xi. Feng Kwoh Tsiang Kun $ B SV 5?.— Noble of
the Imperial lineage, eleventh in line of descent

28.— xii. Feng-ngen Tsiang KtJN $ ,f, ^ gt.— Noble of
the Imperial lineage, twelfth in line of descent.

The titles given according to the above list are to some extent
compounded of Manchu words. Thus, ho-shSh (originally signifying
a banner) denotes one of the four divisions of the army or State ;
and bd-Uh has the signification of commander or leader. The
titles conferred in any rank are transmitted in a diminuendo
scale, a bei~l4li*8 son becoming a bei^taze^ and so on, until the

* Ku-shan represents the Manchu word Ku-9ai^ gignif jing Banner.

t The A ^ Pfih F^/h or Eight privileged ranks date from the reign T'ien
Ming (A.D. 1616-1626), when, before the entry of the Manchus into China,
eight princes, entitled Ho-shgh Bei-16h, were formed into a military Council
of State. They were invested with an equality of rank and dignity, and
they hence received the designation of the *' eight parti tioners." When
the order of precedence among the princes and nobility of t^e Imperial
lineage came subsequently to be determined, a line of distinction was drawn
at the sixth rank as above mentioned. The princes and nobles who were
classed as on a par with the ** eight partitioners ** had the right of access to
the Court on all State occasions. Those below the sixth rank simply took rank
in their respective banners. (See Ta T^ing Swei Tien,)

^pn ofja .ijioble of ^el^h degree ^^pif IS ©o lopger te the
inheritor of a title.

An es^oeptio.n to this rule f^^!^ ho^srev^r in the ,cafie of such
titles as are conferred " with the right of i^l\er;^nce fpr e\;er "-r-
She H wang tH ^ 11:^^^ ^^d particularly in t^e case of the
Eight Chief Princely Houses, the descendants of the Princes who
served in effecting the co^qi;^Sit of Northern China. These are
familiarly designated The Iro^-cappe^ Princps — Pieh Mao-Uze
^^nff ^ ♦! ^ J. {See Nqs. 46 to 54.)

29. — TsuNG Spi^ ^ ^, — Iif^pef'ial Cfapsmian ; a descendant
of tlj^e acknowledged foj^nder of jlie reignjng Manqhu dynasty, Hien
Tsu, A.D. 1583-1615. The Taung^aliih ^re entitled to the dis-
tinction of wearing a yellow girdle, or Hwp.iig Tai-taze 3t 'Sf "?»
whence this epithet has come to be used as a synonym of the rank
itself Individuals who have been degraded for misconduct from
the rank of Tsung-shih ^ear a red girdle, and are consequently
styled Hung Tai-tsze {see behw,)

30. — KiOH Lo H JK* — Gioro, or collat^al relative of the
Imperial house, claiming descent from its early ancestry.* The
Gioro wear a red girdle, and are consequently designated, in fami-
liar parlance, as Hung Tai-tsze ^^ ^.

31. — Wang Fd J jgf. — Establishment (Palace) of Princes

OF THE ImPEEIAL LiNEAGE.

32. — Chang She ^ £. — Kecorder, or Bemembraneer; 3 af .

33. — 8zE I-chaNg % fl ^. — Major-domo ; 4 a.

34.— Hu Wei g| ^.—Officer of the Body Guard ; of four
degrees of rank, from 3 b to 5 b.

35.— Tien I Jf^ ^. — Assistant Major-domo; of four degrees
of rank, from 4 b to 8 b. .

• For fuller particulars relating to the titles and designations of the Chinese
Emperors and their kindred, see the writer's article on the *' Chinese Imperial
Family" appended to *< Translations of the PeUng Gazette for 1875."
Shanghai, 1876.

t Here and elsewhere throaghout the following pages an officiaVs rank is in-
dicated by an Arabic numeral, followed by " a " or " b," according as he is of the
higher or lower grade of the said rank. Thus, 3 a implies that a Remembrancer
is of the higher grade of the third rank.

PAET I.— THB IMPBRUL COUBT. 6

36— Pao I Q^.— (Bo-i*) Bondservant; Serf..

37.— Pao I Ts'an-ling ^ ifS ^ ^.—Colonel of the
Bo-i; 5 b.

38.— Pao I Tso-ling ^ti 1£ §[•— Captain of the Bo-i; 4 b.

39.— She Tszb ft ^.— Son of an. Imperial Prince of the
first degree (before receiving distinctive rank.)

40. — Chang Tsze ^ '^.'— Son of an Imperial Prince of the
second degree (as above).

41 . — 'KuS Chu 15 i* — Daughter of an Imperial Prince of the
first degree.

42. — HiEN Chu jj^ ^. — Do. of the second degree.

43.— KtJN KuN JU S.— Do. of the third degree.

44. — HiEN KijN |gg ^. — Do. of the fourth degree.

45. — HiABTG Ktjn Hi ^. — Daughter of an Imperial noble of
the first or second degrees.

45a. — Keh K4h 4Sf Ijr- — Daughter of an Imperial Prince or
noble (colloquial usage^ from the Manchu). This designation is
confined to^ the five degrees above enumerated. The daughters of
Imperial nobles in the lower ranks are designated Tsung Nii ^ jfc.

The Eight Chief Princely Families:

The following are the titles borne by the princely families to
whom the right of perpetual inheritance is secured:-

46.— Li Ts'm Wang JX §i 3E.— Prince of Li.

47.— Jul Ts<iK Wang 'Sg ^ 2-— Prince of Jui.

48.— Ytj Ts'm Wang ^H % BE-— Prince of Yii.

49.— SuH Ts'iN Wang Jt jRI .—Prince of Snh.

50 Cheng Ts'm Wang 95 ]|| I.— Prince of ChSng.

♦ The Pao-i or bo-i are members of the Eight Banners (see No. 379) who are
hereditary bondservants of either the Imperial or of one or other of the
Princely households. They are formed into a separate organization within
each banner. Some among them, designated the ** Corean pao-i" are deseen-
dantB of Corean prisoners taken during the wars of the 17th oentury.

6 PART I.— THS IMPERUL COUBT.

51.— Chwang Ts*m Wang |K H I.— Prince of Chwang.*

52.— SHUN-CH^EfTG KxjN Wakg Jg ij^ fl^ 3E — Pnnce of Shun
Ch^eng.

53.— K^BH K^iN KvS Wang ]£ ft flS I.— Prince of
K^Sh-k^in (K^6h.ch4n).t

54.— I Ts^iN Wang fg H I.— The Prince of I.

»

This tide, although not one of the Eight, is also held in per-
petuity. The holder descends from the Prince of I Hien, thirteenth
son of the EmperoV K^ang Hi.

• 55.— Tbung Jen Pu ^ A JJSf.— The Ihperial CiABf Court.

This department regulates all affairs relating to the Imperial
Eondred, preserves the Family Roll or Genealogical Becord,
Yc Tieh ^ J9| etc. The Prince of the Imperial family who holds
the presidentship of the Court is distinguished by the lit. des.
Tmng K'ing ^ J^.

56. — Fu Ch^eng Jff ^.— Vice Director; 3a.

57. — Li She Kwan 3| V 1|f.— Commissary; 5a.

58.— Fu Li She Ewan g] 3 9 '^•—Assistant Commissary;
5b.

59.— King Lih jg S.— Registrar; 6a.

60.— The K*uNG Fang g ^.—Prison of the Imperial Clan
Court.

61 .—The Hwang Tang Fang H jH g.— Begistry office of the
Imperial Clan Court.

62;— Nui Wu Fu p^ gf /gp.— The Impeeial Household.

63.— TsuNG Kwan Ta Ch^en MHilS ^ g.— Comptroller of
the Household.

* All the above are princes of the first degree, and derive their descent in the
direct line from sons of the two earlier founders of the reigning dynasty,
T^ai Tsu and T'ai Tsung.

t The above are princes of the second degree, descending from grandsons of
T'ai Tsu and T<ai Tsung.

PABT I.— THB IMPBEUL COUBT, 7

64. — T^ANG Lang CeuiTg jj J^ rft.— Secretary.
65. — Chu She ^ y.— Assistant Secretary.

66.— Wei Shu Chu She S K £ <f.— Deputy Assistant
Secretary.

Departmenta of the Hottsehold:

67.— Kwang Ch^u Szb H ^ 3.— Treasury of the Privy
Purse.

68.— Yin K*u |K JIJ.- Bullion and Jewellery Vaults.
69.— Ts^ZB K<u iK J|t.— Porcelain Store.

70.— TwAN K^u IS m.— Silk Store.

71 . — I K^u jj; Jjjt. — Imperial Wardrobe.

72.— Ch^a K'u :^ Ht.— Tea Store.

73. — Chih Jan Kuh H fkM' — Manufacturing and Dyeing
Department.

74.— Tu Yij Szb tf ft Sf.— Pay and Commission Office for
the Household Brigade.

75. — Chang I Szb ^ §| 3. — Office of Worship, Ceremonial^
and Control of Eunuchs. Controls the sacrificial observances of
the Court Has under it a large sta£P of secretaries and under-
secretaries {lang-chung^ etc. etc). A sub-department is the Ewoh
Fang % S^ or Fruit Office, which supplies the fruit and other
offerings presented in sacrifice.

76.— Shbn Fang jjff ;^.— The Directorship of Worship (under
the preceding). Has a number of grades of employes.

77. — K^iNG FbUg Szb J| Jf 3. — Pasturage Department.
Manages the flocks and herds maintained for Palace use.

78. — HwEi Ki Szb. — ^ ff "3.— CoUectorate of rents for
Banner property.

79.— San K*i Chwang T^ow Ch^u H ft Jffi ® i(t.— Steward's
Office for Property of the Three Household Banners.

80.— Ting Tsao Sze flf |g ^.—Office of Works; with
numerous sub-departments.

8: PABT I.— THE nCPBBIAL COUBT.

81 .—Seen Hing Szb <Q| jf| fj.— Judicial Department. This
department takes cognizance of all cases relating to the three
superior Banners.

82.— KwAN-HiAH Fan Yih Ch*u ^ ft # S *— Police
department (with special control over eunuchs of the Court.)

83.— Nui San K^i ^ H Jft.— The Household Division of the
Three Superior Banners {see the Eight Banners, infrd). In each
of the superior Banners a certain number o{ pao-i or bondservants
of the Imperial Household {see ante No. 38) are separately con-
stituted for duty in this department. They furnish the force of
three brigades entitled Nui Hiao £}i Ting ^ Jg Jg 5, Nui Eu
Kan ring ^WtW^S, and Nui Te'ien FSng Ying H^9t^y
corresponding to the corps under these designations formed from
the general mass of the Banner population (see infrd).

84.— KwAN Fang Ch*u ^ g S-— The Antechamber Office.
(Controls the personal attendance upon His Majesty).

85.— San Yuan H Bu*— The Three Courts (under the Imperial
Household). These are as follows :

86.— Shang* Szb Yuan ± JU K.— The Palace Stud.

87.— Wu Pei Yuan % fl| ^.— The Imperial Armoury.

88.— Feng Chen Yuan ^ % ^.— The Parks and Hunting
Grounds. His department has the control of the Imperial Parks
such as the Nan Yuan ^ ^, commonly called the Hai Uze ^ ^j
Yuan Ming YUan [g ^ H, Ch'ang C¥un Yuan fi $ ■, etc.,
etc.

89.— Ytj Ch^a Shan Ch^u ft| 3? Ji ft.— The Buttery of the
Household.

90. — She Wei Ch^u f^ ^ ft. — The Department of the
Imperial Body Guard.

This department controls the affairs of the three superior
Banners, which furnish the body guard of the Sovereign.

91.— Ts'iN KtjN Ying ^5gg.— The Imperial Guard.
92,— Ling She-Wbi Nui Ta Ch^en fiS ^ |B ^ :^ E-—
Chamberlain of the Guards ; la. Six in all.

PART I. — THE IMPERIAL COURT. 9

93.— Nui Ta Ch'en ft ^ g.— Chamberlain; lb. Six in all.
Selected from among the San chili Ta ch^in (see below), or Captain-
Generals of Banners.

94.— San Chih Ta Ch^en fj ^ :^ g— Assistant Cham-
berlain ; 2b. No fixed number. These officers take the duty by
turns of commanding the Palace Guard.

95.— She Wei Pan Ling f# ® |t M-— Captain of the
Guards.

96.— She Wei Shih-chang f^ flS ff* ;g.— Lieutenant of the
Guards.

97. — She Wei f^ %. — Officer of the Guards, distinguished as
of the first, second, third or fourth rank, being respectively of the
superior grades of the 3rd, 4th, and 5th, and inferior grade of the
5th rank. Of the 1st rank there are 60, of the second 150, of the
third 270.

98. — Lan-ling She-wei ^ ^ ^ %- — Subaltern of the
Guards, wearing the blue feather; 6 a. Ninety in all.

99. — Tsung-shih Shih-wei ^ ^ ^ $£. — Tmng-ahih Guards
(consisting of Imperial clansmen).

100.— Ts'iN KuN HiAO % gt ;gc-— Sergeant of the Palace
Guards ; 6 a- Seventy-seven in all.

101.— Shu Ts'in Kun Hiao ^ ^ S^.— Deputy Sergeant
of the Palace Guards ; 8 b. Seventy in all.

102.— Wei Shu Ts'in Kun Hiao ^ ^ WL % :R.— Vice
Deputy Sergeant of the Palace Guards. Seven in all.

1 03.— Yu Ts^iEN Ta Ch'en ^^ It :Jc B— Minister of Presence,
or Grand Chamberlain; selected from among the Princes and
Ministers of the Court.

104.— Yu Ts'ien She Wei ^ It fj^ |g.— Guards of the
Antechamber.

1 05.— YiJ Ts^ieN Hing Tsow ^ ItfJ jg.- Mongolian Princes
having the right of entree.

106.— How Ht Ta Ch^en ^ Jg ^ E-— Chamberlains of the
rear-guard (two).

10 PART I. — ^THB IMPBBIAL COURT.

107.— Ts^iEN Yin Ta Ch^en "Uf 5|^ E-— Chamberlains of
the vanguard (ten).

108.— Pao-Wbi-Pan She Wei |5 Jl |t ^ ^g.— Guard
famishing the Imperial Escort.

109.— T^ow She Ch<u Hl^ ift.— Privy Cabinet Office.
This department, supervised by the Ministers of the Presence, takes
charge of the communications between the Sovereign and the
Grand Council, when the Council is not in personal attendance upon
His Majesty. It is divided into two branches, the one for
documents in Manchu and Chinese, the other for Mongolian.

110.— LwAN I Wei H f| |ij5.— The Imperial Equipage
Department* With numerous subdivisions.

111. — LwAN I She || m ^. — Commissioner of the
Equipage Department ; 2 a.

112.— KwAN KuN She SE H ft-— Marshal of the Equipage
Department; 3 a.

113. — YuN Hwei She ^ gjl ft. — Assistant Marshal do.; 4a.

114. — Che I Cheng jj§§|J£. — Controller do. do.; 5a.

115. — Cheng I Yi^ SE fli ®- — Assistant do. do.; 6a.

Imperial Mausolea.

116.— Tung Si Ling yn "S K- — The following are the names
of the Imperial Mausolea, situated at the " Eastern " and " Western"
Hills, hence known as the Tung Si Ling:

117. — Chad Si Ling BS W I^ (East).— Mausoleum of the
Consort of the Manchu sovereign T^ai Tsung (A.D. 1627-1643).

118. — HiAO Ling ^ gH (East). — Mausoleum of Emperor
Shun Che (1644-1661).

119. — HiAO Tung Ling ^ % 1^ (East). — Mausoleum of
Empress of Shun Che.

120. — King Ling Jj^ B| (East). — Mausoleum of Emperor
K^ang Hi (1662-1722).

121. — T'Ai Ling ^ gj (West).— Mausoleum of Emperor
Yung Cheng (1723-1735).

PART I. — THE IMPERIAL COURT. 11

122.— T'ai Tung Ling H Ht IS (East).— Mausoleum of
Empress of Yung ChSng.

1 23.— YtJ Ling ^ ^ (West).— Mausoleum of Emperor K'len
Lung (1736-1795).

1 24. — Chiang Ling g ^ (West). — Mausoleum of Emperor
Kia K^ing (1796-1820).

125.— Chiang Si Ling g ® K (West). — Mausoleum of
Empress of Kia K*ing.

1 26. — Mu Ling H |g|{ (West). — Mausoleum of Emperor Tao
Kwang (1821-1850).

127.— Mu Tung Ling JE )K SI (West).— Mausoleum of
* Empress of Tao Kwang.

128.— Ting Ling 5g ^ (East).— Mausoleum of Emperor
r en Fgng (1851-1861).

1 29.— T^Ai TszE Ling Jc "? 18 (East).— Mausoleum of Heir
Apparent Twan Hwei, eldest son of Emperor K*ien Lung.

130. — Hwei Ling ^ ^ (East).— Mausoleum of Emperor
T^ung Che (1862-1874).

131.— FuT^o YtjH Jg^PEllgf (East).— Mausoleum in course
of preparation for senior Empress Regent (Empress Dowager of
Hien Feng).

1 32.— P^u SiANG YiJH ^Mt& (East).— Mausoleum in course
of preparation for junior Empress Regent (Empress Mother of
T^ung Che).

Noife. — The two mausolea which are in course of preparation
for the two Empresses Regent, at a cost of six millions of taels, are
known, euphemistically, by the designation Wan Nkn Ki Ti
H ^ "o )fe — ^h® Happy Land for a Myriad Years.

12 PART II. — ^MBTROPOUTAN ADMINISTRATION.

PART II.-METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION.

The central government of China, so far as a system of this
nature is recognized in the existing institutions, is arranged with
the object rather of registering and checking the action of the
various provincial administrations, than with that of assuming a
> direct initiative in the conduct of affairs. The empire proper is
divided into eighteen provincial governments, to which are to
be added the three eastern provinces, constituting the territory
of Manchuria, and organized on a more or less military basis.
Beyond the limits of China proper are the subject territories of
Mongolia and Tibet, and the tribute-paying nations of Corea,
Anam, Burmah, and Nepal. Among these, Siam was formerly also
included. On various parts of the frontier and scattered over all
the southern and western provinces are, furthermore, numerous
tribes of aborigines, either partly or wholly uncivilized, for whose
government special regulations are in force. Regulations, indeed,
of the most minute and comprehensive character, are on record
for the guidance of every conceivable act of administration ; and
the principal function, of the central government consists in watch-
ing over the execution of this system of rules. The bestowal of
the higher appointments of the civil and military services, and
the distribution of the superior literary degrees as reVards for
proficiency in the studies upon which the entire polity of the
Empire is based, comprise the remainder of the attributes reserved
to the government established at Peking. The Central Govern-
ment may be said to criticize rather than to control the action of
the twenty-one provincial administrations, wielding, however, at
all times, the power of immediate removal from his post of any
official whose conduct may be found irregular or considered
dangerous to the stability of the State. The following are the
departments of the Central administration :

133.— The KuN Ki Ch^u g| :fi8 ft.— Council of State, or

PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION^. 13

Grand Council (literally, Place of Plans for the Army). This
department is the actual privy council of the sovereign, in whose
presence its members daily transact the business of the State, at a
meeting: held between the hours of 4 and 6 a.m. It is a Cabinet
composed of Ministers holding other substantive offices, and who
are known as Kiln Ki Ta Ch'in % ^ ^ S* Their number is
undetermined ; but for many years past it has not exceeded five.
A body of sixty secretaries, Chang King ^t j^, also called
Siouo Kan Ki h\\ |^ IS? attends to the clerical work of the Council.
The institution derives its origin from the practice instituted by the
earlier emperors of the present dynasty of treating public affairs
on the footing of a military council, whence the title adopted, in
about the year 1730, for the council as it at present exists. The
title c/iang-king (see above) corresponds to the Manchu word
chan-yin^ or chan-h/in, signifying an "assistant," in either civil
or military employ.

134. — The Nui Koh ^ ^. — Grand Secretariat or Imperial
Chancery (literally. Inner Cabinet or Hall). This department,
which, under the preceding dynasty, was the Supreme Council of
the Empire, has within the last century and a half, become super-
seded in active importance by the Grrand Council. It now forms
the Imperial Chancery or Court of Archives, and admission to one
of the six posts which constitute its superior ranks confers the
highest distinction attainable by Chinese officials, although with
fdncftions that a.re almost purely nominal. The most distinguished
Governors-General are usually advanced to the dignity of Grand
Secretary while continuing to occupy their posts away from the
capital. The constitution of the office is as follows :

135. — Ta Hioh She :fc Jp j;. — Grand Secretary; la. Coll.
des. Chung Pang 4» ^ ; Epist. style, Tsai Siang ^ ;fB, and Siang
Kwoh ^ H. Of the four Grand Secretaries, two are Manchus
and two Chinese. Each of the four is designated as Ta Hioh She
of one or other of the "throne-halls" or pavilions of the Imperial
palace. The names of these are as follows: Win Hwa Tien
%m n-> W» Ying r«n JC 3^ 18; Ti Jin Koh « fc ®;
Tung Koh % H^.

14 PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMTi^ISTRATION.

Under the Ming dynasty, the Grand Secretaries were familiarly
designated Koh Lao ^^^ or Elders of the Nui Kohj whence the
title rendered by the Jesuit missionaries as Colao.

136.— HiEH-PAN Ta Hioh She -g; |jf i^ J|t i.— Assistant
Grand Secretary; lb. Coll. des. Chung T'ang (as above); Epist.
style, Hieh K'weiy jj JK- Of this office there are two incumbents,
one Manchu and one Chinese. — Honorary Titles:

137.— i. T'ai She is: ffl.— Grand Preceptor; 1 a.

1 38.— ii. T^Ai Fu ± fl|f.— Grand Tutor ; 1 a.

1 39.— iii. T'AI Pag :Jfc fi^.— Grand Guardian ; 1 a.

140. — iv Shag She aJ^ g(. — Junior Preceptor; 1 1*.

141. — V. Shag Fu >J> %. — Junior Tutor; 1 b.

142. — vi. Shag PAG.#J?flJ.— Junior Guardian; 1 l\

The above six honorary titles correspond to tbo titl(3^ oli'.
six highest Ministers of State of antiquity, desi^iiated t}>'
San Kung 3 & ^^^ '^^^ -^** H S51- These titles arc now seldom
conferred, with the exception of No. vi. The last is especially
bestowed as the (nominal) ^'Guardianship of the Heir Apparent"
l^ai Tsze Shao Poo jfc •? 4^ fis* ^^ entitles the bearer to be
addressed as Kung Pao § flj.

143.— Nui Kgh High She ft gg J|t J:-— Sub-Chancellor of
the Grand Secretariat; 2b. Ten in all, acting as registrars of the
seals of State and of certain departments of the archives; Lit. des.,
Koli Hio ^ %.

144.— Nui Kgh She-tuh High She ft ^ f# K il ±.—
Readers of the Grand Secretariat; 4b. Six in all. They compare
the texts of State papers in the Manchu and Chinese language.

145.— Nui Kgh She-tuh ft ^ ^ IS* — Assistant-Readers of
the Grand Secretariat; 6 a. Nine in all.

146.— Nui Kgh Tien Tsi ft ^ JR jg.— Archivists of the
Grand Secretariat ; 7a. Six in all.

1 47.— Nui Kgh Chung Shu ft ^ 4* S-— Secretary of the
Grand Secretariat; 7 b; Lit. des. Chung Han ^ t|.

PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 15

148 Chung Shu K^o ^ ff 5^.— The Imperial Patent Office;

a sub-department of the J!f^u% Koh.

1 49.— Chung Shu K^o Chung Shu tp^^t\t ff.— Secretary
of the Imperial Patent Office ; 7 b.

150.— Fang Lio Kwan jjf ^ f|.— The Military Archive
Office. This department has the special duty of drawing up the
records of military undertakings and achievements. It is under
the supervision and control of the Grand Council (No. 133), of
whom one or more of the members may hold the position of
President — Tmng Ts'ai ^ ^. The other superior officers are two
Manchu and two Chinese Proctors — TH THao ^ fSJ, and an equal
number of Archivists — Show Chang l(j[ j|t. There are in addition
three Manchu and six Chinese Compilers — Tsuan Siu ^ j^.

151.— Nui Fan Shu Fang j^ ^ tf g.— Manchu-Chinese
Translation Office.

Conducts the translation of State papers from Chinese into
Manchu, Subject, like the Fang Lio Kwan (see above), to the
Grand Council.

1 52.— TsuNG-Li KoH KwoH She Wu TamIjn HiM^M^
Igjf ^ P^. — The Yamen of Foreign Affairs.

This department, like the Kiln Ki Ch'u or Grand Council, is
considered not so much a separate organization, with ranks and
promotion specially appertaining to itself, as a species of Cabinet
formed by the admission of members of other departments of
State. It owes its institution to proposals laid before the Throne
by a special Council convened after the conclusion of peace in
1860, to decide upon the manner in which foreign affairs should
thenceforward be conducted. In reply to the memorial presented
by this Council, headed by the Prince of Hwei, a Decree was
issued on the 19th January 1861, commanding the formation of
a new department under the title given above. In the same
decree, the Prince of Kung (brother of the Emperor Hien Feng,
at that time on the throne), Kwei Liang, a senior Grand Secre-
tary, and Wen Siang, a Vice-President of the Board of War,

CLli^ ^^ ^^ f^f^J^) Sue "? ^ICd. Q^JC:

/

16 PART II.— METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION.

were named as the constituent members of the Tamen. In the
following year four additional Ministers were added to the list,
and by the year 1869, successive additions had brought the
number up to ten, at which it remained for a number of years, the
various members consisting of Presidents and Vice-Presidents of
the different Boards {see infrdj No. 153), including a majority
of the members of the Grand Council. The death of Wen Siang,
in May, 1876, left the Prince of Kung as the sole original member
still connected with the Yamen; and in December, 1876, the
YamSn became more closely than ever identified with the Grand
Council, by the admission into its ranks of the two members of
that body who had not previously been introduced to it Their
admission raised the number of Ministers of the Yamen to eleven.
They are spoken of collectively as Wang Ta Ch^in ^ ^ g —
the Prince and Ministers. The departmental work of the Yamen
is conducted by secretaries, Clmng King ^ Jff , who were in the

first instance drafted from the staff of the Grand Council. Their
ordinary official designation is sze yUan ^ ^ or sze kwan ^ ^.
The six chief Secretaries, all of whom hold either substantive or
expectant rank, are usually designated tsung pan ^ K|. In
accordance with the scheme proposed in 1861, the office of Minis-
ter Superintendent of Trade, T^ung Shang Ta Ch^en ji£ "^ ^ S^
is held at Nanking and Tientsin respectively by the Governor
General of the Two Kiang provinces and the Governor General of
Chihli. As Superintendents of Trade for the Northern ports
(Tientsin, Newchwang, and Chefoo) and the Southern ports
(including the remainder of those open to trade) respectively, these
functionaries are commonly referred to as the Nan and Peh Yang
Ta Ch'in ^ 4t # * E-

The Six Boards.

153.— i. Li Pu Jg ^.— Board of Civil Office. Lit. des.
Ta'nan Ts'ao ^ 1g.

154.-rii. Hu Pu JS ^. — Board of Eevenue. Lit. des.
Nung Pu Jl gp and Min Pu Jg -gp.

155. — iii. Li Pu Jjj^ UJ* — Board of Ceremonies. Lit. des.
Ts'ze Pu PI ft.

PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATIOIT. 17

156.— iv. Ping Pu ^ 1^.— Board of War. Lit. des.

157.— V. HiNG Pu }lj ^— Board of Punishments. Lit.
des. PiPu^^ and Si Ts'ao W W-

1 58.— vi. KuNG Pu X IJ5.— Board of Works. Lit. des.
Shuei Pu'Hii ^,

159.— YoH Pu ^ {p.— The Board of State Music, a
dependency of the Board of Ceremonies. See in/rdy No. 173, etc.

^^*^^ The official constitution of each of the Six Boards
{Liu Pu ^ fl5) is, with few exceptions, the same throughout.
They control, each in its allotted department, the execution of that
system of minute regulation for the conduct of all public affairs
which has been mentioned above as the principal attribute of the
Central Government The Presidents and Vice-Presidents of the
Boards, in fact, with the heads of the Censorate and the Hanlin
College, may be said to constitute the central administration. The
following is the staif common to all the Boards :

160. — Shang Shu fj ^.—President of a Board; 1 b.
Official des. Pu Pang ^ ^. Each Board has two presidents,
respectively Manchu and Chinese.

161. — She Lang f^ ^. — Vice-President of a Board; 2 a.
Official des. Pu YOan $5 f^. Each Board has two Manchu and
two Chinese Vice-Presidents, distinguished respectively, in each
class, as Senior, Tso She Lang £ ^ SS? and Junior Vice-President,
Yeo She Lang 7^ ^ ^.

1 62,— Pu YtJAN Ta Ch'Sn U5 K :fc g.— Heads of Depart-
ments. This generic designation embraces the Presidents of the
Six Boards and of the Superior Courts. Presidents and Vice-
Presidents are further described as T}ang Kwan ^ ^ or heads of
departments.

The following are the literary equivalents for the titles of the
Presidents and Vice-Presidents of the Boards :

Board of Civil Office: President, Tai Tsai ±^ ^ Vice-
President, Shoo Tsai ijf ^.

18 ' PART II. — ^METEOPOLITAN ADMIKISTRATION.

Board of Eevenue : President, Ta Sze T^u ;^ 'S ^- Vice-
President, Shao Sze Tu >J? ^ ^.

Board of Ceremonies: President, Ta Tsung Peh •Kj ^ fjQ.
Vice-President, Shao Tmng Peh iJ? ^ {&•

Board of War: President, Ta Sze Ma ^ % Jg§. Vice-
President, Shao Sze Ma )J^ % ^.

Board of Punishments: President, Ta Sze K'ow ^ Q ^.
Vice-President, Shao Sze K^ow fj^ % ^.

Board of Works: President, Ta Sze K^ung >^ "3 S- Vice-
President, Shao Sze K'ung jj? "^ ^.

163. — Lang Chung $^ if». — Senior Secretary of a Board;
5 a. Lit. des- Cheng Lang ^ J^.

164. — Yuan Wai Lang Q ^ %. — Second-class Secretary
of a Board; 5 b. Lit. des. Fa Lang glj J|^; Ki Lang ff ^.

165. — T^ANG Chu She ^ ^ :^. — Assistant Secretary of a
Board; 6 a.

166. — Chu She ;J y. — Second-class Assistant Secretary
of a Board. Lit. des. Chu Clieng ^ BSt? 6 a.

N,B. — The four preceding ranks are very largely obtained
by purchase or conferred as distinctions, without entailing more
than a nominal connection with the Boards to which they relate.
The Secretaries in active employment at a Board are generically
described as Sze Kwan 3 '1^«

167. — Pu Sze Sze-K'u ^ ^ "^ J$.— Treasury Supervisor
of a Board or Court ; 7 a.

1 68. — Sze Wu % fj.— Steward of a Board; 8 a.

1 69.— Pu Yuan K'u She $|5 ^ j$ ^.—Treasury Keeper
of a Board; unclassed.

1 70. — Sze Yu % ^. — Keeper of the Prison of the Board of
Punishments; 9 b.

1 71 . — Sze Tsiang "^ |S. — Overseer of Works, in the Board
of Works ; 9 b.

172.— Chu Yin Kuh Ta She H pfl ^ :fc ft,— Superin-

PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 19

tendent of the seal-casting department (under the Board of
Ceremonies) ; unclassed.

Officers of the Board of Music :

173. — Ho SnfeNG Shu Shu Chbng ft S I^ I^ jE- — Director
of the Board of Music; 6 b.

1 74.— Ho SflfiNG Shu Shu Cn^feNG ft S 1^ |^ fB-— Sub-
director of the do. do ; 7 b.

175. — HiEH Lu Lang fg ^ J$. — Chief Musicians ; 5 in all.

176.— SzE YoH Lang g m ®.— Band-masters; 25 in all.

177.— YoH SnfeNG m ^.—Musicians; 180 in all.

178.— Wu SHfiiNG H Ife.— Posturers ; 300 in all.

179.— SzE YiH HwEi T'UNG KwAN Ta She B Hl^ ^ H
^ ft* — Keeper of the Residence for Tributary Envoys (under
the Board of Ceremonies) ; 9 a.

180.— SzE YiH HwEi T^UNG KwAN Su Pan ^ ^.—
Ceremonial Usher of Tribute Missions ; 9 b.

1 81 .— PiH-T^iEH-SHE |l iKf ^.—Official Writer. The title
borne by the class of Government clerks (with official status of the
7th, 8th, or 9th rank) attached to all the metropolitan departments.
Lit. des. Pi/i Cheng ^ Q[. The title is a reproduction of the
Manchu word bitkeshij or writer. Although nominally charged
with the clerical duties of the Boards and other Government offices,
the pih-t^ieh'she at the present day leave the bulk of the work of
correspondence and account-keeping, etc., to be performe dby the
permanent staff of hired clerks, shu-pan ff m (officially designated
shu'-li ff |g), who are employed in large numbers in every
public office in Peking as well as throughout the Empire.

1 82. — SUB-DBPARTMBNTS OF THE BOARDS.

Each of the Six Boards is subdivided into a variety of depart-
ments, a certain number of which are common to all, whilst the
ftmctions of others are naturally prescribed by the special attributes
of the Board itself. The following are the designations of the
departments to be found in all the Boards alike: —

20 PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION.

i. Tang Fang flf '^. — Q^neral Beoord and Registry Depart-
ment. In the Board of Revenue this is divided into two offices,
the Northern and Southern, each with distinct classes of business
under its control.

ii. Ftn Fang ;jC ^. — Copyists' Department; for the pre-
paration of reports and returns to be laid before the Throne.

iii. SzE WuH T^iNG ^ Igjf Igg. — Superintendency of employes
and current business.

iv. TuH Ts^ui So ^ fg J5f. — Control Department; for ensuring
the punctual despatch of business.

V. Tang Yueh Ch'u § ^ jg. — Correspondence Registration
Office.

The following departments are common to more than one
Board:

vi. KuN Su KuH ^ H ^.—Office of the Military Chest.
(Boards of Revenue and of Works).

vii. Ts^iEN Fah T'ang §( jjfe ^. — Coinage Department.
(As above).

viii. Fan Yin Ch^u ^ ^ Jg. — Provincial Perquisites Office ;
issuing the maintenance allowance to members of the Board on
duty. (Boards of Revenue and Punishment).

The amount thus shared, under the name of ^^maintenance,
or food, money," is derived from percentages on the revenue
collection remitted under this head from the provincial exchequers.

«*« The departmental work of each Board is, in addition,
distributed among a variety of office divisions, the most important
of which bear the generic designation of TsHng-li Sze {JH £ "3, to
which epithets indicating either the names of the provinces
appertaining to the several divisions, or the character of their
special business, are prefixed. The most noteworthy of the special
departments appertaining to each of the principal Boards are the
following :—

ix. HiEN ShSn Ch^u 3g 9 gf.—- (Board of, Revenue).

PART n. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 21

A special Court for the adjudication of suits among Manchus
relating to landed property.

X. San K'u Tang Fang H Jfltt tt *•— (Board of Revenue).
Registry Office of the Three Treasuries. — ^These are: the Bullion
Treasury, the Treasury of Silks and Satins, and the Treasury of
Dye-stuffs and Stationery.

xi. Wu SuAN Ts*iNG-Li SzE IC 3 jH j^ fj.— (Board of
War). Office of appointments and promotions.

xii. Chih Fang Ts^ing-li Sze JR JST iH £ '9.— (Board of
War). General Conduct Office. Supervises the bestowal of
rewards and adjudication of penal ties j the periodical scrutiny of
qualifications, inspection of troops, etc. etc.

xiii. Ch'I; Kia Ts^ing-li Sze :^ S It ft Q.— (Board of
War). The Cavalry Remount and Postal Department. This office
superintends all matters relating to the military stud. Beneath it
are the following three sub-departments : —

xiv. HwEi T^UNG Kwan #|^|t. — Imperial Despatch Office;
superintending the transmission of the correspondence from the
Provinces.

XV. TsiEH Pag Ch^u ^ ^ g^. — Council Messenger's Office.

xvi. T^i T^ANG H ||.— The Courier Posts.

The arrangements for the transmission of Government des-
patches along the lines of postroads throughout the Empire are
superintended by military officials stationed at either end of each
line of communication, and entitled either Chu King T^i-t^ang
IK ^ ^ Hi' Superintendents of Posts residing at Peking, of
whom there are sixteen, or Chu Sheng 'Pi Pang 1^ i§ H ^y
Provincial Superintendents, as the case may be. Under the
direction of the former are the Pao Fang ^ ]^ or offices at which
the Peking Gazette is printed.

xvii. Wu K^u Ts^iNG Li Sze Jg jj Jflf JJ fj.— (Board of
War). Office of registration for the army and military stores, and
for the direction of the military examinations.

xviii. WfeN SuAN Ts^iNG Li Sze $ S i» A S-—

22 PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATIOIT.

(Board of Civil Office). Appointment and Transfer department.

XIX. K'AO KuNG Ts'iNG Li SzB ^ J^ f|||t f|.— (Board of
Civil Office). Department of Scrutiny; having the control over the
rewards or penalties to be awarded throughout the civil service.

XX. Yen FSng Ts^ing Li Szb Jjf ^ fH ft g.— (Board of
Civil Office). Department of issue of patents of nobility and
rank, etc

183.— Li Fan Yuan 3 flf J^.—The Mongolian Superin-
tendency. This department, which has sometimes been called
the Colonial Office^ is specially charged with the control of the
tribes of Mongolia, including the multifarious and complicated
relations with their princes and various ranks of nobles, with the
affidrs of Tibet, and with the supervision of the Lamaist hierarchy
in all its ramifications. Until within the present generation, it
also conducted the relations of the Chinese Government with that
of Bussia. Its organization is similar to that of the Six Boards
(see above), with the exception that it has but one President and
two Vice-Presidents. For the affairs administered by the Board,
see Parts XI and XII.

184.— The Tu Ch*a Yuan |gs |g R.— The Censorate, or
Court of Censors. Lit. des. Ya She T^ai Ift jfe ^.

185.— Tso Tu Yu She ^g HJ :^ i.— President of the
Censorate; lb. One Manchu and one Chinese. Lit. des.

Tsung Him iH JjR-

186.— Ybo Tu Yti She :& S5 ^ ft.— Associate-President of
the Censorate; a title borne by Governors General of the provinces.

187.— Tso and Yeo Fu Tu Yu She 2E :& gJ|B ^ ft.—
Vice-Presidents (Senior and Junior) of the Censorate; 3 a. Lit.
des. Fu Hien g|J JjJ. Two of the first and four of the second rank,
in each case half Manchu and half Chinese. The title of the junior
rank is borne by Governors of the Provinces.

188. — Ki She Chung fj^ Tf. ^. — Supervising Censors;
5 a. These constitute the Imperial Supervisorate or Of&ce of

PART II, — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 23

Scrutiny over the Six Boards, hence called Liu K^o 3?; f|. In
each department there are two Chang Yin Ki She Chung jIC PP |fr
^ rfi or Keepers of the Seal, and two ordinary Supervisors.
Lit des. Ta Ki Kim :^ |& t||.

189.— YtJ She ^ 4.— Censors; 5 b. Lit des. She Ya ^ :^.
Coll. des. Tu Lao-yeh |0 ^ j^. There are 56 in all, distributed
over 15 Tao ^ or Circuits embracing the Eighteen Provinces,
beside the King Ki Tao ^ ft S, Metropolitan circuit. .To each
division there are allotted two Chang Yin Yu She '}$. ^ Hi £, or
Keepers of Seal, and two or more Censors, whose duty it is to
inform the Sovereign upon all subjects connected with the welfare
of the people and the conduct of government.

In addition to the above, a certain number of the Censors are
employed as Superintendents of Police for the Five Divisions of
the city and suburbs of Peking, called the Wu Ch^ing jj M? ^^
"Five Cities." These are the Centre, or the environs of the
Imperial Palace, and the North, South, East, and West divisions.
Others of the Censors are appointed in turn to act as Supervisors
of the Granaries, or Ch^a Ts'ang Yu She £ ^ ^ £•

1 90.— The T'uNG CnfeNG Sze jiljfca.— Office of Transmission.
Lit. des. Yin T^ai ft ^. Tliis department had the duty, under
the Ming dynasty, of opening, recording, and transmitting to the
Council of State all memorials received from the provinces. At
present, it takes cognizance only of the tH pin @ TfC, or memorials
on routine business which are thus received. AH memorials on
special business go to the Council unopened.

191. — T^UNO ChIing She Sze jH igfi; ^ %* — Commissioner
of the Office of Transmission ; one Manchu and one Chinese.

192.— T^uNG CHfeNG Sze Fu She JHfc Q gll 1i-— Deputy
Commissioner of the Office of Transmission; one Manchu and oq^
Chinese.

193.- T^UNG CnfiNG SzB Ts<an I ji ft €1 ^ H-— Secretaiy
of the Office of Transmission; one Manchu and one Chinese*

24 PABT II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION.

194.— T^UNG Cheng Szb King Lih ^ Q|[ ^ jg |f.—
Commifisary of Records of the Office of Transmission.

1 95,— The Ta Li Szr :fc g ^.— Grand Court of Revision.
This department exercises a general supervision over the administra-
tion of the criminal law.

1 96.— Ta Li Sze K^ing ^ 9 ^-jjip.— Director of the Grand
Court of Revision; 3 a. Lit. des. Ting Tsih |g BQ.

1 97.— Ta Li Tze Shag K^ing :fc 9 # {{? Up.— Sub-Director
of do. do. ; 4 a. Lit. des. Tso Ki ^ IJ.

1 98. — Tso Sze and Yeo Sze ChISng 2£ ^ ^ 5^* — Secretaries
of do. do.; 6 a. Lit. des. I Sze ^ %,

199. — ^Tso and Yeo P^ing She 2£ /& ^ ^.—Assistant
Secretaries of do. do.; 7 a.

200. — Note. — The three foregoing departments, colloquially
classed in the phrase Jw, T^tinjr, Ta, |B( j|| ;)t;9 constitute with the
Six Boards the Ta Kiu KHng "^ZJL^iOv Nine Chief Ministries
of State. When the Kiu K^ing are named in decrees without
mention of the Six Boards, the above combination is implied.
When the "Six Boards and Nine Ministries" are specified, the
Siao Km K'ing ij^ ^ jgl, are understood to be referred to. These
comprise the Censorate, the Tung ChSng SzCy the Five Courts or
Sze 3£ ^9 the Han Lin Yuan^ and the Kwoh Tsze Kien,

201.— The Han-Lin Yuan ^ ;^ K-— The College of
Literature {Han-lin College).

202.— Chang YOan High She S|E ^ #1 i.— Chancellor of
the Han-lin ; 2 b. One Manchu and one Chinese. (The post may-
be filled by a Grand Secretary, or by a President or Vice-President
of a Board).

203.— She Tuh High She f^ || j|( j;.— Reader of the
Han Jin ; 4 b. Two are Manchu and three Chinese.

204. — She Kiang Hioh She ^ ^ ^^ j;.— Expositor of the

Han-lin ; 4 b. (As above).

205.— She Tuh ^ H-— Sub-reader of the Han-lin; 5 b.

(As above).

PART II. — METROPOLITAK ADMINISTBATION. 25

206.— She Kianq j^ If.— Sub-Expositor of the Han-linj
5 b. (As above).

Note. — ^The above classes constitute what may be called the

superior hierarchy of the Han-lin College. The following are the

titles bestowed upon the successful candidates at the triennial

examinations of tsin^sze graduates held in the Palace, and hence
called Tien Slie or Palace Examinations (See Part IX).

207.— Siu Chwan f^ ^. — Han-lin Compiler; 6 b.

208.— PiBN Siu |g j|f. — Han-lin Compiler (second class);

7 a. Lit. des. "Pai She ^ ^.

209.— KiEN T'AO It If .—Han-lin Graduate of the third
degree; 7 b.

210. — Shuh-Ki She ^ "§ j:. — Han-lin Bachelor, or
graduate of the lowest degree. (See Part IX, No. 473). The
graduates of this class are still held bound to pursue a farther
course of study, which is conducted at the Shu Chiang Kwan ^
% H^, a college devoted to this purpose, and are enabled by a
subsequent examination, held by a special Commission within the
Imperial palace, to attain the degrees of Pien Siu and Kien T'ao^
as above. They are then said to be Liu Kwan fj f|[, t.€., retained
in the Han-lin College. Those who fail to reach the higher degrees
are described as San Kwan ^ f|f, or *' released from study," and
receive appointments as District Magistrates or Secretaries of
Boards.

211.— Wu King Poh She £ g jf :t.— Doctor of the
Han-lin degree; 8 a. A special distinction conferred upon des-
cendants of the sages of antiquity, after passing the examinations
at Peking.

212.— Tien Pu :^ ||.— Archivist of the Han-lin College;

8 b. Four in all.

213. — ^Tai Chad ^ ^. — Probationer of the Han-lin College;

9 b. (As above.)

214.— K^DNG MuH JL @.— Clerk of the Han-lin College
(lowest grade) ; 9 b.

215.— The KwoH She Kwan B ^ If.— State Historio-
grapher's Office.

26 PART IL — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION.

This is a department of the Han-lin College, engaged in the
custody and preparation of the historical archives of the dynasty.
Its duties comprise the compilation of official biographies of all
eminent public servants. The following are the titles of its
functionaries:—

21 6. — TsuNO Ts'Ai iHl ^.—Director General. (This appoint-
ment is usually held by one of the chief Ministers of State).

217.— T^i TiAO H m.— Proctor; two Manchu and two
Chinese.

218. — ^TsuNG TswAN ill 0|. — Historiographer; four Manchu
and six Chinese.

219.— TswAN Siu H gf.— Compiler; 34 in all.

220.— The Chan She Fu )^ 1^ jjj. — Imperial Supervisorate
of Instruction. This department is specially charged with the
direction of the studies of the Heir Apparent, but it has ceased for
upwards of a century to exercise, even nominally, any active
functions. The appointments connected with it are conferred as
sinecure rewards for literary service.

221. — Chan Shb d^^. — Chief Supervisor of Instruction;
3 a. Lit. des. Kung Clian ^ j^.

222.— Shao Chan She fj^ @.— Assistant Supervisor of
Instruction; 4 a. Lit. des. Shao Yin ^ ^.

223.— Tso and Yeo Ch<un Fang Shuh Tszb &:Q ^i^M
^. — Deputy Supervisor of Instruction (senior and junior rank) ;
5 a. Lit. des. Kung Shu ^ |S|.

224.— SzB King Kxjh Sibn Ma ^ fl[ ]g jJb Jg.— Groom of
the Library; 5 b.

225.— Tso and Yeo Ch^un Fang Chung YtJN &:& M^
tp ^. — Secretary of the Supervisorate of Instruction ; 6 a. Lit,
des. Kung Yun ^ ^.

226.— Tso and Yeo Ch^un Fang Tsan Shan H ||.—
Assistant do. do. do.; 6 b. Lit. des. Kung Tsan ^ f(.

227.— Chu Pu i H,— Archivist; 7 b.

PART II. — ^METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 27

The Four Mxnor Courts:
These are as follows:

228.— T^Ai Chiang Szb -j^ fH ^.— Court of Sacrificial
Worship.

229.— T^Ai P^u Szb ±^ HI ^.-Do. of the Imperial Stud.

230.— K WANG LuH Szb % ^ ^.— Do. of Imperial Enter-
tainments (or Banqueting Court).

231.— Hung Lu Szb ^ H ^.— Do. of State Ceremonial.

The officials of the above-named departments, which, with the
Court of Bevision (see No. 195) constitute the Wu See 3£ ^, are
as follows, the titles in each case being nearly identical, but
distinguished by the name of the department to which they
respectively belong: —

232. — K^ING IgL — Director; 3 a (except in the Hung Lu SzBj
which is 4 a). The lit designations of the various Courts are as
follows: T>ai Chiang Sze^—Tsung Peh ^ffi; T^ai P^u Sze^—
Ta Sze P^u ^ fi| fl; Kwang Luh Sze^—Ta Sze Shan ^ ^ Ji;
Hung Luh Sze^ — Ta Hing JSn :fi fx A* Except in the case of
the first of the four, the Sub- Directors (see below) have the same
designations, with the character Shoo (lesser) substituted for Ta.

N.B. — The Directors and Sub-Directors of the Courts are
generically described as King T^ang jS( £•

233. — Shao K*ing ^p 0. — Sub-Director; 4 a and 5 a
(except the Hutig Luh Sze^ which is 5 b). Lit. des. of Sub-Director
of the T'ai Ch'ang Sze,—F^g Ch'ang $ ^.

234. — Szb Ch^Iing ^ ^.—Secretary of a Court; 6 a.

235.— SiJ Pan ^ igt.— Usher of the Court of State Cere-
monial.

236.— Ming Tsan ql ||.— Herald of the do. do. ; 7 a.

237* — Shu ChIsng |f ]£. — Superintendent of various depart-
ments of the Banqueting Court, such as the Fleshers', the
Cellarage, the Game, the Spices, etc., etc.

Special officers of the Tai Chang Sze :

28 PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION.

238.— SnfiN YoH Shu SHU-CefiNO i^i ISII^ ft ]£.— Director
of the Sacred Music Department; 6 a.

239.— Sh^n Yoh Shu Snu-CH^fiNG iMi i||^ ft ^.—Sub-
Director of the do. do.; 8 b.

240. — POH SzB ^ i.— Doctor; 7 a.

241.— TiBN Tsi H j|.— Recorder; 7 a.

242.— TuH Cnufi Kwan ^ H 'g.— Reciter of Prayers; 7 a.

243.— Ts^zK Tsi Shu FSng Sze j^ ^ J§ $ fE.— Offerer of
Sacrifice; 7 b.

244. — TsAN Li Lang K H Sg. — Ceremonial Usher; 7a and
9 a. Commonly designated by the Manchu title of Hii~la Hd^/an.

245.— Hieh Lfir Lang {ft ^ Kg.- Chief Musician; 8 a.

246. — SzB Yoh ^ m. — Band-master; 9 b. Each court has
also its Archivist, Sub-Archivist, etc.

247. — ^The Kwoh Tsze Kibn g -^ J|. — Imperial Academy
of Learning. Lit. des. T^ai Hioh ^ ^.

This, like the Han-lin College, is rather an assemblage
of titled literary dignitaries than a body of officials with active
fimctions. The ^^ Imperial Academy" has its nominal seat in a
vast range of buildings adjacent to the Temple of Confucius, near
the north-eastern angle of Peking, but, like most of the official
institutions of the capital, it is visited only as a matter of form,
at infrequent intervals, by the functionaries connected with it by
their titles. The great quadrangle occupied by the institution is
bounded east and west by a long arcade within which the monu-
mental slabs erected to perpetuate the authorized text of the
whole of the Confacian Books are arranged in rows. In the
centre stands one of the most striking specimens of Chinese
architecture, consisting in a lofty pavilion-shaped building, erected
upon a platform of white marble placed in the midst of a circular
piece of water, itself walled in with marble, and across which
access is given to the building, by four marble bridges at the
cardinal points. In this building, which represents the Pi Yung
W S or Imperial College of antiquity, each sovereign is held

PART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION. 29

bound to enthrone himself once in the course of his reign, to
preside over a solemn assemblage of all the scholars of the capital,
in whose hearing a classical essay, nominally composed by his
Majesty, and hence designated Yu Lun ^ H^, is recited. The
department of study is divided into six classes, Liu T^ang /; jj^,
the students connected with which receive a stipend from Govern-
ment and are periodically examined. The schools for the instruc-
tion of Russians and Liu-Ch4uans in the Chinese language, forming
part of this institution, have ceased to exist. The Liu-Ch4uan
class was known as the Nan Hioh ^ ^. The students of the
Imperial Academy are designated Kien ShSng H ^, a title which is
purchaseable throughout the Empire as the lowest literary degree.
The officials of the department are as follows :

248.— KWAN-LI KwoH TszB KiBN Ta Ch^bn ^ 81 H •? K
^ g. — Chancellor of the Imperial Academy (a post usually con-
ferred on one of the senior Grand Secretaries).

249. — ^Tsi Tsiu g fg. — Libationer; 4 b. One Manchu and
one Chinese. Lit. des. Ta Sze Ch'hig ^ "Q jjR.

250. — SzB Ybh % H.— Tutor; 6 a. One Manchu, one
Mongol, and one Chinese. Lit. des. Shao Sze Ch^ing^ ^ jjj.
251. — Ejbn Ch^^ng g ^. — Proctor; 7 a.
252.— PoH SzB If i.— Doctor; 7 b.
253.— TiBN Pu Jf^ a|.— Archivist; 8 b.
254.— Tien Tsi jH g.— Sub-Archivist; 9 b.
255. — Tsu KiAO Jfy Jfe. — Preceptor; 7 b.
256. — SzB Shb Hioh-Luh Q Jg ifl ^. — Registrar; 8 a.
257. — HiOH LuH ^ ^. — Sub-Registrar; 8 a.
258.— Hioh Ch^ng ^ ]£.— Director of Studies; 8 a.

259.— NaiT Shu Fang fg § g.— The Imperial College of
Inscriptions.

This is a committee formed by special appointment, at the
sovereign's pleasure, of an indeterminate number of high literary
officials, who are said to "do duty"— Aiwjp tsow f} j^ — in con-
nection with the College. Their functions consist in preparing

30 1»ART II. — METROPOLITAN ADMINISTRATION,

transcripts of inscriptions in the imperial hand, for presentation
to favoured personages, or for bestowal upon temples erected in
honour of different deities whose supernatural interposition is thus
from time to time acknowledged. They are also liable to be called
upon to discharge the duties of a poet laureate, in preparing odes
or similar compositions which it is intended to confer upon
distinguished public servants.

260.— The K^in T^ien Kien fk 55 JR.— Imperial Board of
Astronomy; with the following staff of officials: —

261.— KwAN Li Kien She Ta Ch^Iin if a £ V :;I^ g.—
Chancellor; a special appointment.

262.— Ejen Ch^no £ £•— Director; 5 a. One Manchu
and one Chinese.

263.— Kien Fu £ H|.— Sub-Director; 6 a. (As above.)

264.— Tso and Teo Kien Fu ^ ^ £ g).— Assistant Sub-
Directors; 6 b.

N.B. — The Ta TB^ing Htoei. Tien contains the proviso that the
two above-named posts shall be filled by Europeans (referring to
the missionary astronomers of the eighteenth century).

265. — ^Wu KwAN CnftNG 5 'g }£.- Secretary; 6 a.

266. — HiEH Hu CnfeNG 4E fi jE- — Keeper of the Clepsydra;
8 a.

267. — LingT^ai Lang S IE SB* — Keeper of the Observatory;
7 b.

268.— The T^ai I YfiAN ± fif K-— College of Imperial
Physicians.

269. — ^YuAN She |^ ^. — Commissioner; 5 a.

270.— Tso and Yeo YIjan P«an £ $ R fj.— Senior and
Junior Proctors; 6 a.

271. — Yu I m ff.— Imperial Physicians; 8 a. Fifteen in
number.

PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 31

PART III.-PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION.

272- — Shih-pa ShSng +/Vi^.— The Eighteen Provinces.

The moderu division of the Empire into provinoes^ called
Shingj dates from the period of the Yiian dynasty (14th century),
when, in addition to the departments of the central government,
which were designated Chung Shu SliSng rf« ^ i^y thirteen
provincial Governorships were established, under the title of
"ambulatory" departments, or Chung Shu Hmg Siting (f^SfTW*
The Ming dynasty inherited this system from their Mongol pre-
decessors, and continued it with slight alteration, changing, however,
the title of the provincial governors in the first instance to Ch'ing
SiUm Pu CMng She ^ IK ^ lEJI 'j^v who became superseded later
by Inspectors or SUn Fu jgj m, the Provincial Grovemors of the
present day. To these, in the 16th century, Governors-General,
Tsung-tuh |S ^y began to be added. The fifteen provinces of the
Ming dynasty were Shan-tung, Shan-si, Ho-nan, Shen-si, Fnh-
kien, Cheh-kiang, Eiang-si, Hu-kwang, Sze-ch^wan, Ewang-tung,
Kwang-si, Yiin-nan, and Kwei-chow, with the two " metropolitan "
provinces, Chih-li (or Peh Cliih-li) and Kiang-nan (or Nan
Ghih-li), in which the northern and southern capitals, Peh King
and Nan King, were respectively situated. In the reign K^ang Hi,
of the present dynasty, the province of Ngan-hwei was separated
from Kiang-nan, which thenceforward took the name of Kiang-su ;
and Kan-suh was similarly formed by the partition of Shen-si.
By dividing Hu-kwang into two provinces, which received the
designations Hu-peh and Hu-nan, moreover, the number was
brought up to eighteen. In contradistinction to the Chung Shu
Slthig or Central Departments of State of the Yuan dynasty, the
provinces to which the same title was, with a certain degree of
modification, subsequently transferred, became entitled Chih ShSng
||[ i§, or " departments under government,'* and by this designa-
tion they are now generically recognized.

32

PART III.— PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION.

The provinces are divided into Fu jgp or Prefectures; Ting |g|
or Independent Sub-Prefectures; Chih4% Cluno H ^ ^ or
Independent Departments ; Chow ji{ or Departments subject to a
Fu; and Him J^ or Districts subject to a i^M or Chih-li Chow.

For the three Manchurian Provinces see Part V.

The following table exhibits the names and grouping of the
eighteen provinces, together with the literary or archaic designa-
tions by which they are frequently referred to :

ARCHAIC OR LITERARY
DBSIGNATION.

iK S or ^ ft

in or jg

Suborns
H orfft

f «
4111

m

PRESENT NAME.

1. ChihJi iti^

2. Kiang-su ftf^

3. Ngan-hwei ^^

4. Kiang-si JX|f

5. Shan-tung (1]]^

6. Shan-si lIlBf

7. Ho-nan ^W

8. Shen-si S^W

9. Kan-suh -^

10. Fuh-kien |gji

11. Cheh-kiang SJtJt

12. Hu-pgh JSSB4fc\

13. Hu-nan ^^j

14. Sze-ch*wan h)|I

15. Kwang-tungUlK

16. Kwang-si j||f

17. Yiin-nan f^ilf

18. Kwei-chow jfcjfll

TITLE OF GOVBRNGR-
OENBRAL8HIP.

}
}

}
}

1ft ^ Chih-li (Separate)

M Jl Liang Kiang, or
ftl^ Kiang Nan.

None,
do.
do.

15* -fl- Shen-Kan.

f^^ Min-Chgh.

MSi HuKwang, or
^ jgg Liang Hu.
Hjll Sze-ch^wan(Sep.)

^JK Liang Kwang.
Jl Yun-kwei.

273. — ^TsuNG-TUH H >|p. — Governor- General; 2 a. Off.
des. CA^ Kan Hj^ ffi; Coll. des. Che-t'ai ^ ^. Being ex officio
invested with the title of President of the Board of War, he
styles himself Pu T^ang $ £• Is also ex officio a Junior Pre-
sident of the Court of Censors. The Governor-General is the
highest in rank of the civilian functionaries of the provincial
administration, and is at the same time invested with special
powers of control over the military forces within his jurisdiction.
In the cases of Chih-U, Sze-ch'wan, and Kansuh, he administers
affairs without the intervention of a Governor; whilst in the
remaining cases, a Governor-General is placed, as a superior

PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 33

colleagne, beside the Governors of two, or, in the case of the
Liaiig Kiang, of three separate provinces. For the administration
of his military supervisorate, each Governor-General is provided
with a special bureau, or Military Secretariat, entitled Ying WuJi
Ch^u S Sf Jft- ^^^ adjutant, entitled Chung KUn rf* J^, is the
Colonel commanding the Tuh piao brigade (see Nos. 439 and 453).
He is entitled in addition to employ a staff of civil and military
orderly oflScers, entitled WSn S&n-pu $ ^ M, who are usually
officers of the rank of district Magistrate (in expectancy), and
Wu SUri'pu |iC JS tA? of the rank of lieutenant.

274.— SuN-FU ^ J|.— Governor; 2 b. Off. des. Fu-yilanX
91 K 5 C^^* ^®®- F^'^^^i fil 'a 5 Style in corresp. Pu Yuan ^ (^ ;
Epist. style, Chung Ch^ing tfi ^, and Fu KUn g| %. Ex officio
invested with the titles of Ping Pu She-lang or Vice-President of
the Board of War, and Yeo Fu Tu Yu She or Vice-President of
the Censorate. Each of the eighteen provinces is under the
control of an officer of this rank, with the exception of the pro-
vinces of Chih-li, Kan-suh, and Sze-chVan, which are administered
by Governors-General. The Governor is in all cases a colleague
rather than a subordinate of the Governor-General. Shan-tung,
Shan-si, and Ho-nan have no Governors-General over them.
The Governor-General and the Governor, jointly, are spoken of as
Tuh'Fu ^ 81 or Liang Yuan M K-

275. — Pu-CnfeNG Shk-Szb ^ H^ ^ f|. — Lieutenant-
Governor, or Financial Commissioner (commonly called Treasurer);
2 b. Off. des. Fan Sze ^ ^; Coll. des. Fan t^ai ff ^ ; Epist.
style. Fang Peh jjf ffi. The head of the civil service in each
province, and treasurer of the provincial exchequer. Represents
the earlier class of provincial governors as appointed under the
Ming d3masty (see No. 272).

276. — ^Ngan-Ch^a She-Szb ^ ^ ft 3. — Provincial Judge
or Judicial Commissioner; 3 a. Off. des. Nieh Sze fk ^l ^^I*
des. Ifieh t^ai flk 'a ; Epist style. Lien Fang ||| gjf.

{N.B. — The two foregoing officials are frequently classed
together as Fan-Nieh Liang Sze flf Jt M fl ^^ ^^^ two Chief
Commissioners of the provincial Government).

34 PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMimSTRATIOST.

277.— Yen Yun She-Szb 9 ^ f| fl.— Salt Comptroller;
3 a. OfF. des. Yan Sze^^; Epist. style, Tu Chwa7i fjS W Chief
Commissioner of the revenue derived from the provincial gabelle or
salt monopoly. For minor ranks see in/rd^ Nos. 307 to 313.

278. — Liang Tag )|9 JJ. — Grain Intendant; 4 a. Chief
comptroller of the provincial revenue from the grain tax, whether
collected in money or in kind. Distinguished by various titles in
different provinces, as Tuh Liang Tao ft ^ jB ^.nd Liang Ch^u Tao
fi il it- (See infrd, No. 280.)

279. — Note. — The "provincial government," constituted by
the above-named high officers, is commonly designated by the term
Tuh Fu Sze Tao ft Hi €1 iS) embracing them all.

The Sze TaOy or four high officials immediately below the
rank of Governor, constitute in each province a Committee or
Board of provincial administration. This Committee was named,
during the Taiping rebellion, when its organization first came into
general use, the KUn SU Tsung Kuh 9C IB iK ^ or Supreme
Military Board; but of late years the title Shau'liow Tsung Kuh
8 IS H JS 01* Supreme Board of Beorganization (provincial
administrative Board) has been substituted in the majority of cases.
The phrase slum Iww implies the ** restoration of order," or pacifi-
cation, after a state of rebellion or warfare.

At Foochow, a Board of Foreign Affairs, similarly constituted,
is designated the T^ung Sfiang Tsung Kuh ^ ^ |B ]§•

280.— FfeN Sun Tag f^ ^ Ji.— Intendant of Circuit; 4 a.
Off", des. Tao Jft; Coll. des. Tao-t'ai j^ ■^; Epist. style Kwan-
Ch^a |g ^ and Kim Sze £ ^« A functionary placed with
administrative control over two or more Prefectures {Fu). In
virtue of the powers of control over the military forces within his
jurisdiction, which are usually annexed to a Taotai's office, he is
officially designated Ping Pei Tao ^ fH ^, a title which dis-
tinguishes him from the Liang Tao (see No. 278), or the
Intendants of the Salt and Tea Revenue, Yen Ch^a Tao H i|^ jiE
established in some of the provinces. (See also Hai-kivan Kien^iuh^
No. 324.)

PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 35

Note. — All ofRcials appertaining to the above ranks are
spoken of or addressed in conversation by the title Ta Jen ;fj A
appended to their surnames; except in the Case of members of the
Grand Secretariat or titular "Imperial Guardians" (see Part II,
Nos, 135, 139, and 142).

281.— Chb Fu JD JjJ.— Prefect; 4 b. Off. des. Show t^;

Epist style T'ai Show ^(j ^. Personal designation in recital of

titles, Clieng T^ang j£ ^. The title of the officer governing the

largest of the provincial subdivisions, or Fuy of which each province

at the present day embraces, on an average, about ten. There are

now, in all, 183 Fu or Prefectures, the smallest number (seven)

being in Shensi, and the largest (thirteen) in Kiangsi. The Che Fu

'•I

of the present period represents the Kun Show fB "^ of the earliest
administrative division of the'Empire, under Ts'in She Hwang-ti,
B.C. 221, and the T'ai Show of the Han dynasty (reign of King Ti,
B.O. 156). The Prefecture of the present day is frequently
spoken of as KUn f|{, in reference to the ancient designation.
The incumbent of the prefecture within which the provincial capital
is situated is designated Slvow Eu "M* iff or the chief (head) Prefect
(of the province).

282.— T'UNG Che (g ^.—Sub-Prefect; 5 a. Coll. des.
Urh Fu ^ }^; Epist. style Sze Ma ^ J^. To be distinguished
as (A) First-class Sub-Prefect, administering a T^ing or indepen-
dent sub-prefecture, and (B) Second-class Sub-Prefect, holding
office under a Che Fu. Of this latter class there are a variety of
denominations, according to the functions exercised. Such are
Hai Fang Tung Che Mf^ ^ {^ ^9 Maritime Sub-Prefect; Kan
Min T^ung Clie or Knn Min Fu % Sk }^^ Sub-Prefect with
military jurisdiction; Shuei Li T'ung Clie i^JCJpJ l^^j Sub-Prefect
in charge of water communications; Li Fan T^ung Che i|£$|^^9
Sub-Prefect in authoriiy over aboriginal tribes, etc. A distinct
office is Li Slie T'ung Che 2B ^ 1^ ^9 ^^ Civil Commissary of a
Manchu Garrison.'

283.— T^UNG-P^AN 3§ fj.— Assistant Sub-Prefect; 6 a.
Epist. style Pieh Kia gl] ^ ; Coll. des. San Fu H M- Holds
office imder either a Prefect or an independent Sub-Prefect.

36 PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION.

Distinguished, according to the functions exercised, by titles such
as Liang Pu T^ung-p^an fl| li ii fH? Revenue and Police Sub-
Prefect,— and Pm 2^ao T^ung-p^an MfiEJiifi? Police Sub-Prefect,
etc.

284. — Che Chow ^ fl\. — Department Magistrate; 5 a and
5 b. Off. des. Mu ^g;; Epist style Sze Ma p^ ^. To be dis-
tinguished Rs ]j|[ ^ ^ Magistrate of an independent Department
or Chih-li Chow, i.«., subject to no prefectural control but reporting
direct to the provincial government ; and ^ f\ Magistrate of a
subordinate Department or San Chmo^ forming part of a prefecture.

Note. — The C7«« Chaw of the present period are considered to
be the counterparts of the Tb'zb She M £ of the Sung dynasty.
Wu Ti, of the Han dynasty, had in more ancient times given this
title to Governors of provinces (Chow).

285. — Chow T'ung i)JI (g. — First-class Assistant Department
Magistrate; 6 b. Epist style Pieh Kia jj/^ H and Cliow Sze-tna

286. — Chow P^an jHI fj- — Second-class Assistant Depart-
ment Magistrate ; 7 b. Epist. style Cho Pieh-Kia JH JSA M-

287. — Li MuH IJI g. — Department Police-master and Jail
Warden ; 9 b.

Note. — The three foregoing offices are common to both classes
of Departments (see No. 284).

288. — Tso Urh ^ JJ. — ^Assistant Magistrates, whether of
Prefectures, Departments, or Districts. Lit. des. Ch^hig Ts^iii
^ {^. To be distinguished from Tso Tea (see No. 322).

289.— Che Hien 9b J|@R.— District Magistrate; 7 b. OflP.

des. Ling ^; Epist. style Ming Fu Ifi Mi ^^ ^^ ifc ^j and

t ^ Yth Tsun g^ dj. Personal designation in recital of titles ChSng

T^ang J£ g. The district within which a provincial capital is

situated gives the title of Shaw Hien *§* H to its incumbent.

290.— Note.— The Fu Chow Hien Iff W IS or Prefects
and Magistrates of different classes constitute the general ad-

PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 37

ministrative body of the provincial civil service. They are charged
with the collection of revenue, the maintenance of order, and the
primary dispensation of justice, as well as with the conduct of
literary examinations and of the government postal service, and in
general with the exercise of all the direct Ainctions of public
administration. They are commonly spoken of as Fu Mu Kwan
^ {^ ^, or officials who stand in loco parentis toward the people
— to., who are the "father and mother" of the people.

AH officials in the above-mentioned ranks are colloquially
spoken of or addressed as Ta Lao Yeh ;fc ^ 3S*

291. — HiBN Ch'Sng H £. — ^Assistant District Magistrate;

8 a. Coll. des. Tio T^ang 2£ JJ; Epist. style Urh Tm%^.

292. — Chu Pu i K- — Deputy Assistant Magistrate; 9 a.
Epist. style San Yin ^ |^.

293. — SiJN KiKN ^ Ut-— Sub-district Deputy Magistrate;

9 b.

294. — ^TiEN Shb K:£. — District Police-master and Jail
Warden; unclassed. Coll. des. Pu THng ^ 0; Lit. des. Yea
T'ang ^ ^ ; Epist. style Shoo Yn ^ jH", Shao Yin iJ? ^, Lien
Pu H tt, and Sfiao Fu ^ J^.

295. — KiNG-LiH fg^ gg. — Commissary of Records, or Secre-
tary. Coll. des. Kmg T'ing S tf; ^P^^^- ^^V^^ ^«^^'< ^^'^ ^%-
In the office of a Lieutenant-Governor, has 6 b; of a Provincial
Judge, 7 a ; of a Salt Comptroller, 7 b ; of a Prefect, 8 a.

296. — Chad Mo $E[ ^. — Commissary of the Seal, or Corre-
spondence Secretary. Coll. des. Chao THng ^ |g|. In the office
of a Lieutenant-Governor, has 8 b; of a Provincial Judge, 9 a;
of a Prefect or First-class Sub-Prefect, 9 b.

297. — K*u Ta She j|t :fc ffi. — Treasury Keeper. Coll. des.
K'u T'ing ^ K|. In office of a Lieutenant Governor, a Salt
Comptroller, or Superintendent of Customs, has 8a; of a TaoHai,
9 b; of a Prefect, etc., unclassed.

298. — ^Tu She |0 ^. — ^Assistant Secretary; 7 b. Coll. des.
Tu She THng fS ^

38 PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION.

299.— Li Wen 3 ^.— Law Secretary; 6 b.

300. — Che Shb ^ 1ft- — Archivist; 8 a, 8 b, and 9 a.
Employed in offices of a Provincial Judge, Salt Comptroller, and
(formerly) of a Prefect.

301. — Ts'ang Ta She ^ ^ ^. — Granary Keeper; 9 a,
and unclassed, according to degree of jurisdiction.

302.— SzB Ytj % it.— Jail Warden of a Provincial Judge-
ship or a Prefecture ; 9 a.

303.— KiAO Show ffelf . — Director of Studies ; 7 a. Attached
to a Prefecture. Lit. des. Kivang Win J| 3!C»

304. — HiOH ChIing 4|jE.— Director of Studies; 8 a. Attached
to a department.

305.— KiAO Yu H; St.— Director of Studies; 8 a. Attached
to a district Lit. des. Fuh Yu :g[ m^, from the full official title
Fu SMh Kiao Yn ^^^^^ which indicates the "restoration"
of the office after its temporary abolition in the last century. Epist.
style Sze Kiao % fj;, and Ching Chat jE X*

306.— Sun Tao n ^.—Sub-Director of Studies; 8 b. Lit.
des. Fuh Sun ^ fH from Fuh SMh £t2n Too flt K P| ^ (see above).
Epist. style Sze San % |||| and Fu Chai g{| ^.

Note. — ^The above-named four officials act as superintendents
and registrars of the candidates preparing for the Literary Exa-
minations and as custodians of the Confucian Temples, etc.

307.— YuN T^UNG fg ig.— Assistant Salt Comptroller; 4 b.

308.— YuN Fu ^ g!|.— Depuiy-Assistant Salt Comptroller;

5 b.

309.— T^i Ku H 5.— Inspector of the Salt Department; 5 b.

310.— YuN P'an 3S Ij.— Sub-Assistant Salt Comptroller;

6 b.

311.— Yen-K^o-Szb Ta She H ^ H :;^ ft.— Receiver of
the Salt Department; 8 a.

312.— P'i-Ybn-So Ta She ^ St J5 ^ ft.— Examiner

PART IIL— PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. 39

of the Salt Department H 5| ; 8 a. Examiner of the Tea Depart-
ment ^ §1 ; unelassed.

813.— Ybn-Ch^a Ta She 9^ :fc iS|.— Examiner of the Tea
and Salt Department; nnclassed.

314._Shuei-K^o-Sze Ta She 5R ^ ^ :fe ^g.— Customs'
Examiner. In a prefecture ; 9 b. In a department or district,
unelassed.

31 5._SuAN.K^o-SzB Ta She g ^ ^ :^ ^.—Customs'
Examiner; 9 b.

316.— Shubi-K'o Ffiif^ SzB Ta She ^ ^ ^ g :^ ^.—
Customs' Deputy Examiner; unelassed.

317.— KwAN Ta She H ^ jgg.- Customs' Examiner;
unelassed.

318. — Ho Po So 29 {3 J^- — River Police Inspector; unelassed.
Coll. des. Ho T'ing fSl tf.

31 9. — YiH Cn^fiNG ^ ^. — Postmaster ; unelassed.

320.— Chah Kwan ||^ §. — Sluice Keeper; unelassed.

321.-»KiBN Ejao UJ :gJ5. — Police Inspector in a Prefecture;
unelassed. iV.-B. — This office no longer exists.

322.— Tso TsA ^ JS.— Petty officials. Assistant Magistrates,
Secretaries to Prefect, and the like, belonging to the eighth rank,
are designated tso; whilst minor officials, of the ninth rank, and
those unelassed, such as Jail Warden, etc,, are designated tea.
(See No. 288.)

323.— HiOH ChSng H Igj;.- Provincial Director of Education
or Literary Chancellor. Off. des. Hioh Yuan ^ J^ ; Coll. des,
Hioh T'ai ^^; lit des. Win Tsung ^J ^j and Tuh Hioh She
ChS^ ^^ if. Full official title is TH-tuh Hioh Yuan % %
» ^. A special appointment, usually filled by officials of high
literary degrees who leave Peking for three years to serve in this
capacity. They preside at the prefectural examinations, and give
the degree of siu ta^ai^ which admits to the triennial competition for
the M'jin degree. (See Part IX, No. 469.)

40 ' PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION.

324. — Hai Kwan Kien-tuh ilH H £ if. — Superintendent
of Customs. %X){ various ranks. At Canton, a special officer,
appointed from the Imperial Household, bears the designation
Yoeh Hai Kwan Pu J^ JIK H {fS^ or Superintendent of Customs
for the province of Kwangtung. Is commonly designated by
Europeans as the "Hoppo," a term the derivation of which is
unknown. At Foochow, the Manchu General-in-Chief fills a
similar position. At the Custom House of Hwai-ngan, a special
appointment is likewise made, the three functionaries in question
being regarded as special purveyors for the Court. Elsewhere,
the office is usually filled by a Taotai, in addition to his territorial
duties. In such case he receives the designation Kwan Too j^ ^.
Within recent years, a special "Customs' Taotai'' has been
established at Tientsin, without territorial jurisdiction.

325. — Chih Tsao m^ Jg. — Superintendent of an Imperial
Manufactory, at Nanking, Soochow, or Hangchow. Specially
appointed, from the Imperial Household, to superintend the manu-
facture and despatch of silk textile fabrics and other requisites for
the use of the Imperial Court.

326.— Ho Tung Ho Tao Tsung-tuh |^ ^ fjj ^M tt-—
Director-General of the Yellow River; 2 a. Ordinary designation
Ho Tao Tsung tuh. The duties attached to this post have in recent
years become much reduced in importance, the Governors of
Honan and Shantung having become the active agents in the con-
servation of the river embankment works. A military division,
under the orders of the Director-General, is designated the Ho Piao
|i|f |g. It numbers at present about 1,700 rank and file, having
its head quarters at Tsi-ning Chow, in Shantung.

327.— Ts^AO YtjN Tsung-tuh ff % (g ft.— Director-General
of the Grain Transport ; 2 b.

This functionary has the grain transportation system, for the
conveyance of the rice from the southern provinces to Peking,
under his control. The Wei^^ and /Sb J^, or first and second
class transport-stations, connected with this system, have a special
military organization of their own. Of late years, the introduc-

PART III.— PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION. i 41

tion of steam-shipping, concurrently with the progressive difficulties
of navigation on the YUn Ho ^ ||J, or Grand Canal, has led to
the larger portion of the grain despatched to Peking being forwarded
by sea to Tientsin. Of the Hai YUn ^ S, or grain transport by
sea, a part is conducted by the steamers of the CJiao S/iang Kuh
ffl ^ J§> the so-called "China Merchants' Sfceam-ship Company,"
which was established as a Government institution in 1872.

328. — T*u KwAN i ff. — Administrators of ** Native"
Districts.

The portions of the provinces of Kwangsi and Kweichow which
are inhabited exclusively by the Miao-tsze "jJSf ^ and other
aboriginal tribes are in some cases organized as Districts or
Departments under hereditary Magistrates, the representatives of
ancient independent chiefs. They are generically designated as
above; but the ruler of each district or department bears the
ordinary Chinese official title, with the character t'u prefixed, as
i jj(|, and jt )Ss» ii Yunnan, four "native" prefectures, t'ufu
i jjf, are organized, with four t^u c/iow^ or "native" departments.
The province of Kwangsi has 26 "native" departments, and four
districts of the same class. The process of exchanging the status
of a tribe under the direct government of its hereditary chief or
magistrate for that of the ordinary Chinese population, or the
*' bestowal of rights of citizenship,'* is described by the phrase
kai t'u ioei liu Qfk db ft SK*

329. — T*u SzE i '3-— The Native Tribes j and their
Chieftains.

This is the designation applied in general to all the multi-
tudinous tribes of aborigines who overspread the southern and
western provinces, and occupy the border-land between China on
the one side and Annam, Laos, Burmah, and Tibet on the other.
The most widely distributed and important of these are the Miao
Tsze "jjjf ^ of Kwangsi, Kweichow, and Sze-ch'wan, the Lo-lo
^JH i^^^^W^ ^f Sze-chVan and Yunnan, and the Shans, who
occupy the southern and western portions of that province and

42 PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION.

the frontier lands beyond. This last-named race, the representa-
tives of a once powerful and still widely-spread nationality, whose
name (as known to Europeans through the Burmese) may be
traced in the Sien of Sien-Lo JS IB ^^ Siam, are considered by the
Chinese as the descendants of the people of Yiieh Shang j^ ^ of
whom their most ancient records make mention. The designation
attributed to them in Chinese literature is Lao Chwa ^ 3, in
which an afBniiy to the Laos of the Burmese and Siamese is
plainly apparent The Shans of the border-land between Yunnan
and Burmah term themselves, and are commonly known as, Pat I
JH 5^. Chinese official writers, however, describe them as Lao
Chwa, and the designation Pai I is applied in the description of
the tribes of Yunnan {Nan Man Che Ifif ^ ^, Book III, forming
part of the topography of that province), to the aborigines of the
Kwangsi frontier, who are distinguished as Jtan ^ and shuei i^
or Land, and Water, Pai I. The government of the semi-in-
dependent tribes in general is left in the hands of their hereditary
chieftains, upon whom high-sounding titles of various degrees are
bestowed, in accordance with a system introduced originally by
the Mongol conquerors of China. According to the size and
importance of the territory they rule over, these chieftains —
known to the Burmese, on the south-western frontier, by the title
of tsaubwa — are invested with different gradations of rank, as is
shewn in the following list :

330.— Che Hwei She Sze ft H ft ^; 3 a.

331.— SuAN Wei She Sze g gt ft S; 3 h.

332.— SuAN Pu She SzE g is ft 3; 4 b.

333.— Chad T*ao She Sze ^ fj ft Q; 5 b.

334.— Ngan Fa She SzE $ is 1^ ^; 5 b.

In each of the tribal Governments as above, subordinate ranks
are provided with the following titles:

T^UNG Che |^ ^ ; rank varying from 3 b to 6 a.
Fu She glj ft ; do. do. 4 b to 6 b.

K*iBN She ^ :^; do. do. 4 a to 7 a.

PART III. — PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION, 43

The following are the titles and ranks in a different class of
tribal government:

335.— Ts'iEN Hu -f- ^; 5 a,

336.— Fu Ts^iKN Hu gj ^ ^; 5 k

337.— PehHu-S ^; 6 a.

338. — Chiang Kwan Szb Chiang Ewan :g1^^fiff ; 6 a.

Fu Chiang Kwan SI :g ^ ; 7 a.

Chiang Ewan Sze Li Muh £frflSS ; unclassed.

44 PART IV. — GOVERNMENT OF PEKING.

PART IV.-GOVERNMENT OP PEKING.

339. — Fu Yin }^ ^. — Governor of (the Imperial Prefecture
of) S/iuti't'ien Fu Jij^ J^ jjjj, ue.y the region enclosing the imperial
eapital^^ a. Lit. des. King Chao ^ ^^. Beside the actual
Governor, there is a Governor Adjoint, or Kim Yin ^ 5^,
appointed from among the Presidents and Vice-Presidents of
Boards, who exercises a concun-ent authority.

840. — Fu Ch^^ng JjjSf 2g. — Vice-Governor of Shun-t^ien Fu;

4 a. Lit. des. Fu King Cliao glj ^ ^f^.

341.— Che Chung ^ tfi.— Sub-Prefect of Shun-i'ien Fu;

5 a.

^*^ In addition to the foregoing officials, the usual subordinate
ranks appertaining to a Prefecture are also represented within the
jurisdiction of Shun-t^ien Fu.

342.— Wu Gn'tm Yu She £ |^ ^ ft .—The Police Censors.
The city and suburbs of Peking are mapped out into five divisions,
termed the Wu Ch^Sng or Five Cities, viz., the centre, embracing
the neighbourhood of the Imperial Palace, and the North, South,
East, and West. (See Part II, No. 189). One Manchu and one
Chinese Censor is appointed to control the police and primary
judicial arrangements of the capital. The subordinate ranks are
as follows :

343.— Ping Ma Szb €he Hwbi ^ ^ W^ f?.— Police
Magistrate; 6 a. One to each of the five divisions of Peking.
Common des. Sze Kwan p[ ^. These officials exercise a primary
jurisdiction in judicial cases throughout the city and suburbs of
Peking.

344._PiNQ Ma Sze Fu Che Hwei |£ Jg ^ gl] }§■ ^.—
Assistant Police Magistrate; 7 b. One to each of the five divisions
of Peking. Common des. Fang Kwan j^ 1^.

845. — Li Muh |^ g. — Police-master and Jail-warden.

PART iV.-^GOViffiRNMENT OF PEKING. 45

346.— KiEi Tao T*ing ft Jf g|.— The Roadway Office.
The repair and maintenance of the streets of the outer (Chinese)
city of Peking; are, nominally, cared for by this department,
which is presided over by the police Censors. The preservation of
public order is also included among its duties.

347.— Pu KtjN YiNG ^ ^ g,— The Division of Gendar-
merie.

The police arrangements of the capital are conducted by the
TH^tuh Yamin £ fip ffi P^^ or Office of Gendarmerie, under which
the Fu Kan Ying, a force recruited from the Eight Banners (see
Part VI), is placed. The men of this force, numbering from
15,000 to 20,000, are distributed in squads at guard stations,
Kwcvti tHrtg 1^ i|g, throughout the city and suburbs. Judicial
cases in which Bannermen alone are litigants, are heard by this
office. Mixed Cases, between Bannermen and ordinary Chinese,
are dealt with by the police Censors. The men of the gendarmerie
are also charged with the duty of maintaining the roadways of the
city proper.

348.— Pu KiJN T'UNG Ling ^ ^ fiK ®.— General Com-
mandant of the Gendarmerie; 1 b. Has also the designation
TH-tufi Kill MSn San Pu Wu Ying Ji^^P^igJMSg officially
preceding his title as above, with reference to his command over
the Nine Gates of the city proper and of the Five Battalions of
Chinese troops forming the police of the city and its environs.
Hence his common appellation of Kiti M4n 'Pi-tuh ^ P3 JS S, or
General of the Nine Gates. The incumbent of the office is usually
also President or Vice-President of one of the Boards. The total
number of troops comprised within the Wu Ying, or SUn Pu Ying
JS if g, is officially reckoned at 4,000 mounted and 6,000 foot
soldiers. In reality, the force is much smaller.

349.— Tso and Yeo Yih Tsung Ping 2£ ^ R JB H-—
Police Provosts, or Lieutenant-Generals, senior and junior, of the
Gendarmerie; 2 a. Usually hold office also as Vice-Presidents of
Boards.

350.— Yih Yu % j^.— Deputy Provost; 3 a.

46 PART IV. — GOVERNMENT OF PEKING.

351.— Pang Pan Yih Yu fff Igl H J^.— Assistant Deputy
Provost; 3 b.

352.— HiEH Yij ^ ^.— Major of Police; 4 a.

353._Fu YiJ glj jH".— Captain of Police; 5 a.

354.— Pu KuN Hiao jp ^ igg.— Lieutenant of Police; 5 b.

355._Wei Shu Pu Kun Hiao # S ^ H :g.— Deputy
Lieutenant of Police; 6 a.

356.— Sin P'ao Tsung-Kwan ft 1S2 18 flf.— Controller of
the Alarm-signal guns; 4 a.

Gate Gtiarda:

357.— Ch^Sng MfeN Ling ^ H SS-— Captain of a Gate; 4b.

358. — MfeN Ts^iEN-TsuNG p^ ^ H.— Lieutenant of a Gate;
6 a.

359._CH^IiNG Men Li jig R g.— Clerk of a Gate; 7 a.

360.— TS^UNG WfeN MISN KlEN-TUH # ^K M S ff-—

Superintendents of the Customs and Octroi of Peking. A com-
mission consisting of one principal and one secondary High
Commissioner, appointed annually. The title borne by them is
derived from the fact that the principal office of the Collectorate
is situated near the Ts^ung Wen Gate (Ha-ta Men) of the city.
Out-stations are established in a cordon around Peking, ranging
to a distance of from ten to thirty miles.

361.— Tso and Yeo Yih Kibn-tuh 2£ :& R ffi '&.—
Superintendents of the Live-stock and House duty at Peking.
Two Commissioners, annually appointed, one each for the East and
West divisions of the city.

362.— Ts^ang Chiang ^ Jg.— The Peking Granaries.

These are controlled by a commission of two officers with the
rank of Vice-President of the Board of Revenue— hence called
Ta'ang Chiang She-lang j^ jj^ f^ J^, whose head quarters are at
T^ung Chow, the point at which the grain from the southern
provinces is landed. Their two principal subordinates are of the

PART IV. — GOVERNMENT OF PEKING. 47

rank of lang chung (see Part II, No. 163) with the title Tso Liang
T^ing ^ ^ Hg, or Grain Super\dsors of the Board of Revenue.

363.— Pao Ts^uan Kuh Jg % jg.— The Coinage department
of the Board of Revenue.

364.— Pao Yuan Kuh Jf }g ^.— The Coinage department
of the Board of Works.

The above are the two departments at which the copper cash
constituting the currency recognized by the Chinese Government
is minted. In each case, the department is placed under the
supervision of one of the two junior Vice-Presidents of the Board,
with the addition of the words Kien Li Ts^ien Fa T^ang She \Vu
^aiiiab^^gfto liis title. (See Part 11, No. 161.)

48 PART V. — THE THREE MANCHURIAN PROVINCES.

PART V.-THE THREE MANCHURIAN PROVINCES.

365.— The Tung San Sh^ng JH H ^Mj or Tliree Eastern
provinces, comprise the territory originally inhabited by the Manchu
race, which is divided into tliree provinces. The two most northerly
of these, Heh-lung Kiang or T'sitsUiar — the Amur, and Kiririj
are organized upon a purely military basis, whilst FSttg-t^ien^ the
southernmost, including tlie Manchu capital, named ShSng King
or Moukden, approximates more closely in its form of administra-
tion to that of the eighteen provinces of China Proper. The system
of government of the province of Fevg-t^ienj indeed, was remodelled
in 1876, bringing it even more nearly than before into harmony
with that of the rest of China. Its distinctive mark in the past
was the control exercised by the Five local Boards, corresponding
to the Boards of Revenue, Ceremonies, War, Punishments, and
Works, at Peking, over the affairs of the province in general.
The authority heretofore vested in these boards has now been con-
centrated in the hands of the Military Governor, to whom the
position and title of a Governor-General (see Tsung-tuhj Part III,
No. 273) have been accorded.

366.— Province of F^ng-tien 3^ 5^.— Commonly called
ShSng King jS 3sC> f^om the Chinese designation of its capital
city, otherwise known as Moukden, from the name it bears in the
Manchu language.

367.— TsiANG KxjN JH 3|.— Military Governor; 1 b. (Since
1876 invested with the title and attributes of a provincial Governor-
General or Tmng-iuh).

368.— Fu Yin }^ ^.— Civil Governor (with title and attri-
butes of a provincial Governor or SUn Fu).

369.— Fu Ch^Iing /jj ^.— Civil Vice-Governor and ex officio
Provincial Literary Examiner.

370.— Fu Tu-T^UNG gtj ^ DJ.— Military Deputy- Lieutenant-
Governor ; 2 a. Commanding various divisions of the province.

PART V. — THE THREE MANCHURIAI^ PROVINCES. 49

371.— Cn^feNG Show-tij jj| «5P j®.— Military Commandant;
3 a. An appointment held under the Military Lieutenant-Governorgf,
in command of the garrisons of the various prefectural and depart-
mental cities.

372.— Fang Show-yu jSjjjf ^ J|^. — Military Commandant of
the second class; 4 a. .

*

*

^ In addition to the functionaries of the provincial Govern-
ment enumerated above, there exist at Moukden, furthermore,
counterparts (on a reduced scale) of the Boards of Revenue,
Ceremonies, War, Punishment, and Works as established at Peking,
each presided over by a Vice-President who acts, in his own
particular department, as a colleague of the Military Governor.

373. — Province of Kirin •§ ^ ig. — Governed by a
Tsiang Kiln or Military Governor (see No. 367), with Military
Deputy-Lieutenant-Governors (see No. 370) at the following points :

i. Kirin Ula {city of Kirin) "^ ^ j^ ^'
ii. Ningutd ^ ifr ^.
iii. PetunS fg ^ ff^.

iv. Sansing ^ jjj.

V. Altch'ukha M Jil % ^•

A small number of officials of the lower civilian and literary
ranks are also stationed in different parts of the province.

374. — Province of Heh-lung Kiang H || ZC i^^ or
TsiTSiHAR. Governed by a Tsiang Kiln or Military Governor
(as above), with Military Deputy-Lieutenant-Governors at the
following points :

i. He/i'lung Kiang ^ H Hi*
ii. Mergum S fi ^•
iii. Tsitsiliar ^ ^ i^ IS*

There is, in addition, a civil administration at the town of
Hu-lan THng If |g ®.

375. — Ta Sheng Jf 43^. — Hunters; a designation applied
to the indigenous population of certain districts in the two above-

50 PART V. — THE THREE MANCHURIAN PROVINCES,

named provinces^ who are held bound to pay certain tribute of
animals or ftirs.

376. — Yko Muh ^ ig^. — Nomads. The wandering tribes
existing within the limits of Manchuria are placed under the
superintendence of the following officials: —

377.— Yeo Muh CnfeNG YtJ gf ft IE JH".— Chief Super-
intendent of Nomads; 7 a.

378.— Yeo Muh Fu Yu J^ ft gi| |^.— Assistant do. do.;
7 b.

PART VI. — THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION. 51

PART VI -THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION.

379.— Pa K*i A IR— The Eight Banners.

The armj specially appertaining to the Mancha dynasty is
known as the Eight Banners, from the organization introduced by
the early sovereigns of the reigning family. These Banners are
distinguished by the colours enumerated below, and are farther
divided into two classes, viz., the Three Superior and the Five
Inferior Banners, as follows :

i. Bordered Yellow ft |iE 1 ± H ft
ii. Plain . „ jE it f The Three
iii. „ White jE & J Superior Banners.

iv. Bordered „ Jl 6

T£Jft

The Five
Inferior Banners.

V. Plain Red ]£ ^

vi. Bordered „ M^LY
vii. Plain Blue j£ ]g

viii. Bordered „ fSk^

^ The nationalities composing the Banner force are three in

number, viz., Manchu, Mongolian, and Chinese, the latter, known
as Han KUn ^ ^, consisting in the descendants of those natives
of northern China who joined the Manchu invaders during the
period of their contest with the Ming dynasty in the early part

y of the seventeenth century. Each nationality bears the Manchu
designation of Ku-sai (written Kn-shan @ jlj); and as a complete
division of each nationality exists under the colour of each of the
Banners enumerated above, there are in fact 24 banners, or eight

^ KH divided into three Ku-sai each. Under one or other of these
divisions all living Manchus, and all descendants of the Mongolian
and Chinese soldiery of the Conquest, are enrolled. Each banner
of the Manchu and Mongolian nationalities, again, is divided
into a nui kH f^ ]Q^ and a wai kH ^ ]^, t.e., an Inner and
Outer division. The inner division is composed of the so-called
paO'i Q ^, from the Manchu 6o-/, signifying a bondservant, who

52 PABT VT. — THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION.

are especially bound to render suit and service. The pao-i of the
three Superior Banners appertain to the JViii Wu Fu or Imperial
Household (see Part I, No. 62), whilst those of the remaining five
Banners are attached to the various Princely houses or Wang Fu
(see Part I, No. 31).
^ The Btoners constitute, in fact, tba population of Peking,

with offshoots in various provincial garrisons; and a certain number
of the adult males of the force receive pay as meipbers of one or
other of the military corps into which they have, from time to time,
been organized, in addition to the pittance they receive as soldiers
, of the Banner.* The General Head Quarter Office of the Banners
is designated the Chih Nim KH {| ^ j^^, to which one Tu t^ung (see
below) from each Banner is annually appointed to do duty. All
correspondence relating to the Banner force as a whole* passes
through this office. The official organization of the Banners is as
follows: •

380. — ^Tu-T^UNG Hi SKI. ^Lieutenant-General; 1 b. One to
each hjaai or national division of a Banner. (For the Tu T^ung
acting as Military Lieutenant-Governors, see Part XI, No. 548.)

381 . — Fu Tu-T^UNG gl| 9 ig^. — Deputy Lieutenant-General ;

2 a* (For the Fu Tu T^ung of the provincial Banner garrisons,
see infrdj No. 427.)

382.— YiN Wu Ts^AN^LiNG ^ K ^ fi.— Adjutant-General;

3 a. Two to each of the twenty-four Banners (except the Mongo-
lian, which have but one). Selected from the Colonels (see
below.)

383.— HiAO-K^i Ts<AN-LiNG @ H j£^ f|.— Colonel; 3 a.
Has the general civil control over a sub-division or Cha-la ^ IK,
of which there are five in each of the Manchu and Han Kiin
Banners. In the Mongolian Banners there are but two of these
1sub-di visions.

♦ For a complete analysis of the various forms of the Banner organization,
with all details of the composition and pay of the forces, as shewn on paper, see
The Army of the Chinese Empire, a series of articles by T. F. Wade (Sir T. F, Wade,
E.C.B.)) in the Chine$e Bepontory for May, June, and July, 1851, Vol. ZX.

PART VI. — THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION. 53

384.— Fu HiAO-K*i Ts^an-ling glJlgJB ^®[.— Lieutenant-
Colonel; 4 a. One to each Cha-la or sub-division (as above).

385.— YiN-Wu Chang-king ^ K jt ^.—Adjutant; 5 b.
Conducts the civil correspondence of the Banner. Although less
in degree of rank than the Uo^ling (see below) this officer is con-
sidered as filling the higher post, and is promoted from it to the rank
of lieutenant-colonel — No. 384. The term eltang-king is a corruption
of the Manchu word chan^yiuy signifying an "assistant." (See
Part II, No. 133.)

886.— Wei Yin-Wu Chang-king ^ EP Sf S ^.—Assistant
Adjutant. Appointed from the grade of Hiao KH Hiao.

887. — Tso-LING ^ ^. — Captain ; 4 a. Of this rank there
are, in each Manchu banner, from 70 to 80 officers, and in each of
the Han-kiin Banners, from 30 to 40, according to the strength of
the corps. Acting under the immediate command of the ts^an-ling
(see No. 383) of the eha~la to which he belongs, the tso-ling is
specially charged with the control of some 70 to 100 of the house-
holds of the Banner. The Uo-ling hold in some cases their
appointments by hereditary right, either as Hiin Kiu JH ^ or as
She Kwan ^ ^ Tso-ling, Those who become entitled to appoint-
ment by various processes of selection are designated Kung Chung
^ i(t, FSn Kwan ^ 9, and Lun Kwan ||| ^ Tao-ling.

388.— Pan Ko Tso-ling ^ <B ^ 0[.— Half Tso-ling. A
title formerly in use but now almost, if not entirely, obsolete, to
designate the captains of companies numbering less than one
hundred strong.

389.— HiAO-K^i Hiao jg £f :R.— Lieutenant ; 6 a. Officers
of this grade are drawn upon to fill the post of Pu Kan Hiao (see
Part IV, No. 354). Their post in the Banner is then filled by a
"deputy," of lower rank, with the following title:

390.— Wbi Shu Hiao-K^i Hiao ^ S £g if :K.— Sub^
lieutenant; 8 b. Promoted from the post of pi/i-t^ieh-she (see
Partll, No. 181). .

391 . — LiNG-TS^ui f^fH' — Corporal (non-commissioned officer).
Acts under the orders of Hiao Ki Hiao.

64 PART VI. — ^THE MAKCHU MILITARY OEOANIZATIOI^.

392.— Ma Kia Jg fp .— .(Manch. UheaAi.) Pirat-class Private
Sol4ierf receivlqg 3 Tls. per men^m.

SQS.'-^Ao-TTRH-PU 50ClB ^S* — (Manch. Orbo.) Second-class
Private Soldier, receiving 2 Tls. per mensem. , Also called Luh-
Kioh Ping Jj ^ ^, or chevaux de frise bearer, from his traditional
duty on parade and in action. In the Han KUn Banners only.

394. — ^Yang Yu Ping ^ "^ &.-. — Supernumeraries or juniors,
awaiting appointment to the position of second or first class private,
as v^a9cies occur. In all the Banners.

395. — HiEN San ^ fj;.— (Manch. Suld,) B^nn^riPQU ^t
large, without position or pay.

Paid Forces of tlm banner Organization:

The various corps organized from the Banner population of
Peking are as follows?

396.— Hu Kt^N YiNG H H g.— The Guards' Division.
Common des. Ta Ting ^ § (the main division). This force was
organized during the early wars of the Manchu sovereigns, with
the designation Pa-ya-ld^ which was exchanged in A-P. 1660 for
its Chinese equivalent now in use. Admission into the corps,
which is estimated as numbering some 3,000 to 4,000 strong^ con-
stituted until lately the special ambition of the great mass of the
Bannermen of Peking, to whom it secured the advantages of
"substantial addition to their pay and prospects of promotion in a
degree which, until the institution of the SMn Kl Ying (see infrd^
No. 415), was attainable by comparatively few. From the place
assigned to the two main sections of the Division, on the right
and left wings of the Banner force when drawn up for review or
action, the title "Flank Division" has been given to this corps
by Sir T. F. Wade in his article on the Chinese army already
frequently referred to. The principal duty assigned to the corps,
at the same time^ is that of fomishing detachments of guards for
the Imperial palace. It consists of eight divisions corresponding
to the eight Banners, i^ach Ojf yf\?idk is compmnded by a T^ung-Ung
(see below) :

397. —Hu KtJK T^TOQ Ling 8| 9 H ^.—Captain-General;

2 a. This office is U3u*lly filled by Prijioes or pther dignitaries of
the Court.

899.— Hu KtjN Ts^i^-LiNQ i| ^ S ffi.— Lieut -Colonel;

3 a.

399.— Hu KuN HiAO ^ !|| ^.-r-Lieutenant; 6 ^

400.— Wei Shu Hu JLui? Hiaq ^ H^ Q $ :g^.— Sub-
lieutenant; 8 b.

401 ,— Ts^iEN F%G YiNQ |J ^ ^.-^Y^Pgnard Divisiop.

*' The Vanguard or leading division is composed entirely of
M9,nchus or Mongols of the whole Eight Banners, chosen in the
proportion of two to every tsoMng; it is divided into right and
left wings, each of which is under a t^ung-ling^^ ( The Army of
tlie Chinese Empire^ see Chinese Repository, Vol. XX, p. 264.)

r

402.— Tso YiH Ts'iEN F^NG T^uNG-LiNG and Yeq Yih
Ts'iEN Feng T'ung-ling &:Q % M M^ ®* — Commandants
of the Left and Right 'Wing of the Vanguard division ; 2 a.

403.— Ts^^EN Feng She Wei jj ^ f^ g|,— Ipciperial QuardsT
man of th^ Vanguard division ; 4 a.

404,^Wi|i 85U Ts^tpr nm &m Wei # * tJ gi ^ Ig.-^

Deputy dp. do,; ^ b.

405.-rrTa^iEjr FliNa Hiao |i^ fSt iK'—^Sergeant of the
Vaaguard division; 6 a (and Wd Shu do. do.; B b).

406.— Pu KuN YiNG ^ H g.— (See Govermnent of PeUng^
Part IV, No. 347).

407.— Hwo K^i YiNG 9i S g.— The Artillery and Musketry
.Divi«ion. Ggnalstjng in Nui and Wai^ of Inner and Outer
Divisions, of which the former -is stationed at Peking and the latter
at Lan^tien Chiang or <Jie Indigo Manufactory, a short distance
from Y%n Ming Yuan. The Ifui Hwo KH Ying is formed from
the bo'i of the different Banners (see supra. No. 379). At the
PPQ^Q* day this mtl^^j like the " light Division " (see infra j No. 4 1 1 )
has but a nominal exjgtence»

408.^TsuNp T*yNQ H j|J..-^General Commandant.

\

56 PART VL-^THi: MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION.

409. — YiH Chang ^ g.— Brigadier ; 3 a.
41 0. — YiNG TsuNG {gf H* — Commandant.
The remaining ranks as in the Hu KUn Ying.

411.— KiEN Jul YiNG fl fSt S- — Light Division. Banks as
above. Quartered near the Hiang Shan Yuan ^ |ll ^, or Tsing
I Yuan j^JiCH? *h® Imperial Hunting Park, north-west of Peking.

41 2.— HiANG Tao Ch^u 8f 51 JS-— The Guides. A depart-
ment which fiimishes the outriders, etc, for imperial progresses.

41 3. — Hu Ts^iANG YiNG J^ It g. — The marksmen for tiger
hunts.

414.— Shang Yij Pei Yung Ch^u J: U flS M ft-— The
Imperial Hunting Department.

415.— Sh6n Ki Ying H H flf.— The Peking Field Force.

This force, comprising the 61ite of the Banner troops of the
capital, was organized, in 1862, as a result of the disastrous
campaign of 1860, with a view to provide for the future defence
of the centre of government. The title given to the force was
borrowed from the history of the Ming dynasty, when, on the first
introduction of fire-arms in the 15th century, the designation
SUn Ki or ''divine mechanism'' was attributed to the new engines
of warfare. The Field Force numbers some 18,000 or 20,000 men,
/ including cavalry, artillery, and rifle regiments, aU of whom are

drilled and manoeuvred after the European fashion. The instruc-
tion of these troops is based upon the lessons in European drill
which were given to detachments sent to Tientsin for the purpose
of studying under British instructors in 1862-1865.

41 6.— Yuan MiNg YttAN Pa K'l H ^ H A K-— The Yuan
Ming Division of the Banner Force.

This is a corps composed of representatives of all the eight
Banners, forming a sedentary garrison in the vicinity of the
Summer Palace.

, 41 7.— Chu Fang ft gjf • — The Manchu Garrisons outsidb
Peking. Divided into three classes, as follows: —

418.— a. Ki Fu Chu Fang ^ |f ft gjjjf.— The. garrisons

;

PART VI. — THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION, 57

of the "military cordon," consisting of 25 cities in the province
of Chihli, surrounding Peking.* The nine garrisons nearest to
the capital are termed the Siao Kiu Ch^u h\% JL^^ or Nine Small
Posts. The organization of these garrisons is the same with that
of the Peking Banners, of which they are offshoots.

41 9.-6. Ling Ts^in Chu Fang I^ jglg gjf.— The garrisons
of the Imperial Mausolea. In connection with these, also offshoots
of the Peking Banners, are the following ranks : —

420. — TsuNG KwAN H ^. — Comptroller-General; 3 a.
Has the chief command of the guard of the Mausolea.
421. — ^YiH Chang ^ ^. — Brigadier; 4 a.
422. — SzB KuNG-TSiANG rJ X g. — Oversccr of Works; 4 a!
423.— Fang Yu Kf |j.— Captain; 5 a.

424.— Tsi SzB kuNG YiNG KWAJF ^ JE ft H '&•—
Commissary of Sacrifices ; 6 a.

425.— «. KoH ShSng Chu Fang # ig S Kf •— The garrisons
stationed in the provinces, to wit, at Sui-yiian, Kwei-hwa, and
T'ai-yuan Fu in Shandy at Ts^ng-chow Fu and Teh Chow in
Shantung^ at K*ai-fBng Fu in Honan, at Nanking and King K^ow
in Kiangsuy at Hangchow Fu and Cha-p^u in CMh-kiang, at
Foochow in Fuhkien, at Canton in Kwangtung^ at Ch*eng-tu Fu
in Sze-ch^wariy at King-chow Fu in Hupehj at Si-ngan Fu in
Sliensiy and at Ninghia, Liangchow, and Chwang-liang T4ng in
Kansuhy beside the garrisons of Urumtsi, Barkul, Ku-ch^Sng, and
Turfan, included within the Kansuh jurisdiction. f

426.— TsiANG KuN ^ ^.— Manchu General-in-Chief (or
"Tartar General"); 1 b. Lit. des. Ta Yuan Jung ^ % 3^-

Note. — The Tsiang Kan exercising territorial jurisdiction in
Manchuria and elsewhere are described as Military Governors.
(See Part V, No. 367). The Tsiang KUn in the Chinese provinces
ranks with, but before, the Governor-General, although exercising
no authority except over the small Banner force at the head of
which he stscnds. In Kwangtung and Sze-ch'wan he has a

* See Chinese depository, Vol. XX, p. 314.

f See Chinese Repository, Vol. XX, p. 318 et seq.

58 PART VI.— THE MANCHU MILITARY ORGANIZATION.

bominal degree of control over the Ohinese foroes in addition to
his own ; but this is not in practice exercised.

427.— Fu Tu-T^UNG gij ^ ]gj.— Manchu Brigade General;
2 a. Lit. des. Ta T^ung-che ^fz^M* ^^^ ^^ ®^^^ provincial
command. For the Fu Tu-t^ung of the Peking Banner organization
see sttprdj No. 881.

428. — HiEH-LiNG % ^.—Colonel; 3 b. One to each
provincial Banner.

429. — Tso-LiNG ^ ^. — Major ; 4 a.

{N.B. — A position appreciably higher than that of the tso-ling
of the Peking banners, although with equivalent nominal rank.)

430. — Fang-yu g{f 1^. — Captain; 5 a.

431.— HiAO-K*i HiAO |g H :g.— Lieutenant; 5 b.

432.— Wei Shu Hiao-K^i Hiao ^ ^^ SS *S?.— Sub-
lieutenant; 8 b.

433.— Ts^iEN-FfiNG Ijf jf.— Sergeant.

434. — LiNG-Ts*ui fS, HI- — Corporal.

435. — Shwei She Ying ^ ggi g. — Marine Battalion of the
Banner Forces; for river service in the various provincial garrisons.

436. — Wei Ch'ang S J|[. — The Imperial Hunting Reserves.
A vast tract of country, several hundreds of miles in extent, in the
region of Jeh-ho, set apart in the early years of the reigning
dynasty as a preserve for large game and as a place for the exercise
of the Imperial troops in the art of war as exemplified in the chase.
(See Part XI, No. 548.) The guards of the Hunting Reserves
are placed under the command of the following officers :—

437._Wei Chiang Tsung Kwan H ^ ift If.— Chief
Comptroller of the Hunting Grounds ; 3 a.

438.--WEt Ch'ang Tie Chang S ;^ ^ ^—Brigadier of
the Hunting Grounds ; 4 a.

PART VII. — THE CHINESE ARMY. 59

PART VIL-THE CHINESE ARMY.

439.— LuH YiNG ^ g.— The Chinese provincial Forces;
designated as the Army of the Green Standard. These troops
are divided into Luh Lu H jjj, or Land Forces, and Shuei She
:^ fiS^ or Marine. The ranks and designations are identical in
both divisions. The land forces, numbering in all some 400,000
to 500,000 men, are an absolutely effete organization, discharging
the duties of sedentary garrisons and local constabulary, but
superseded, on all occasions when active service is required, by
the so-called '* braves" — yung ^, or irregulars, enlisted and
discharged according to circumstances. The officers of these
irregular troops are usually invested with rank as "expectants"
of appointments to posts in the regular service. The main bulk
of the provincial forces are commanded by a General-in-Chief or
TH'tuh (see below), and bear the designation of TH Piao J§ i^,
or TH-tufis command. A smaller body of men, to whom the
duty of garrisoning the provincial capital is specially assigned,
is known as the Fu Piao ^ g, being the command allotted to
the provincial Governor; and a Governor- General has in addition
a third distinct command annexed to his functions, this division
receiving consequently the title of Tuh Piao § ^. The forces
under the command of the General-in-Chief are divided into
Chen-Piao |J| i^, or Brigades, and these again into Hieh ^, or
territorial regiments. The Hieh are divided into Ying g, bat-
talions, and the t/ing is farther subdivided into a right and left
Shao jf^', or patrol. The f/ing is commanded, as a rule, by an
officer of the rank of Major (see infrdj No. 444), although in
some cases the commanding officer is only a first or second Captain.
The shao is commanded by a tsHen-tsung or lieutenant, beneath
whom the force is distributed in either two or four sze ^, corre-
sponding to the sUn J^, or military posts established in different
localities, at the head of each of which a pa-tsung "or sergeant is
placed. As has already been stated above (see Part III, Nos.

60 PART VII. — THE CHINESE ARMY.

326 and 327) the Directors-General of the Yellow River and of the
Grain Transport have each a separate military organization under
their command designated, respectively, the Ho Piao fij ^ and
Ts^ao Puzo iff S* The division under the orders of the Director
of the Grain Transport has the duty of garrisoning and guarding
the stations along the line of the grain transportation service at
which the squadrons of junks are successively loaded, despatched,
and discharged in effecting the conveyance of the "tribute rice"
to Peking. These stations are designated wei ^ and so J^,
according to the class to which they belong; and the officials in
charge at these points, ranking as ahow^pei (second captain) and
ta^ien-isujig (lieutenant), have special designations such as aJiaw yU
«5P ^, "on service for garrison duty,*' f^ ling yiin fg ^, "charged
with the conduct of the grain squadrons," etc., prefixed to the titles
of their rank. In the river-guard squadron which has been
organized of late year's for the patrol of the Yangtsze, under the
name of Chiang Kiang Shuei She Ting ^ SC bfC 6$ §> forming a
distinct command, the aze of the established land forces are repre-
sented by tui |§|t, or gunboat companies. In other respects, the titles
employed in this organization are the same with those of the regular
army, which are as follows : —

440. — T^i TUH jg 'If. — Provincial Commander-in-Chief, or
General-in-Chief; 1 b. Common des. tH-fai ^ •§ ; Epist. style,

hnn m^ ^ H- "

441. — TsUNG-PiNQ H ^.-—Brigade General; 2 a. Common
des. CMn-i^ai SR -^. Lit des. Tsung Jung ^ 3^; Epist des.
Ta Tsung^-che :f; H ff •

442.— Fu-TSIANQ g)J JRf. — Colonel; 2 b. Lit des. Fu Jung
gl| 3^; Common des. Hieh^t^ai ^ ■^.

443. — Ts^AN-TSiANG ^ JRp. — Lieutenant-Coloncl ; 3 a. Lit.
des. Ts^an Jung ^ 5^; Common des. Ts^an Fu ^ J^. The
Lieutenant-Colonel acting as Commandant of a Fu Piao or
Governor's Brigade is colloquially designated Ta THng ^ 10.

444.— Yeo-Ki ^ y. — Major; 3 b. Lit des. Yeo Jung
M ^ 9 Common des. Yeo Fii^ ]^.

445. — Tu-SZB ^ 3.— First Captain; 4 a. Lit. des. Tu
KwSn IP Hg.

PART Vn. — THE CHINESE ARMY. 61

446.— Show-pet «gp fl|.— Second Captain; 5 b. Common
des. Show Fu If ^.

447._Ts^iEN-TsuNG ^ j||.— Lieutenant; 6 a. Lit. des.
Ts^ien Jung ^ 3^ ; Common des. Tsung Yeh ^ ^.

448.— Pa-tsung ^ H.— Sergeant; 7 a. Common des.
Fu Yeh glj |g.

449. — Wai-wei Ts*ien-tsung 9^^^ ift.— -Second Sergeant
8a.

450. — Wai-wei Pa-tsung Jfr ^ JC H- — Corporal; 9 a.

451. — NGfeH-WAi Wai-wei S 9f% (ll* ^.— Lance-Corporal ;
9 b.

452. — YiNG TsuNG g H. — Commandant. This title is given
to the officers in command of special bodies of troops, such as the
Manchu contingents employed in Sungaria, and the irregulars or
"braves," chwang yung ^ ^, who have superseded the regular
army organization for purposes of active service, together with the
divisions or contingents of these irregulars which have been subjected
to drill and furnished with arms on the European model. These
are ordinarily designated lien kiln |f[ ^, a term which may be
translated as "field force."

453. — Chung KiJN »}» ^. — Adjutant or Military Secretary.
This post is filled by an officer of the rank of Colonel, Lieutenant-
colonel, Major, or first or second Captain, according to the position
of the authority under whose orders it is established. The officers
who serve as Adjutants to Governors- General and Governors are,
respectively, the commandants of the Governor-Generars and the
Governor's brigades (see suprdy No. 439). In the general araiy
organization, each commanding officer, down to the rank of major,
has an officer of the rank immediately below him as his adjutant,
except in the case of the General-in-Chief, who makes his own
selection for the post.

62 PART Vni. — HEREDITARY RANKS,

/-"

PART VIII.-HEREDITARY RANKS, TITLES OP HONOUR,

AND DECORATIONS.

454. — TsioH Yin |$ $. — Hereditary Banes.

The existing Chinese system of conferring patents of nobility
and honorary titles is linked by an unbroken chain of descent
with the history of the feudal states of the sixth century before
Christ, perpetuating in its nomenclature, on the one hand, the
titles of the semi-independent Princes of that era, and, on the
other, the names of official degrees which have ceased for many
centuries to exist in practical operation. Inasmuch, however, as
the feudal system has scarcely at any period shewn symptoms of
revival since it was laid low by She Hwang Ti in the 3rd century
B.C., the titles now conferred are not to be regarded as other
than official distinctions of a peculiar class, and cannot rightly be
considered as bestowing aristocratic position or privilege in the
European sense. The nine degrees of nobility, indeed, which are
conferred at the present day, and which are either heritable within
certain limits — site siJi jft ^ — or hereditary for ever, — she sVi wang
^ ^* "K fi S § — ^^® granted exclusively as rewards for military
services. The titles from the highest to the third degree, as set
forth in the following table, are designated Ch^ao PHn j^ |{p, or
" excelling rank " : —

455. — She Tsioh •{£ ||. — Hereditary Nobility.

RANKS.

Of each of these five ranks, which are some-
times rendered in English by the titles duke,
marquis, earl, viscount, and baron, there are
y three classes or degrees. To the titles of the first,
second, and third ranks, laudatory (kia ming
jft^) are appended, significative of the special
services by which the rank has been earned,
vi. ICing Ch^e Tu-yiX H i$ iP M«
vii. K'i Tu ri2 jg i 1^.

i. Kung ^

ii. How j^

iii. Fell i(x

iv. Tsze ^

V. Nan 15

TITLES OF HONOUR, AND DECORATIONS. 63

viii. YUn KH r« g H ^.

ix. NgSn KH Yu ,g, jg ^.

All the above titles, the ninth excepted, are hereditary during
a specified number of lives, ranging from 26 for a Kung of the
first class to 1 for a Yan KH Yu,

The lower titles, beginning with No. 6, have occasionally the
degree next above them "annexed*' {Kien ^), the bearer being
thus enabled to rank "with, but after," possessors of the title
immediately preceding.

Any one of the above titles may be conferred posthumously
{tsing ^) on ofiicers killed in battle, and thus become hereditary.

Beside this, a form of reward for meritorious public servants
is provided in the shape of hereditary official rank bestowed upon
the sons, grandsons, younger brothers, or nephews, with due regard
to seniority, of the person whom it is thus seen fit to distinguish.
This form of reward is termed Nahi Yin J@, ^. By a special
enactm^t, moreover, officials whp may lose their lives at sea or
on any of the inner waters whilst engaged in the public service,
are entitled to receive posthumous titles of honour according to
their degrees of rank, and official rank is furthermore bestowed
upon the eldest son of any such individual. This is designated
Nan Yin ||| ]^ (hereditary distinction conferred as a reward for
suffering in the public service).

456.— FliNG TsMg ^ H.— Titles of Honour.

The system of conferring titles of honour is one of the most
frequent forms of reward for merit or service, or of Imperial
bounty on occasions of rejoicing. These titles may either be
conferred — aJww |g — upon an official in person, or bestowed —
feng ^ — upon his wife, or his parents or grandparents, whilst
still living, or, lastly, they may be granted as a posthumous
distinction — taing ^ — to his deceased progenitors. The patents
by which these titles are conferred are designated Kao Ming |§ ^
for all ranks from the 1st to the 5th inclusive, and Ch^e Ming j^ ^
for all the inferior ranks. The following are the titles conferred
upon civilian functionaries or their connections, in the various
degrees of rank : —

64 PART VIII. — HEREDITARY RANKS,

Title of Functionary. Wife's Title.

1 a. Kwang Luh Ta Fu *i»:fc*] — 55 * A

1 b. Yung Luh Ta Fu S5fi*^ ) ^»* ^'^^ ^" •^^^•

2 a. Taze Ch^g Ta Fu Sflgtlfc*]. — i5 * A

2 b. T'ung FSng Ta Fu 5i*:fc^) Urh FHn Fu Jen.

3 a. r^wn(7 7 Ta Fu 5i%^*) Jli A

3 b. Chung I Ta Fu t^Wi^^) Shuh Jen.

4 a. Chung Hien TaFu +3R:fc*l M A

4 b. a^ao I Ta Fu |a«:fc*) ^""S' «^^^

5 a. F^g Ching TaFu H^}^^^) !£ A

5 b. FSng Chih Ta Fu *|iL**]/ JSn.

6 a. a^% m Lang ^ ^ &^\ ^ A

6 b. Ju Lin Lang • fl| ^ fiB ) ^?<3in Jin.

7 a. TF^ Zfn Lang 'iC W ^\ 81 A

7 b. Ch'ing She Lang ^ ft $^] Ju Jin.

8 a. /Sm ChUi Lang Ht M &^\ A £ HI A

8 b. Siu Chih TsoLang ifH^ifPa F'in Ju Jin.

9 a. r% 5A« Za«y a ft J^) ^d'p 81 A

9 b. Ting Site TsoLang Sft ^j^J ) Kiu FHn Ju Jin. '

Note. — Officials of the class of Li Yuan ^ P, i.«., such as
have gained admission into the public service, by examination,
from among the ranks of the clerks, shu pan ^ H^, in the Govern-
ment Boards at Peking, may receive the following titles of
honour: —

6 a. Saan Tih Lang Jg (g J^.

7 a. SUan I Lang ^ V^ $^.

The titles exhibited in the foregoing list are set forth in
all historical State papers and family records, on funeral cards,
ancestral tablets, and tombstones. They are also frequently
displayed on ornamental boards placed over the entrances to
dwelling-houses. The patents . (referred to above) are inscribed
on long scrolls of damasked silk, woven in five colours, with
figures of the phoenix in relief, upon which the particulars of

TITLES OF HONOUR, AlTD DECORATIONS. , 65

the grant are inscribed saccessively in the Chinese and Manchu
languages.

Military officials receive similar patents conferring honorary
titles of a martial character. The first and second degrees of rank
are invested with the title tsiang kUn ^ ^, to which appropriate
epithets are prefixed, whilst the lower degrees receive the titles
Tu Yn $Si ]^, K}i Yu J|f JH", and Hiax> Yu ^ ^ with similar
prefixes.

457» — Shanq Kung % ^. — Distinctions for Merit.

Although rewards for distinguished service, or marks of
Imperial favour, the conception of which resembles in some degree
that of the European system of Boyal or national Orders and
medals of distinction, are to be found in China, nothing in the
shape of an actual Order of Merit, approximating to th6 European
type, has been adopted by the Chinese Government. In Japan,
on the contrary, as is well known, an Order of the European kind
was instituted in 1875, with the designation HUn Ting Shang P^ai
W^ ^ H ^ ^^^ '^^ various classes of decoration. The term
kUn p^ai ^ j[$ was at the same time selected to denote the medals
which it was decreed should be awarded for military services.
Isolated distinctions* have indeed been conferred in China on
foreigners of various nationalities, principally for services rendered
in the command of drilled troops during the Taiping rebellion, and
subsequently in the collection of the Customs' revenue, which are
known, with reference to the European term "star," by the
designation pao sing ^ £; but as these are bestowed, for the
most part, by provincial authorities, and without the sanction of
any established rule or recognized statutes, such as are required to
constitute what is commonly known as an "Order," the badges
thus conferred can scarcely be regarded as having a real value as
authentic marks of distinction. The Imperial decorations for merit
established under the reigning dynasty are as follows : —

458. — HiNG KwA fj ^.— The Eiding-cape.

This distinction, the most coveted form of reward for military

PART VIII. — HEREDITARY RANKS,

services, is better known as the Hwang Ma Kwa XJ[§^ or Tellow
Riding Jacket, although this is but one form of the privileged style
of dress. According to the Imperial regulation, the Cape, which
is worn only when in personal attendance upon the sovereign in
the field, or upon journeys, is of the colour of the Banner to which
the Princes, nobles, or other members of the Banner force upon
whom it is conferred, may belong. Officers of the Body-guard and
Ministers of the Presence are, however, entitled to wear a yellow
cape, irrespectively of their Banner: and in general, at the present
day, the Yellow Riding Jacket is the form in which the distinction
is commonly bestowed. It has been awarded to two Europeans,
to Lieutenant-Colonel Gordon, R.E., for his services in contributing
to the defeat of the Taiping rebels in Kiangsu, and to M. Prosper
Giquel, for his labours in establishing the Arsenal at Foochow,
coupled with previous military services.

In this connection may also be noted the privilege of " riding
within the precincts of the Imperial Palace*' — Taze Kin Ch'Sng
niii k^i ma fl^ ^ ^ ^ M ^ — ^^^ bestowal of which is termed
ahang ch^ao ma ^ ]||] j^. This is an honorary distinction, fre-
quently conferred upon eminent public functionaries, who become
thus entitled to proceed on horseback, instead of on foot, for some
distance within the outer gateways of the Palace when summoned
to an audience.

459. — Ling Che ^ ^. — The Feather, or Plume.

The principal form of distinction for public service under the
reigning dynasty. It is classed in different degrees as follows: —

460.— A. K'uNG TsiOH Ling JL ^ fiH-— The Peacock
Feather.

This decoration is arranged in the following classes: —

461.— i. San Yen Hwa-ling H 8ft ?E ^•— The Three-
Eyed Peacock Feather — a distinction conferred only upon Imperial
princes or nobles of the higher degrees, or for the most signal
military achievements.

462. — ii. Shwang Yen Hwa-liNq H 8ft ?B ^- — The Double-
Eyed Peacock Feather — conferred upon dignitaries of intermediate
rank or degree of merit.

TITLES OF HONOUR, AND DECORATIONS. 67

463.— iii. Tan Yen Hwa-ling M^^ ^.— The Single-
Eyed Peacock Feather (commonly called Hwa-ling ^ ^ alone).
This distinction is bestowed as an ordinary form of reward for
public service, and during the last few decades has been indis-
criminately obtainable by purchase.

464.— B Lan Ling ]g ^.— The Blue Plume, colloquially
termed, from its glossy blue-black tint, Lao-kwa Ling^ or the
Crow Feather. This distinction is attributed by regulation to the
rank and file of the Imperial guards (see No. 98), and is conferred
as a reward for services upon officials below the sixth degree of
rank: It is not to be confounded with the sable-tail tiao wei U J8
(often erroneously termed fox-tail) badge which soldiers are
entitled to wear when employed on active service. This badge is
stated to have been introduced, originally, as a part of the uniform
worn on the Imperial hunting expeditions. It is now commonly
worn by all soldiers as an addition to their unifoi^.

465. — Pa-t'u-lu E» H #• — The Bat'uru Distinction.

The Military distinction called in Chinese Pa-t^u-lu (a repre-
sentation of the Manchu word bdt^uru^ signifying "brave") is an
institution dating from the early years of the present dynasty,
and is conferred solely for active service in the field. It consti-
tutes an order of merit partaking of some of the characteristics of
the French Ligion dlionneur ; but its special feature of difierence
from a European order consists in the fact that it has no outward
mark of decoration to be worn by its possessor, in. the place
of which there can only be reckoned the distinguishing word
(or title) which is assigned to each recipient on the bestowal of
the order. These specific titles may be either Manchu, Mongolian,
or Chinese, the Manchu being considered the most honourable.
Under this system an officer upon whom the distinction is con-
ferred might receive the designation YVi Yung Pa-t^u-lu |jS H
^ B i^, or "Bat^uru with the title Magnanimous Brave," and
so forth. The title carries with it the right to wear the peacock-
feather (see No. 463), although it seldom happens at the present
day that the peacock-feather, lavishly awarded as this decoration
has been of late years, is not obtained previously to the bestowa

68 PABT Vni. — HBBEDITABY BANKS, &C.

of the Bdt^uru; and the allowances of the bearer, when employed
on active service, are considerably enhanced in virtue of his
possession of the title. The Bdt'uru has been conferred upon at
least one European, Mr. W. Mesny, a native of Jersey, for services
rendered in the province of Kwei-chow.

466.— KuNG P'ai 3^ m.— The Soldibb's Medal.

This is an oblong plate of thin silver, having the character
Shang Jjd (reward) embossed upon it, which is bestowed at reviews
and inspections upon meritorious soldiers.

PABT IX.— EXAHINATIOlTS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. 69

PART IX.-EXAMZNATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES.

467. — K^AO She ^ ((. — The Chinese system of competition
for civil and military degrees, which famish successful candidates
with a passport to the public service, is organized in three principal
gradations, under the following names: Hiang She ^ fi(, the
Provincial Examinations, held as a rule triennially, in the autumn,
followed by the Hwei She ^ SC^ or Metropolitan Examination, held
at Peking in the ensuing spring, and Tien She B ^, or Palace
Examination, at which the final award of degrees is obtained.
Special examinations, granted in celebration of auspicious public
events, are denominated Ngin She J9; |S(, or Examinations by
Imperial Grace, in addition to the regular triennial occasions.
The ^^ classes'' of graduates at the Hiang She and Hwei She respec-
tively are termed h^o ^ and hia ^, whence the meaning of ^^ literary
graduation " has come to be applied to these terms combined in a
single phrase. The following are the ranks successively obtained
under this all-important system : —

468.— TAXING Sheng j| ^.—Student.

The students of each district throughout the Empire undergo
a series of preliminary examinations, before the Magistrate of their
own district, the Prefect within whose jurisdiction they are placed^
and the Literary Chancellor of the province, before qualifying for
entrance at the triennial provincial competition. A certificate of
merit from the District Magistrate enables the candidate for
literary honours to term himself ^^un^ sheng ^ which may be regarded
as equivalent to Student. The candidate who is ranked first on
the Magistrate's list has the distinguishing title of Ngan SIiow jf^ *|^.
A person before competing for the right to term himself t'ung shSng
is designated, in complimentary parlance, tsiln siu ^ ^, which
may be rendered "man of promise."

469.— Siu Ts*ai H :^. — Licentiate.

In every second year the Literary Chancellor of each pro-

70 PART IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES.

•

vince completes a tour of his domain, holding examinations —
ngan-lin ^ E£ — at the different Prefectural cities. Candidates
who are successful on these occasions obtain their first degree, and
become entitled siu-ts^ai, which may be rendered Licentiate. The
highest on the list receives in this category, likewise, the title
ngan-sliow (see above). The general literary and official desig-
nation for the siu'-ta^ai class is sheng-yUan ^ g. Two categories
are formed by the division of the successful candidates into those of
the "established list/' termed fu sheng ^ ^, and those of the
"supplementary list," or tseng sheng jl§ ^, the first class repre-
senting the number of degrees accorded by the ancient regulations,
and the second those who are admitted under more recent ordinances,
extending, for one reason or another, the number of degrees
obtainable.

470. — Lin Shan ShI&ng ]j| J^ ^.—Salaried Licentiate.

A limited number of siu-ts^ai are annually admitted to the
position of tin sli^g ^ ^, or lin shan slieng, so called from the
stipends {kao hwo ^ iPj) which they receive from govemmerit {"unds.

471. — KuNG ShSng % ^.—Senior Licentiate.

In addition to the privilege described above, a farther series
of advantages remain open to the licentiates who fail to obtain this
position or to pass for a degree at the provincial examinations.
Special examinations, granted as an act of imperial grace (see suprdy
No. 467), enable a certain number otsiu-ts^ai to attain the position
of ngin kung-slieng ,§, Jf 4. An examination recurring once in
twelve years gives access to the grade of pa kung-sheng fjt^ &9
which qualifies for admission to the metropolitan competition. Simple
seniority admits a certain number of unsalaried licentiates to the
grades of fu kung-sheng glj ^ ^, and sui kung-shSng ^ 3( ^ ;
whilst for meritorious achievements at periodical examinations a
certain number receive the title of yeo kung-sk^g fl| ^ ^. After
the degree of fu sheng (see No. 469) has been reached, that of
fu kung-shing P§ 9 £ or accessory Senior Licentiate may be
obtained by purchase.

PART IX. — fiXAMINATIOlTS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. 71

472. — Ku-jfiN 9( A. — Provincial (Ku-j^n) Graduate.

This degree, which forms the first substantial reward of a
student's ambition, is conferred at the Hiang Slie (see suprdy
No. 467). Lit. des. Hiao-lien ^ jjj^. Licentiates of one or other
of the primary degrees described above assemble at the provincial
capital in the eighth moon of every third year (or more frequently
on special occasions offering), to compete under the auspices of
the Examiners appointed from Peking (see in/rdy No. 479). Of
some ten to twelve thousand competitors, commonly described as
slie tsze i •? ^^ scholars, barely 300 at the utmost are admitted
to degrees, the number of which is limited by regulation. The
successful graduates, whose names appear upon the official list,
termed the Lung Hu Pang H J^ 1^, are said to have chung ku
if> jfi — attained their degree — and are thenceforward known as
ku-jSuy or ''promoted men." Their next step is to proceed to the
capital, early in the following year, to compete at the Metropolitan
Examination for the superior degrees (see below). Li addition
to the actual list of graduates, about forty of the candidates, whose
performances are adjudged as not inferior in merit to those of their
selected competitors, are admitted to a secondary list, entitled
fupang gi| ^ — a description oi proximd acceasit — by which means
their names obtain the honour of publicity although they have
failed to secure the degree competed for. The highest on the list
of graduates receives the honorary title of kiei yUan ^ yQ; and
the five individuals next in order are entitled king kw^ei ^ ^.
For the encouragement of study, it is farther provided that ku-jen
graduates who shall have attended three successive examinations —
san ¥o H ff — for the tsin she degree (see below), without actually
passing, shall be allowed to appear before a Commission of Selection,
Ta T^iao ^j^ ^, which is appointed triennially after each metro-
politan examination. On this occasion, a limited number of
appointments to the rank of District Magistrate, and some minor
offices at Peking, together with sundry nominations to the rank of
Kiao Kwan ^ '^ ov district officers of instruction (see Part III,
Nos. 303-306), are conferred upon the most approved candidates.

72 PART IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DBGRBBS.

KH'jin graduates are entitled by regulation to an official
entertainment at which an ode of the Book of Poetry, entitled the
Luh Ming |g l]^, should be chanted. The banquet is accordingly
known by this name. As a special mark of respect for old age, it
is farther ordained that a kii-jen graduate who shall reach the sixtieth
anniversary of his examination, thus completing an entire cycle
according to the Chinese reckoning, shall "repair a second time to
the Luh Ming banquet" — Cheung fu Luh Ming fi ^ ^ ^ —
for which purpose certain ceremonies and imperial donations are
prescribed.

The kil'jen degree is also bestowed as an honorary reward
upon candidates above the age of 80 or of 90, who have presented
themselves at repeated examinations without passing, and who
comply with certain specified requirements.

473. — TsiN She jH i. — Metropolitan Graduate.

This degree is obtained at Peking, by triennial (or special)
competition among the ku-jen assembled from the provinces, to
the number of about six thousand, out of whom some 325 to 350
obtain a successful result. The provincial graduates, or ku taze
^ -^F, after assembling at the capital early in the Spring following
the examinations at which they have severally passed, are required
to undergo a test examination, fu «Ae J| gj, which qualifies
them for admission to the Hwei She ^ |^, or metropolitan
competition. The graduates who prove successful at this examina-
tion become entitled kwig she ^ j; during the period which
still intervenes between the publication of the lists and their final
competition. This takes place within the precincts of the Imperial
Palace itself, and is hence called Tien She ^ gj, or Palace Exa-
mination. The essays written on this occasion are scrutinized
and classified by a special Commission of Imperial Eevisers,
entitled Yiieh Kuan Ta Ch^Sn B9 ^ ;^ S* According to their
order of merit, as ascertained by this crowning test, the graduates
now receive, usually in the proportion of about one in three,
admission into the ranks of the Hanlin, or College of scholars
par excellence (see Part II, No. 201). The highest in order of merit
are distinguished by various titles, as seb forth below; and the

PABT IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES. 73

remainder are classed as tsin sJie of three classes ( — kia ^ , see
below). Some days after the publication of these awards, a fresh
competition, entitled Ch^ao K'ao ^ ^, or the Court Examination,
is held in the Palace, a theme selected by the Emperor himself
being given out for the compositions required. The graduates
are subsequently admitted to audience, whereupon a certain
number belonging to the second and third classes of the graduates
are honoured with the title shu hi slie, or Bachelor of the Hanlin
(see Part II, No. 210); the remainder, as idn she^ receive appoint-
ments either to provincial ofEces, as District Magistrates in ex-
pectancy, or to minor ranks in connection with the Six Boards at
Peking.

474. — Chwang Yuait ^ jj;.— Optimus.

The title conferred at the Palace Examination (see above)
on the most approved scholar among the competing metropolitan-
graduates. The recipient of this, the highest literary award,
becomes entitled to enter upon the rank of Han^lin Yuan Siu Chwan
(see Part II, No. 207). To have produced a chwang yUan is
rejoiced in as a lasting honour by the disti;ict whence the fortimate
candidate proceeds.

475.— Pang Yen Ijj^ B|. — Secundus.

The title conferred upon the graduate ranked second in order
of merit at the Palace Examination (see suprdy No. 473).

476.— T^AN HwA Jg ^!g.— Tebtius.

The candidate who secures this distinctive title, together with
the Pang Yen (see above), becomes invested with the rank of
Pkn Siu (see Part II, No. 208). The two together constitute, in
company with the Chwang-yUanj the first class, yih kia — ^, of
the year, and are designated tsin-she kih ti jH it !?S^ SIf*

477. — Oh^wan Lu ^ ]||. — QuAETus.

This title is bestowed upon the candidate graduating at the
head of the second class, urh kia JH ^, at the Palace Examina-
tion. The remainder of this class take rank as Shu Ki Site (see
Part II, No. 210). They are designated tem-sJie eh^u ah&n j^ j;
|{{ $[[. The designation i^ung tein'-ahe ch^u ehen |3 jft db ttl ^ ^^

74 PART IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES.

bestowed upon the graduates of the third and last class^ of whom
the highest take rank as Shu Ki She and the remainder simply as
tsin she.

^^*^ Examinations for military degrees follow precisely th«
same course and give access to the same degrees as those for the
civil career, with the character wu (military) prefixed. Examina-
tions are likewise held for Manchus qualifying as interpreters
{/an-yih ^ gj) in the language of their race, and who receive
degrees as in the ordinary literary course.

478.— HiAO Lien Fang ChIing ^ ^ # jE- — Worthies of
Literature.

This is an honorary title bestowed by Imperial grace on
obscure scholars who are specially recommended by provincial
authorities for examination and the bestowal of official rank, in
conformity with ancient precedent.

The following are the most important among the titles employed
in connection with the Literary Examinations: —

479.— ChSng K^ao Kwan jE ^ 'g. — Chief Examiner; the
president specially appointed for each provincial or metropolitan
examination. For the provincial examinations, Vice-Presidents
of the Metropolitan Boards or Courts are selected; whilst for the
examinations at Peking, a Grand Secretary or President of a Board
is named as Chief Examiner. Lit. des. Ta Taung Ts^ai :K; IB ^ ;
Common des. Ta Chu JS^ao 5!C i ^•

480. — Fu K^AO Kwan g|| ^ ^ ^Assistant Examiner;

appointed to assist the functionary above named. Lit. des. Fu
Tmng Ts^ai M M Ml Common des. Fu Chu K'ao gjl i ^.

481 .— T^UNG K*A0 Kwan (^ ^ ^.—Associate Examiners ;
Common des. Fang Kwan '^ ^.

482.— Nui KiEN She Kwan p) £ £{ 1^. — Lispectors.

488.— Nui Show Chang Kwan ft Jlfc S ^.—Deputy
Examiners.

The above classes of officials constitute tlie Nui lAen ft jH, or
Inner Precinct of the Examinations. The Wai Lien ^ |j|, or
Outer Precinct, comprises the following list of functionaries: —

PABT IX. — EXAMINATIONS AND OFFICIAL DEQREEB. 75

484, — KiBN LiN KwAN ^ (g ^. — Supervisor. This office
is filled in the provinces by the Governor, who is said on
this occasion to juh wei \ JfUj^j or "confine himself within the
precincts," i.e., of the Examination Hall. At Peking the office
is filled by a functionary selected from among the Directors of the
various Courts. Lit. des. Che Kung Ku ^ ]| 9^.

485.— T^i-TiAO • KwAN H IH ^.—Proctor; the official
charged with the general supervision and control of the candidates
during the examination.

486.— Wai Kien-she KwaN 9h |S SC §. — Comptroller of
the Outer Precinct.

487. — Wai Show Chang Kwan ^ IK J|E 'g.— Receiver of
the Essays.

488.— Mi FfiNG Kwan ^ f^ 'g.— Sealer of the Essays.
489.— T^liNG LuH Kwan 0^1^.— Transcriber of the Essays.

490.— Tui TuH Kwan 3^ H 'g.— Comparer of the Essays.

491.— Yin Kuan Kwan pp § 'g.— Stamper of the Essays.

The five above-named offices are filled by appointments from
among Secretaries of the Boards who have themselves taken their
degree.

Beside the above, a number of additional posts exist in
connection with the police and internal management of the
Examination Halls, to which special appointments are made, as in
the foregoing instances, at each recurring period.

491a. — Shan Chang jIj ^. — President of a College.

This title is bestowed upon the officials who ar^ employed to
superintend the studies prosecuted by advanced scholars at the
various provincial capitals, usually those who have already acquired
the hutr-jen degree, with a view to qualifying for the higher examina-
tions. The institutions at which these studies are pursued are
known as Shu YUan ^ J^, which may be rendered by the
term ^^ College," and each has farther a distinctive name derived
either from the locality in which it is situated or from some

76 PART IX. — EXAMINATIOJrS AND OFFICIAL DEGREES.

classical quotation. The Colleges, of which one or more are to be
found at each provincial capital, where they represent the position
assigned at Peking to the Kwoh TszeKien (see Part II, No. 247),
are in most cases endowed from the provincial revenues, and
certain stipends are paid to the graduates who frequent them as
well as to the tutors who are employed in their instruction. The
chief superintendents, or shan change are frequently retired officials
of high rank. By a decree of the Emperor K'ien Lung, which,
however, is usually ignored in practice, the designation ahan chang
was ordered to be exchanged for Yoan chang |^ ^j as a more
dignified epithet than that popularly in use.

PART X. — ^BUDDHISM AND TAOISM. 77

PART X.-BUDDHISM AND TAOISM.

The Chinese official system, which allows no condition of the
body politic to remain, in theory at least, unprovided with means
for its control, includes among its administrative rules a complete
scheme of ecclesiastical gradations of rank and authority in con-
nection with the priesthood of both the Buddhist religion and the
Taoist order. Whilst refraining from interference with the internal
organization of either of these bodies, or with the admission of
members to their ranks, the imperial Institutes provide a frame-
work in harmony with the all-pervading official system, to be
grafted upon the hierarchy as it is found in either case developed
according to its own traditional rules. The complicated and costly
organization of the Tibetan form of Buddhism, which has been
created by the emperors of the reigning dynasty, is a subject
entirely distinct from the more ancient and orthodox type which
constitutes the religion par excellence of the Chinese people; and
the Lamaist hierarchy is left aside in this place, to be separately
dealt with in Part XII below. For the control of the Buddhist
priesthood, official ranks are established according to the following
scale:

492.— SfiNG LuH SzB ff ^ -g.— Superior.

Two office-bearers invested with this title are appointed in
each district, department, and prefecture throughout the Empire,
as principal and deputy, the chief being distinguished as C/ieng
Yin IE HI J or principal, and the second in order as Fu Yin g|J fp>
or deputy, holder of the seal. The appointment is made by the
local authority by selection from among the leading abbots {fang
cliang ')J ft) of monasteries, and is submitted for approval, when
made by subordinate officials, to the provincial government. The
superior thus appointed acts as the medium of communication
between the secular authorities and the priesthood, for whose
general good conduct he is considered responsible, and over whom,
in cases of litigation among themselves, he exercises certain judicial

78 PART X. — BUDDHISM AND TAOISM,

powers. The Sing Luh Sze of the metropolitan district is a person
enjoying much consideration and wielding no small amount of
authority; but the position elsewhere is attended with little respect.
Distinctive titles are held by the incumbents of the office, according
to the rank of the territorial division to which they belong. These
titles are as follows :

493. — SfiNG Kang ff iM. — Superior of the Buddhist priest-
hood in a Fu or prefecture. The full title is Seng Kang Sze Tu
Kang f^ IH 'i^ tf IN* The secondary degree of the ninth rank is
assigned to holders of this office.

494. — SfiNG ChSng If J£. — Superior of the Buddhist priest-
hood in a Chow or department.

495. — SfeNG HwEi ff ^.—Superior of the Buddhist priest-
hood in a Hien or district

Beside the foregoing, a certain number of ranks are provided
by regulation, apparently for bestowal by way of distinction upon
deserving members of the priesthood. They are but little, if at
all, in use at the present day. The following is the list of these
ranks as officially recognized : —

496.— Tso and Yeo Shan She £ ^ ft -jft.— Preceptor
(principal and secondary) ; 6 a.

497.— Tso and Yeo Shan Kuo 2£ ^ W JR.— Preacher
(principal and secondary) ; 6 b.

498.— Tso and Yeo Kiang King £ ^ 91 jg.— Expositor
(principal and secondary) ; 8 a.

499.— Tso and Yeo Kioh I &7^9t H-— Clerk (principal
and secondary) ; 8 b.

For the control of the Taoist priesthood a similar organization
is provided, centreing in the patriarch or hereditary chief of the
order, the Heavenly Master Chang, or Cliafig T^ien She ^JifSHj
in whose person the spirit of one of the earliest of the Taoist
mystics is reputed to reside (see I7ie Chinese Reader's Manualj
p. 11). The following are the ranks of the official Taoist
hierarchy: —

500.— Tag Luh Sze ^ ^ ^.—Superior. An appoint-

PART X. — BUDDHISM Al^D TAOISM. 79

ment corresponding in all respects with that of the Superior of the
Buddhist order (see mpra^ No. 492).

501. — Tag Ki ^ J£. — Superior of the Taoist priesthood in
a Fu or prefecture; 9 b. The full title is Tao Ki Sze Too Ki

502. — Tag CHfeNG JS J£. — Superior of the Taoist priesthood
in a CAow or department.

503. — Tag Hwei ^ ^. — Superior of the Buddhist priest-
hood in a Hien or district.

In addition to the foregoing, a number of offices, with corre-
sponding rank according to the Chinese official scale, are established
with reference to the Taoist priests who are connected with the
State temples devoted to the worship of the powers of Nature.
Hiese are as follows: —

504.— TsG and Yeg Cheng Yih & 7^ j£ —.—Director
(principal and secondary) ; 6 a.

505.— TsG and Yeg Yen Fah 2E © fS }§|.— Hierophant
(principal and secondary); 6 b. Employed in performing the
stated acts of sacrifice in the Imperial temples.

506. — TsG^and Yeg Che Ling 2£ ^ S ft.— Thaumaturgist
(principal and secondary); 8 a. These "miracle-workers" are
employed at the State temples in services specially intended as acts
of propitiation in times of flood or drought. A corresponding
office is filled by priests designated Yin Yang Cheng Shuh ^|S1E%
in the temples dedicated to the presiding spirit (^Ch'eng Hwang
Miao j^ (£ id) of prefectural cities.

507. — TsG and Yeg Che I ^ ^ 31 tl- — Priest of the lowest
order (principal and secondary) ; 8 b^

80 PART XI.— MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN.

PART XI.-MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN.

508. — Wai Fan Jr[> j|f. — The Dependencies of the
Empire.

Under the institutes of the reigning dynasty, the bulk of the
tribes composing the Mongolian nationality are primarily divided
into two great classes, the Niii ^ and Wai ^ Mung Ku HI *]£?,
or the Inner and the Outer Mongols. Both are placed under the
control of the Li Fan Yuan or Mongolian Superintendency (see
Part II, No. 183), together with the governments of the region of
Hi, which includes Eastern Turkestan or Kashgaria, and of Tibet.
Inner Mongolia is that portion of the Mongol territory which
borders upon China Proper and Manchuria, along the whole of the
north-eastern and eastern frontier. Outer Mongolia encloses the
Inner region with a vast semi-circular sweep, and is itself con-
terminous on the west and north with the territories of the Russian
Empire. The Inner Mongols are otherwise known as those of the
Forty-nine Banners, from the military divisions in which they are
grouped. They represent, with the Ch^ahar tribe, which forms a
separate organization (see infrciy No. 526), the sections of the
Mongol race which were foremost in submitting to the Manchii
invaders of China in the first half of the seventeenth century.
The Outer Mongols comprise the Khalkha and Kalmuk (or Eleuth)
and other tribes, which will be found treated of below (see infrd^
No. 516).

509.— Nui Mdng-ku ft ^ igf. — The Inner Mongols.
The Forty-nine Banners of the Inner Mongols at the present day
are directly descended from the organization adopted by the
successors of Chinghiz Khan during their tenure of power as
masters of the greater part of Asia, and continued by their
descendants after the expulsion of the Yiian dynasty from the
throne of China. The Mongols of the fourteenth century were
organized in six grand divisions, known as the Djirgughan Tumen,
or Six Ten Thousands, which again were arrayed in two sections,

PART XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN.

81

termed the right and left wings, the left occupying the eastern,
and the right the western, half of the Mongolian territory.
Apparently in imitation of this earlier system of organization, the
Banners of the Inner Mongols are divided into six meng Jg, or
leagues (Mong. chogolgdn), which embrace the whole of the
twenty-four pu ^, or tribes (Mong. aimak §^ 311 j£) under which
they are distributed. Before proceeding to elucidate the titles of
the hereditary or appointed rulers of the Mongol tribes, a list of the
various administrative divisions must be given. The transliteration
of their respective names, as represented in Chinese characters, has
been undertaken with special, although not invariable, deference
to the authority of I. J. Schmidt, the translator of the chronicle
of Ssanang Setzen, whose labours form, with the writings of
D'Ohsson, the basis of the recent compilation entitled History of
the Mongols; by Henry H. Howorth^ London^ 1876 — a work
which may be usefully consulted for detailed information with
reference to the Mongol tribes.

510. — I. Chbrim League

1. Khorch^n tribe

2. Djalaid

3. Turbet

4. Qhorlos

511. — II. Chosot'u League

5. Kharach^n tribe

6. T'umed „

51 2. — III. Chad Uda League

7. Ao-khan tribe

8. Naiman

9. Barin

10. Djarud „

11. Aru Khorch4n ,,

12. Ongniod ,,

13. Keshikhteng „

14. Khalkha (one tribe
from the left wing)

J)

j>

>?

>>

)j

eM?f:ai-

mn^-

6 banners.

fLiE#-

1 banner.

*fc W f6 !|#.

1 »

Mmmn-

2 banners.

J$^il9§-

^mm ii^-

3 ,,

±mm-

2 „

03 ,i H 91-

^w-

1 banner.

^M-

1 „

E W'

2 banners.

JLnfift-

2 „

mm^m\i^-

2 „

^"^A^-

1 banner.

%i\'%m-

1 „

^filS$£S-

1 »

82 PART XI.— MONGQLIA AND TURKESTAN.

51 3.— IV. SiLiNGHOL League ^ # IR ^ £.

15. Uchumuch^in tribe J^ 3|c iS iJS- 2 banners.

16. Khaochid n JS i # 2 „

17. Sunid » iS ^ ift 2 „

18. Abaga » P^ E I® 2 „

19. Abaganar „ P^f B «& Ift li 2 „
514.— V. Ulan Ch^ap League ^M^^ H-

20. Sze TszePuLoh tribe H •? ^ i^ or
Durban Keuked „ 1 banner.

21. Mow Mingan „ :3g ^ ^ 1 „

22. Urad » ,i 8H # 3 banners.

23. Khalkha (one tribe 1$ 1| ^ :& H 1 banner.

from the right wing)
51 5.— VI. Ikh Chao League ^ jg BS 5|.

24. Ordos (Ortous) tribe fP If ^ ^ 7 banners.

With the tribe of the Ordos there are amalsramated certain
fragments of the Teamed tribe, occupying the region adjacent to
Kwei Hwa Ch^eng, lying to the north-east of the Great Bend of
the Yellow River.

51 6. — Wai Mung-ku ^ ^ igf . — The Outer Mongols.

Outer Mongolia comprises the territory of the Khalkhas,
extending from the north-eastern termination of the desert of Gobi
(Sha-mo ^ ^) to the borders of Russian Siberia, and of the
Kalmuks, or Western Mongols, otherwise known as Eleuths or
Oelot.

517. — Khalkha V^ ^ ^.— The Khalkha nation comprises
the tribes of the Mongols which, owing probably to their greater
remoteness, maintained to a much later date than the tribes of
the Forty-nine Banners, described above, their independence of
the Manchu sovereignty. They constitute four great pu ^ or
tribes, three of which are still governed by hereditary rulers bear-
ing the title Khan (in Chinese, ^Han ff). The number of banners
distributed among the four tribes is eighty-three, beside the two
banners which, as is shewn above (see Nos. 512 and 514) have
been incorporated with the Inner Mongols. By the addition of

FART ZI.— UOKOOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 83

two banners of Oelots and one of Khoits, the number of the
banners of the Khalkhas is brought up to 86 in alL The four
great divisions bear the following names :

i. The T^ushet^u Khanate ± IB ■ ff iS5 20 banners,
ii. The Tsetsen „ ¥ E tt flS 23 „

ill. The Dzassakt'u „ JL S 3£ ■ ff IC 18 „
iv. The Sain-noin tribe H ^ IS ffl ^ 22 „

The town of Urga, or K*u-lun (Kurun) |^ |^, situated within
the territory of the T^ushet^u Khan, is the administrative centre
of the northern and eastern Khalkha tribes. It is the residence
of the Cheptsun Dampa Hut*ukht*u (see Part XII, No. 598), a
Lamaist dignitary of the most venerated order, through whose
spiritual influence the Chinese Imperial Agent (see in/rd. No. 556)
maintains his authority over the Khalkha chiefs. The Western
Khalkhas, i.e., the Dzassakt^u and Sain-noin tribes, are under the
rule of the Military Governor of Uliasut'ai (see i/j/Vd, No. 552).
A chain of frontier posts, known as K'a-Iun -^ j^ {Kanin, called
Caron, or Carou by a misprint, in the writings of the Jesuits of
the last century), runs along the border of the Khalkha territory,
where it adjoins the Russian possessions, and at each post a small
military colony under a chief having the title cliang king ;§[ tJC
(see Part VI, No. 385, and in/rd, No. 541) is established. The
line of frontier is marked by piles of stones, called ob6 ^ fH, and
the space intervening between two such frontier-marks is termed
by the Mongols sahu m ^. The khans of the Khalkhas testify
their allegiance to the Chinese sovereign by an annual presentation
of tribute, designated as the Kiu Feh ^ ^ or Nine White
[Animals], consisting of eight horses and a camel, all pure white
in colour.

Next in importance to the Khalkhas are the Kalmuks or
Western Mongols — Eleuths, etc. — bearing six tribal designations
as shewn below : —

518.— i. Oklot (Elbuth) jg # «r, or jg i^ #.— The
Kalmuks or Western Mongols.

The term Kalmuk (or Kalmuck) by which the Western

84 PABT XI. — ^MONGOLIA AITD TUBEXSTAK.

Mongols are known to European authors, is unknown to the
Chinese, who designate the leading tribes of this once powerful
division of the Mongols by the name given above. Several
derivations for the word Kalmuk have been suggested by different
authors, whose speculations are assembled by Howorth {Hist of
the Mongols, p. 497). In the word Oelot, which the French
missionary authors of the last century transcribed as Eleuth, the
Chinese themselves trace an obvious relationship with the Wa-la
%i 8H (Wara, or Oirad), the designation applied to the leading
tribe jsvith which the eariier sovereigns of the Ming dynasty
warred and negotiated. Having overspread the region north of
the T4en Shan, including the modern territory of Hi, the chieftains
of the Oelot tribes founded, early in the 17th century, a dominion
known as that of Sungar, or Dzungar fp |!§ 1^, which was
eventually shattered by the arms of the Emperor K'ang Hi, and
finally overthrown by the invasion of their territory (Sungaria) in
1757 by a Chinese and Manchu army despatched against them by
the emperor KMen Lung. During the period of its independent
existence, {lie Sungar nation was divided into four tribes, known
to the Chinese as the four Weirad ^j Pjp) ^ ( Mong. Durben
Oirad, said to signify the Four Allies) in which the perhaps
derivative sounds of the Oelot or Oirad form of designation may
clearly be recognized. Without entering here upon an enquiry
into the dispersion and gradual reassembly of the Oelot tribes, a
task more appropriately and fully dealt with elsewhere, the follow-
ing enumeration of the remaining divisions of the Kalmuk tribes
is proceeded with : —

519. — ii. TuRBET (Tourbeth) :H: ^ fjgf S#---A division of
the Kalmuks or Oelot, now organized in two chogolgdn or leagues
(see below).

520.— iii. TuRGUT (Tourgouth) Jfet W )! J^.— This large
division of the Kalmuks is declared by the celebrated Chinese
Minister of State, Sung Yiin, in his work (dated A.D. 1823) on
the Mongol tribes, to be identical with the Turbets (see above) and
to represent one of the four tribes or Wei rat of the Sungar nation
(see No. 518). The Turgut now form five c/u>golgdn or leagues.

PART XI. — MONGOLU AND TURKESTAN,

85

521. — iv. The Khoshoit ^ftHdif^. — A southern branch of the
Kalmuks, whose principal seat is in the neighbourhood of Kokonor,
although a part of them are found at present, constituting one
chogolgdn, on the north-eastern frontier of China.

522. — V. The Khoit j^ ^. — A small tribe associated with
the Khoshoit.

523.— vi. The Ch^oros ^ ^ ^.— The sixth and last of the
divisions of the Kalmuk tribes.

524.— Ts'iNG Hai Mung-ku iH f^ SIe tS*.— The Mongols
OF Kokonor.

The disintegration of the Western Mongols, as a result of
the wars of the last century with Tibet and China, has caused
repeated displacements to befall the various tribes, and has led
to their being distributed under several distinct jurisdictions.
Twenty-nine banners, all but one of which are of Kalmuk origin,
are now seated in the region of Kokonor and on the northern
borders of Tibet, in the territory anciently known as Tangut The
following is the list of the tribes of Kokonor, who ar§ placed under
the sway of the Imperial Controller General at Si-ning (see in/ra,
No. 562) :— , , ,

Khoshoit ../ ... ... ••• ... 21 banners.

1.

ii. Ch'oros
iii. Khoit
iv. Turgut
V. Khalkha

525. — Alashan Mung Ku pl ^
OF Alashan.

jj

1 banner.
4 banners.
1 banner.

|g "jSf. — The Mongols

These are the tribes settled in the region north of Ning-hia
in the province of Kansuh and along the Western Bend of the
Yellow River, extending as far as the western extremity of the
Great Wall and the desert of Gobi. They are Kalmuks by
descent. Four tribes, of those already enumerated above, have
formed offshoots in the region tributary to the Prince of Alashan
PjIIJe; HIK 2, constituting 3^ banners in all, distributed as follows :

86 PART XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN.

i. Si T^ao Oelot TS^ E^ #.— The Oelots of the Western
Bend of the Yellow River.

ii. EdsinS Turgut is $¥ IB ± W S ^.— The Turguts of
the river Edsine or Edsinei.

iii. Turret ij^ J^ i^ !|#. — A portion of the Turbet tribe.

iv. Khoshgit ft ^ !|f .—As above.

. 526. — Yeo Muh ^ 4Sl- — The Herdsmen Tribes.
Under this designation the Chinese ofHcially class the Mongol
tribes who are placed under the direct government of the high
authorities of the frontier, and especially the Ch'ahar, to whom
the territory lying in immediate proximity to the Great Wall, and
nearest to the imperial capital, was assigned after they had sub-
mitted themselves to the Manchu conquerors of China. Unlike
the Mongols of the Forty-nine Banners, they are denied the
privilege of being ruled by titular tsHn wang or Princes, but on
the other hand they are organized under eight Banners on the
same footing as the Manchu military forces. Their distinctive
title of yeo muh or "nomade herdsmen" is derived from the
interdict against engaging in agricultural pursuits, and their
restriction to the pasturage of flocks and herds, which was imposed
upon them by their new masters. Within their territory are
situated the imperial pasturages, or muh ch'ang tfy^ J^, upon which
the herds and flocks specially pertaining to the imperial house-
hold and the stud department are reared. A recent enumeration
Jaas given the number of about 100,000 horses, 7,000 camels,
200,000 sheep, and 12,000 horned cattle, upon these pasturages.
The following are the tribes coming under the category of the
nomade herdsmen.

527.— Ch^ahar ^ »& f|.— The Ch'ahar (or Ohakhar) tribe.
(See suprdj No. 526, and infrd^ No. 550.)

628.— Bargu E W if.— The Bargu tribe. This tribe
has been incorporated with the Ch^ahar, conjointly with whom,
and a portion of the Oelot and T^umed tribes, who have similarly
been annexed to the Ch^ahar, they are placed partly under the
control of the military Lieutenant-Governor residing at Kalgan

PART XI. — ^MONGOLIA AND TURKKSTAK. 87

(see tn/rd, No. 550) and partly under that of the military Lien-
tenant-Governor of Jeh-ho (see vafra^ No. 548).

529. — Uriakghai % |j| ji||. — The tribes of Urianghai or
Uriankai, the territory occupying the extreme north-west of the
Chinese dominions, now placed tinder the administration of the
Military Governor of Uliasutai (see tn/ra, No. 552).

530. — MiNGAD ^ |ig !($. — The Mingad, a small tribe of
nomades, occupying the region north-east of Uliasutai.

531. — Djakch'in ft B^ j;(j,.— The Djakch4n or Dzakhach^in
tribe, a remnant of the Sungar nation, associated with the fore-
going.

532. — ^Hasak B& m jg.— The Khassak (Cossack) or
Kirghis, identified by the Chinese with the K'ang-kii J^f J^ of
antiquity, and probably the same with the Kankal or Kankar of
western geographers. In 1757, the Khan of the Kirghis tendered
his allegiance to the sovereign of China, on the annexation of the
territory of Sungaria being completed. Sung Yiin, in the work
already quoted from, describes the region inhabited by the Kirghis
as bounded on the north by the Russian possessions, and on the
south-west by the land of the Buruts ^ ^ ^ (known as the
black Kirghis). They own allegiance, he farther observes, to 20
6t^ok fP fS ]£ or chieftains. Their rulers are known as 'jpi (pih)
Jt, which he identifies with the term f|§ ^ or beg.

533.— BuRiAT a^ ffi iH ^.— The Buriat Mongols subject to
Russia. Simg Yiin, in the work above mentioned (vol. i, p. 22),
observes that the Buriats owning allegiance to Russia resemble the
Khalkhas within the Chinese border. His remarks indicate an
appreciation of the fact that Russian civilization had already in his
time begun to take root among them. To the west of the territory
occupied by the Buriats, he farther states, lie the Khariat B^ m
m !f^ (? Kerait), who are of the same stock with the T'ang-nu
Urianghai of the Chinese territory.

534. — Dam ^ jfc. — The Dam Mongols, occupying a portion
of tiie frontier between Kokonor and Tibet, known as the
region of Tsaidam ^ 9I TfC* ^is semi-savage branch of the

88 PABT XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN.

Mongol race, occupying in scattered settlements the northern
fringe of the territory of Tibet, is probably that which is designated
by the Tibetans ** Sok-pa," or the people of the pastures (the Chinese
yeo muh). In this word "Sok" it might perhaps be possible to trace
a relationship with the muh suh or muk suk '^ ^, the sweet clover
or lucerne upon which the horses of Fergana were pastured,
according to the reports of the earliest Chinese explorers of Central
Asia. Sze-ma Ts'ien, the father of Chinese history, relates that
the seeds of this clover were brought back to China by the
imperial envoys.

^*^ The outline of the geographical distribution and political
grouping of the Mongol tribes, which has been given as concisely
as possible above, is intended to serve as an introduction to the
list of titles by which their princes, nobility, and other rulers are
distinguished. For more minute details, the Institutes of the
reigning Dynasty ;^j||'&Htj Books 49 to 52, which have furnished
the groundwork of all that precedes, may be consulted. Articles
entitled the Topography of Extra-provincial China^ in the Chinese
Repository^ Vol. xx, p. 62, and Tlie Army of the Chinese Empire^
ib., p. 336, have also been placed under contribution and are
deserving of careful study. The following are the offices and ranks
established among the various Mongol tribes : —

535. — MfiNG Chang g ^—Captain-General of a chogolgdn
(meng) or league (see ante^ No. 509). This office is bestowed by
imperial appointment, on the recommendation of the Mongolian
Superintendency. Each league of tribes is placed under the
supreme control of such an authority, selected from among the
leading chieftains (dzassaks) of all the tribes of the confederation.

536.— Fu MfiNG Chang glj S ;g.— Deputy Captain-General.
One to each chogolgdn (as above).

537. — DzAssAK f^, jg| ^, — Chieftain.

This title, pronounced in southern Mongolian as Djassaky
appears to be a derivative from the Mongol verb dzassakhoy to
regulate or govern. With the exception of the tribes or portions
of tribes, such as the Ch'ahar and the Pumed^ as noted above,

PART XI. — ^UONOOLIA AND TUBKEBTAN. 89

which are placed under the immediate government of Manchu
generals, each Mongolian banner is ruled by a chieftain or noble
bearing this generic designation. Among the Inner Mongols, the
dzassak are classed in six ranks, commencing with that of TsHn
Wang IR I, or prince of the first order, and identical in nomen-
clature with the six highest ranks of the imperial nobility (see
Part I, No. 17). Among the Khalkhas and other tribes of the
Outer Mongols, the dzassak of a banner may be of any degree of
the six ranks above named, or merely a daidji or noble (see in/rd^
No. 538). The position is in some cases hereditary, in others
conferred by imperial appointment,

538.— T^Ai-CHi •& ig.— Noble (Daidji). The daidji are
hereditary nobles claiming descent from the founders of the
Mongol sovereignty or from the Khans or titular "princes" and
"dukes" of the various tribes. They correspond, consequently,
in some respects, to the tsung-shih or imperial clansmen of the
Chinese (see Part I, No. 29). Among the Oelot tribes, the title
isai-sang ^ ^ was employed in the place of daidji for their
hereditary nobles. Another term, noyen or noin ]flj ^, with the
same meaning, was also heretofore in use among a small number
of tribes. Four classes of the rank of daidji are recognized, of
which the highest is on a par with the first of the Chinese official
ranks, and so on in each class. A daidji of the first class may be
the commandant or chief of a banner, in which case he is entitled
to prefix the term dzassak (see above) to his tilJe, and he is invested
with a seal of office issued by the imperial government. Daidji
who are not endowed with official seals are subject to the authority
of the dzassaks or chieftains of their respective banners.

539. — T-A-PU-NANG ^ ^^ S* — Noble (Tabunang). This
designation is confined to a portion of the T*umed and Kharach'in
tribes alone, among which it stands as the equivalent of daidji
(see above).

540. — HiEH-Li T*Ar-CHi fft 8 -^ "§• — Administrator. This
dignitary acts as assistant to the dzassak in the administration of
the affairs of the Banner. Appointments are made to the position
from the superior nobles of the Banner.

90 PART XI. — ^MONGOLIA AND TUBKESTAK.

541 .— KwAN K*i Chang King ^ ]R Jt SC-— Adjutant
542-— KwAN K'l Fu Chang King If j|^ gl| JR SC-— Deputy

Adjutant

The above offices are filled by selection from among the daidji

or nobles of each banner.

543.— Ts^an-ling ^ S[.— Colonel.

544.— Tso-LING is, fl|.— Lieutenant-Colonel.

These ranks are likewise filled by selection from among the
daidji. The tso^-ling has 150 adult males under his command, of
whom 50 are reckoned as ma-kia j^ ^ or horse-soldiers, and 100
as kien san SB % ^^ unemployed.

545.— HiAO K^i HiAO ja fif ;K.— Subaltern.

546 — LiNGTS^ui ffl fl|.— Sergeant Six in esich Uo-ling's
command.

547.— Orbadu fD R? E g.— The bulk of the Mongol

population is thus designated. All families are arranged in groups

of ten, under a ahih-chang ff* ^ or decurion. For each group of

three ting "J* or men of military age, one soldier's allowance, kia

Ep, is issued.

The Frontier Commands:

The following are the titles of the chief authorities ruling the
'^extra-provincial** administrative divisions, under the supreme
direction of the Li Fan Yuan or Mongolian Superin tendency (see
Part II, No. 1^3). At their head may be placed the ''three
Military Lieutenant-Governorships," of which two are associated
with the province of Chihli, being subject in civil matters to the
control of the Governor-General of that province, and the third
(Urumts'i), forming part of the Hi command, is similarly associated
with the province of Kansuh. They are as follows : —

548. — i. Jbh-ho Tu-tunq ^ ^ ^ jg{.— Military Lieu-
tenant-Governor of Jeh-ho. This large tract of country, embracing
tlie easternmost region of the Mongol tribes, is organized in its
southern section on the footing of a Chinese administrative division
of the first class, under the naioe of Ch^Sng^tSh Fuh ^ D /SP< An

PART XI.— MONGOLU AND TURKESTAN, 91

immense tract of country, several hundred miles in length, on its
western side, is designated the Wei Chiang ^ j^, or Hunting
Reserves, also called Muh-lan ;|C W or muran, which during the
earlier reigns of the present dynasty was periodically visited by
the Emperor with a large military retinue, for purposes of the .
chase and martial exercises (see Part VI, No. 436). Of late
years, a population of Chinese squatters has largely encroached
upon these reserves. The civil administration of the territory of
Jeh-ho, apart from the prefecture of Ch*eng-teh Fu, is conducted
under the Military Lieutenant-Governor by secretaries of the
Mongolian Superintendency, entitled Li She Sze YUan iS^-^^?
or Civil Commissary, and Li Hing Sze Yuan 3il ^ ^ ^^ Judicial
Commissary. Sub-Prefects or T^ung P'an (see Part III, No. 283)
have of late been appointed for the control of the Chinese squatters
in the Hunting Reserves. Secretaries of the Mongolian Superin-
tendency are also employed as Collectors of Customs at four
points {sze shuei ^) on the Jeh-ho border-line.

549.— li. Ch'aHar Tu-t-ung & ^ W is M —Military
Lieutenant-Goveruijr of Ch^ahar (or Chakhar). This officer,
residing at Chang-chia K*ow jH ^ D? the gate-town on the line
of the Great Wall, commonly known as Kalgan, from the word
Kalga^ or gate, in the Mongol tongue, conducts, with the assistance
of the Fu Tu t'ung or Deputy Lieutenant-Governor, bis colleague,
the government of the Mongol tribes whose territory extends west-
ward from the Great Wall to the desert of (if^bi and northward to
the land of the Khalkhas (see sup^d, No. 526). The nomade
herdsmen of the Ch'ahar and other tribes in this region are entirely
subject to the rule of the Tu^tung; but in civil matters relating to

Chinese affairs within the Lieutenant-Governorship, as has been
observed above, the Governor-General of Chihli exercises a
superior jurisdiction. The Prefecture of Siian-hwa Fu, lying
between the Inner and the Outer Wall, is nominally part of the
Ch^ahar command, but in practice it is administered on the
ordinary Chinese territorial system, under the supervision of an
Intendant bearing the title of K'ow Peh Tao P ^t IS? residing at
Siian-hwa Fu. Three Civil Commissaries, Li She T'unt/ Cite ^see

92 PART XI.— MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN.

Part III, No. 282), stationed respectively at Chang-chia K'ow,
Tuh-shih K'ow, and To-lo-no*rli ( Dolon-nor) on the Mongolian
plateau, are jointly subject to this functionary and the Military
Lieutenant-Governor.

550.— A-Lfe-T^Ai KtJN Ta*i W lf& S •&.— The Military
Postroad. The Military Lieutenant-Governor of Ch^ahar is
ex-'officio Controller of the postroads, for the conveyance of govern-
ment despatches and the transit of officials, which extend from the
Great Wall to the Altai {^M ^ ^^HM ^) Mountains, to
K^urun, Uliasut'ai, etc. These roads, divided into chan f^ or
stages, are served by detachments of Mongol tribesmen who take
turns of duty at the kun t'ai jj^ '^ or military posts established at
each stage. To these posts, officials throughout the Chinese
government service are liable to be banished as the penalty of
misconduct, but the service they are nominally required to render
in expiation of the offence committed is in most if not in all cases
commuted for a money payment, designated as t'ai fei -^ ^, the
amount of which is fixed by law. The Mongol tribes along the
line of route are required, in addition to detjjchments of guards,
to furnish the necessary quota of animals for the post service to
and fro. Officials proceeding on duty beyond the Wall receive
posting-orders, entitled K'an hoh ^ '^ or tally-slips, from the
Board of War, under whose general superintendence the courier
service is placed.

551.— iii. Urumts'i Tu-t^ung ,^ # TfC § S5 i^ —Military
Lieutenant-Governor of Uruints'i or Unimch'i (Oroumchi).
Subject to the control of the Military Governor of the Hi ngion
(see infrd^ No. 557).

552.-Uhasut'ai Tsiang Kun ,^ ^ « if^ ^ Jflf !? -

Military Governor of Uliasut'ai. This region, the seat of govern-
ment of which is the town of Uliasut'ai in the territory of the
Sain Noin Khalkhas, is the principal centre of the imperial
authority as exercised over the KInilkha trihes. The Military
Governor is invested with the special title of ling rim Tso Fu
Imuig Kiln ^ JS 4 g'J Hf '^i which may be translated Vice-
Wat*den of the Marches, In ad^lition to the subordinate function-

PART XI. — ^MONaOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 93

aries placed under bis command (see below), four Deputy Military
Governors, entitled Fu Tsiang Kiln g|J Jj^ IjL^ in the persons of a
prince of each of the four tribes of the Khalkhas, assist the chief
authority in the affairs of his government. Each of the four
Mongol dignitaries takes a turn of residence, for three months at
a time, at Uliasut'ai.

553.— Uliasut'ai Ts'an-tsan Ta Ch'Sn ,^ M IS S "a ^
H ^ £. — Military Assistant Governor. The Military Governor
of Uliasut*ai is assisted by two subordinate functionaries under the
above-named title, one of whom is appointed from among the
Manchu dignitaries at Peking, and the other from the Khalkha
nobles.

554.— Ting Pien Ts^an-tsan Ta Ch^en £ jI # g :fc &—
Assistant to the Warden of the Marches (see mprdj No. 552).

555.— K*OBDO Ts^AN-TSAN Ta Ch^Sn Sff ^ $ ^ g a &—
Military Assistant Governor, commanding at K^obdo. The
Urianghai tribes of the Mongols are placed under the above
jurisdictions, subject to the authority of the Military Governor of
Uliasut'ai.

556.— K'u-LUN Pan She Ta Ch^en SH JH Wt ^ ^ &—
Imperial Agent at K*urun (Urga). Associated with this high
officer, usually a Manchu lieutenant-general from one of the
Peking banners, is a Mongolian Pan She Ta Ch^en with co-ordinate
authority in matters relating to the Mongolian tribes. The
Imperial Agent at Urga is specially charged with the control of
the frontier town of Kiakhta 'lip ]^ Bl, and the trade conducted
there with the Russians. The Manchu term ainban, equivalent to
the Chinese designation Ta Ch^en or High Officer, forming part of
the title borne by the Imperial Agent and other functionaries of
similar position, is frequently applied by European writers to the
Chinese representatives in Mongolia and Turkestan.

557.— Ili Tsiang KiJN ^ ^ }» ®.— The Military
Governor of Ili. This title, to which a regard for analogy
requires the above rendering to be given (see Part V, No. 367),
would be more correctly translated by the term Governor-General,

94 PART XT. — ^MOKGOLIA AND TURKESTAN.

or Viceroy, of Chinese Turkestan. The region of Hi is, properly-
speaking, the territory formerly occupied by the Sungar nation
(see suprdy No. 518), the final conquest of which dates from 1759,
when the arms of K*ien Lung completed the destruction of the
Kahnuk sovereignty and established his supremacy on either side
of the Tien Shan mountains. The territories of Sungaria, on
the north, and of the Mahommedan cities (or Kashgaria) on the
south, of this great range were divided into two vast provinces,
entitled respectively, with reference to their position north and
south of the mountains, the T'ie7i Shan Peh iw 5c ill 4t K ^^^
T*ien Shan Nan ^w 3^ [II ^ K, and designated generically as Sin
Kiang ^ S ^^ ^^® ^®^ Dominion, the supreme control of which
was placed in the hands of a Military Governor. The first
appointment to this post was made in 1764. Large bodies of
Manchus were transferred to the Hi region as military colonists ;
and a fortified town adjoining the site of Kuldja on the river Hi
was built for the residenco of the Military Governor and his
troops. The name of Hwei-yiian Ch'eng S^ ^ JS was given to
this place. Five divisions — tui |§5 — of military colonists were
established in the Hi region, drawn from the following sources,
viz., Manchus from the capital, Solon ^ j^ Manchus from the
region of the Amur, Sibe ^ fj^ Mongols from the Jeh-ho region,
Chahars, and Oelots (see supra, No. 518), each under the com-
mand of a divisional General or Commandant (see infrd, No. 559).
Toward the close of the reign of K'ien Lung, a large influx of
population into the region of Sungaria was secured by encouraging
the migration of Chinese from the provinces of Kansuh and Shensi,
to whom extensive tracts of land were allotted. The majority of
these settlers were of the Mussulman religion, which had taken
root in Western China at a very early date, owing to the influx
of Persian and Arab immigrants; and they eventually formed in
the Hi region a distinct nucleus of population, known to the
Chinese simply as Hwei Min J5 or Mussulman subjects of the
State, but designated by their neighbours of the Turki race by
the name of Dungan or Tungani, a term the origin of which
has not been ascertained. In the neighbourhood of Hi itself

PART XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN. 95

there further dwells a population of Mahomraedans, known as
Taranchi, the descendants of colonists transplanted from Kashgaria.
This part of the population still retains its Turki language and
other marks of alien extraction. The name Taranchi is said to be
derived from tararij millet, and hence to signify a millet-grower
or farmer. The Dungan or Chinese Mussulman immigrants, on
the other hand, found their way not only into Sungaria but also
into the region south of the TMen Shan, where they mixed but did
not harmonize with the indigenous population. Although pro-
fessing the same religion with the Chinese Mussulmans, the
Mahommedans of Kashgaria were descended from a different stock,
that of the Turki or Uigur race. From this medley of nationalities
have grown the conflicts of the last fifteen years, in the course of
which the Chinese occupation of both Sungaria and Kashgaria
became extinguished, Hi falling to the share of Russia, and
Kashgaria being erected into a Mussulman Kingdom by the
prowess of Yakub Khan, an adventurer from Kokand. He, with
his adherents, became known to the Chinese by the name of ** the
Andijani," — Ngan-tsi-yen ^ $^ J|E, — from Andijan, the city of
Kokand with which the most frequent relations have customarily
been maintained from the side of Kashgar. Notwithstanding the
expulsion of Chinese authority from the territories on either side of
the T^ien Shan, ideas of reconquest have never been abandoned,
and a partially successful attempt in that direction has occupied
the imperial forces for several years past. The following are the
ranks of the military administration subject to the control of the
Tsiang KUn of Hi : —

558.— Ts^AN TSAN Ta Ch^^n j^St ^ E.— Military Assistant
Governor. One at Hi, one at Tarbagatai, one at Yarkand.

559.— Ling Tui Ta Ch^Sn f^^:fi g.— Commandant of
the Forces, — at Hi, Tarbagatai, Ush, Yarkand, Urumts'i, Turfan,
Guchen, and Kurkara Usu (see supra, No. 557).

560.— Pan She Ta Ch'Sn if^^g.— Agent,— at Kashgar,

Kharashar, Kuche, Aksu, Khoten and Hami. (See also Xo. 556).

561.— HiBH Pan Ta Ch^Sn 18 |J? :fc g and Pang Pan

96 PART XI. — MONGOLIA AND TURKESTAN.

Ta CH'feN H^ ^ E.— Assistant Agent. At Ush and Hami.

562.— TsuKG Li Ts^ing Hai She Wuh Ta CH^flN ig| g ^
^ ^ ^ ^ g. — Imperial Controller-General of Kokonor.
Invested with the control of the Mongol and Tangutian (fan §)
tribes of the Ts*ing Hai or Kokonor region. (See supra. No. 524).

563. — PfiH-K^fiH fg jg. — Beg. This title, universally in
use among the followers of Islam, is employed among the Chinese
Mahommedans of Turkestan and the region of Hami as a generic
designation for the local chieftains. The begs under Chinese
authority are classed in five degrees of rank, ranging from the
third to the seventh degree of the Chinese official scale. The Ma-
hommedans of the Hami and Turfan region, who are of Mongol
descent, are distinguished by a organization similar to that of the
Mongol tribes. Their chiefs are invested with the designation
dzassak (see supra, No. 537), in addition to which the titles of
Wang, beilSh, etc., are conferred upon them as is the rule among
the Mongols proper. The Mahommedans of other than Chinese or
Mongol descent are commonly known as ch'aji t^ow Hwei-hwei ^
BM ISly or " turban -wearing Mussulmans."

The following are the most important among the titles and
attributes of the Begs of different classes in Kashgaria :

i. Ak'im Beg pj ^ tJC (6 jS* — Local Governor.

ii. IsHKHAN Beg 19^ ff- ^ ffi j£. — Assistant Governor.

iii. Shang Beg |g| {^ [^.—Collector of Revenue.

iv. Katsanatch'i Beg |!§ ^ IA 9 f6 !S- — Same as above.

v. 'Hatsze Beg ^ ^ i^ ^. — Judge.

vi. MiRABU Beg i^ Ij|J ^P ffi jg.— Superintendent of Agricul-
ture. (See @ S oE ^ Description of Turkestan, B. VII).

PART Xn. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. 97

PART XII.-TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY.

564. — Tibet, or Thibet, which the progress of events during

the last two centuries has converted into a dependency of the

Chinese Empire, is known to the Chinese of the present day by

the name of Tsang ^ or Si Tsang H ||{. This appellation has

superseded the term U-sze Kwoh ,^ ^ S or U-sze Tsang by

which the country was known under the Ming dynasty, from the

indigenous designation Us Tsang, or U Tsang, signifying Central

and Pure, at that time applied to it. The native sound of U

appears farther to have been corrupted by the Chinese into Wei,

whence the designation Wei Tsang ^ ^ has come to be used as

the general geographical title for the entire country. The limits

at present assigned to the territory of Tibet occupy only a part

of tlie ancient region of T^u Fan ^ ||, the people of which,

known hIso by the name of Si Fan "g ^ and T^ang-ku-teh ^ •jjf

i^ i^^ M "6" W) ^'^*y Tangiit, were for many centuries the dreaded

enemies of the Chinese. Tlie name Tibet, by which, since the

day of Marco Polo, the country has been known in European

geogiaphy, is represented in Chinese by the characters T^u-pSh--

teh H fl3 4$ (T'ubod), intended probably to reproduce the sound

of the appellation given to it among the Mongols. The Tibetans

call themselves Bod, and their country Bod-jul, — the land of Bod,

a term the derivation of which has been variously interpreted by

European writers, but which the Chinese appear to identify with

Full Kiooh ^ g — the land of Buddha. According to the legends

preserved by indigenous records, the first germs of enlightenment

and order were introduced into Tibet bv offslioots of the race of

8akya, from which the founder of the Buddhist religion had

himself earlier derived his descent; and Srongtsan Qampo ^ ^

M ^ ^h whose lineage is traced through seven generations to

the first of the semi-mythi^-al sovereigns of this line, became in

the seventh century of our era at once the first acknowledged

ruler of the entire land of Tibet, and also the introducer and

98 PART XII. — TIBBT AND THE LAMAIST HIBRAROHY.

vigorous patron of the Buddhist religion among his subjects. He
took to wife, on the one hand, a daughter of the sovereign of
Nipal — Pai'pu j^ ^ or Pa-pu-Uh Kwoh G ^ ]|Hl H» *-^> ^^^
Parbuttiya Kingdom — and, on the other, the princess Win Ch^6ng
3lt JA & £9 daughter of the emperor T*ai Tsung of the T'ang
dynasty in China. This last-named alliance was contracted in
A.D. 641. For many centuries his descendants, with the title
of Gialbo — in Chinese, l^san-p^u JR ^ — continued to rule over
Tibet, although in the course of time the temporal authority
became encroached upon to a large extent by the pretensions of
the Buddhist hierarchy which had gradually come into being.
In the course of the eleventh century, in particular, the superiors
of a religious association known as the Sakya — in Chinese Hi ^ —
monastery, originally founded under the patronage of a royal prince,
began to usurp the exercise of exclusive powers of government;
and for some centuries later, this priesthood appears to have
wielded a predominant influence in the affairs of Tibet. Known
at that period as at present by the name of Brugpa — in Chinese
written ^ ^ "^ Ci — the Sakya priesthood is also distinguished
by the title of the Red Church — Hung Kiao ig[ fjj; — from the
colour of the vestments and headcovering they adopted. The
primitive doctrines of Buddhism, already largely corrupted in
Tibet, from the earliest period of its introduction, by Hindoo
and especially Bivaitic forms of worship, were farther perverted
among the Sakya priesthood by a deliberate departure from the
rule of celibacy. Marriage was permitted among them with the
avowed object of securing an hereditary transmission of power ;
and magic arts in infinite variety and with unbounded pretensions
to efficacy were professed among them as a means of ensuring
their supremacy in the popular mind. A revolt against the
corrupt and licentious rule of the Sakya priesthood took place at
length in the fifteenth century of our era under the leadership of
a reformer named Tsongkhaba — in Chinese ^ l§ Ci —born at Si
Ning in A.D. 1417. The history of this earnest innovator's
career may be read elsewhere;* for tlie purposes of the present

* See Die LamaUche Hierarehie und Kirche, by C. F. KoBPPKN, Berlin, 1859,
p. 109 et seq.

PART Xn» — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. 99

sketch it suffices to observe that he preached with success in
various parts of Tibet the necessity of a return to the primitive
doctrines and observances of the religion of Shakyamuni, as an
outward and .visible sign of which he insisted on the adoption of
the yellow robe and hat (yellow, or the colour of gold, being
assigned in early legends to the founder of Buddhism) in lieu of
the vestments of red which distinguished the ruling hierarchy.
The preachings of Tsongkhaba were attended with remarkable
success, and before his death, which^ according to Chinese accounts,
took place in A.D. 1478, he found himself widely acclaimed as
the spiritual leader of the Lamaist majority. His reforms were
welcomed and supported by the emperors of the Ming dynasty,
who saw in them a means of extending their influence over the
' Tibetan people, more especially as the now discredited Sakya or
Bed hierarchy had been staunch and favoured supporters of the
descendants of Kublai, lately supplanted on the throne of China.
The reformer left behind him two eminent disciples, upon whom,
in the words of a Chinese chronicler, he "laid commands, enjoining
upon them that they should be born again, generation after
generation, as ^huMl'Jian 1^ H ]^ ^, to practise the doctrines of
the Great Conveyance ( Ta C/i^ing, Sanskr. MaJidydnay the esoteric
form of Buddhism). The word ^hubiNian signifies in Chinese
hwa shin ft ^ (i.e., transformed body, transformation, reembodi-
ment). The two disciples were called respectively Dalai Lama
and Fanshen Lama."

From the period referred to above, the spiritual and a large
portion of the temporal authority in Tibet, which had previously
been engrossed by the Red hierarchy, was wielded by the succes-
sive "reembodiments" of Tsongkhaba's disciples, whose identity,
on their reappearance in human form, has been merged, according
to the legends that have subsequently arisen, in the personality
of the two most exalted and revered of the divinities proceeding
from the essence of the Buddha himself. In the senior of the
two, the Dalai Lama, the Bddhisattwa AvalokitSswara (the
Chinese Kwan Yin), is believed to appear on earth; and in the
persoii of the second the Bddhisattwa Manchusri is recognized.

100 BART XII. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIBRAROHY.

tiiiis deity having preliminarily occupied the form, it is also fabled,
of Tsongkbabd himself. The second in succession of the Dalai
Lanj^as, in the course of a long career, laid the foundation of the
existing hierarchical system in Tibet, establishing his seat of
ecclesiastical rale at Lassa, and organizing a body of lesser spiritual
dignitaries, under the designation ^hut^ukht'u (see iw/ra, No. 589),
who, like the two supreme religious chiefs, were to be continued
by a series of reembodiments. Like the Dalai and the Panshen
lamaa, these spiritual chiefs of the Tibetan priesthood became
popularly known as "living Buddhas," — in Chinese hwoh Fuh JS^
•—a term by which they are at present commonly designated.

In the course of the latter half of the 17th century, the
authority of the Dalai Lama having gained entire predominance
throughout the greater portion of Tibet, the gialbos or descendants
of the ancient kings appear to have gradually faded into insigni-
ficance, whilst at the same time, under various pretexts, inter-
ference in Tibetan affairs on the part of a succession of ambitious
Mongol princes grew more and more direct. Already, at a some-
what earlier period, Gushi Khan, in Chinese designated as @i&ff ,
the reigning prince of the Khoshot Mongols, had supported the
Dalai Lama of the period against the claims of the temporal
sovereign, and had been rewarded for his fidelity to the hierar-
chical cause with the title of Nomen *Han |§ ff) ff ? or Prince
(Khan) of the Religious Law, an equivalent to the Sanskrit
Dh&rma Raja. By the influence of Gushi Khan, the Dalai and
Panshen Lamas were induced to despatch an embassy, in A.D.
1642, with professions of respect and tenders of allegiance to the
court of the Manchu sovereign, whose forces were then on the
eve of effecting the overthrow of the Ming dynasty in China ; and
from this period relations of intimacy took their rise, developing
themselves in time into the assumption, on the part of t&e Chinese
emperors, of the sovereign tutelage of the Buddhist papacy in

Tibet, This consummation was hastened by the wars undertaken
toward the close of the 17th and in the early part of the 18th
century by the Sungar chieftains (see Part XI, No. 518) for the
subversion of the authority of the Dalai Lama. The temporal

PABT Xn. — TIBBT AND THB LAJCAIST HIERABOHT. 101

administrator who^ as a regent under the Dalai Lama, had long
conducted the government of Tibet, with the title of Diba, in
Chinese ^ £ ^^ Jg| £ {i.e., ruler, or chief) was invested by
K^ang Hi in A.D. 1694 with the title of T^u-pik-t'Sh Kwoh Wang^
or King of Tibet; but the authority thus established was ere long
attacked by an invasion of the Sungars, and the Chinese armies
which were despatched hereupon for the liberation of Tibet
remained as conquerors of the country. After an interval during
which the Government remained in the hands of puppet nominees
of the Chinese sovereign, an outbreak directed against one of
these gave the pretext for the appointment of two High Commis-
sioners to control the affairs of Tibet on behalf of the Chinese
government. This took place in A.D. 1725. Farther attempts
at revolt led, in A.D. 1750, to the entire suppression of the
temporal sovereignty in Tibet, and the government of the country
was placed, thenceforward, in the hands of the Dalai and Panshen
Lamas, aided by a council of four laymen, entitled Kalon or
Kablon, i.e.. Ministers of State, under the direction in chief of
the two Imperial Commissioners or Residents appointed from
Peking. The government has from that time forward continued
to be conducted upon this basis, the authority of the Chinese
administration being rendered the more complete by the long
minorities which are entailed at each successive "reembodiment"
of the two supreme ecclesiastical dignitaries. The territorial
divisions, or provinces, — pu Q5 — *t present established, are four
in number, and are named as follows : —

i. Ts^iEN TsANG Ijf m, or Anterior Tibet. This section of
the country, the easternmost, and therefore nearest to the Chinese
frontier, is also known as K'ang ]||, written by some geographers
as Kham, and also known as Chamdo $ TfC $•

ii. Wei ^ or Chung Tsang t^ |B|> — Central Tibet, contkin-
ing the seat of government, Lassa Jft m, and the residence of the
Dalai Lama, the great Monastery of PotalA ^ JH |3:.

iii. How Tsang ^ ^ — Ulterior Tibet, or simply Tsang,
containing the seat of government of the Panshen Lama, at
Teshilumbo or Chasbilumbu fL # iH ^<

102 PART XII. — TIBBT AND THK LAMAIST HEffiRARCHY.

iv. Ngari f^ £. — Western Tibet.

The following are the ranks and offices which remain to be
considered : —

Chinese Administration in Tibet:

565.— Chu Tsang Ta Ch^Iin ft ]j|. :fc g.— Imperial
Besident in Tibet. With this high officer a colleague or Assistant
Besident is associated, distinguished by the title of Pang Pan Ta
Ch^Sn fif m ;K; S- T^oili Besident and Assistant Besident are
commonly selected from among the superior officers of the Manchu
Banners, and are placed under the direction of the Li Fan Yuan
or Mongolian Superintendency (see Part II, No. 183), but with
the duty of memorializing the Throne direct on all questions of
importance. They likewise correspond on a footing of equality
with the Goyemor-General of the adjacent Chinese province of
Sze-ch'wan, whence the troops constituting the Chinese garrison
and the officers of the Chinese civil administration in Tibet are
detailed. The provincial exchequer of Sze-chVan is charged,
also, with the expenses of the Chinese occupation and government
of Tibet. Among his other duties, the Imperial Besident acts as
the medium of relations between the Chinese government and
the Court of Nepal, which is Icnown to the Chinese as JS Hf ^ Bl
or the Kingdom of the Ghorkhas, the people and products of the
country being at the same time designated Pai-pu ^ ^ or Pa-pu
Ei ^, i.e.y Parbuttiya. For the conduct of correspondence with
the Tibetan and Nepalese authorities he has on his staff a "Secre-
tary for Native (lit barbarian) Affairs" — I TsHng Chang-king
55 W 3t *^. Appointments to the principal civil and military
offices of the Tibetan government and hierarchy are made on
nominations submitted to the Throne by the Imperial Besidents,
who are also invested with the supreme command of both the
Chinese garrison troops and the Tibetan soldiery or Fan ping ^ ^.
The Imperial Institutes provide for a corps of about 1,500 officers
and men, detached from the provincial forces of Sze-ch*wan,
who are distributed at various points in the Tibetan territory.
The Tibetan soldiery, consisting principally of village militia,
undrilled and armed only with the most antiquated description of

PART XII. — TIBET AND THE LAMAI8T HIERABCHT. 103

weapons, is officially reckoned at a force of 64,000 men, of whom
14,000 are described as cavalry. For the commanders of these
forces (see tn/ra, Nos. 579-583). Through the four Ministers or
Kahn (see infrdj No. 567) the Imperial Residents control the
entire Tibetan administration.

566. — Liang T*ai 10 •^. — Commissary. Of this rank three
Chinese officials, belonging to the class of Sub- Prefect or Assistant
Magistrate, are stationed at Lassa, Tashilumbo, and Ngari, where
they act both as paymaster^ of the Chinese forces and as deputies
of the Imperial Residents in all matters concerning Chinese
interests in Tibet. They are relieved, according to regulation, at
the expiry of two years' service.

Secular Administration in Anterior Tibet:

567.— -Kalon (Kablon) Bg ^ ||. — Councillor of State.
The secular affairs of Tibet are administered by a Council com-
posed of four Ministers under the above title. The majority of
the incumbents of this office, who act under the immediate
supervision of the Imperial Residents, are laymen, receiving their
appointment by decree from Peking on nomination by the
Residents, and becoming ea-^fficio invested with the third degree
of Chinese official rank. The superior officers of the Tibetan army
are eligible for the post of Kalon. The Council Chamber is
designated Ka Hia Kg ^.

568. — Shang Shang fj^ J:. — The Treasury. This depart-
ment, presided over by the Kalon (see above), has the supreme
control of all matters relating to the collection of revenue and
secular affairs in general in Tibet.

569. — TsAi-pfiNQ ff }$. — Councillor of the Treasury (first -^
class). Three in number ; invested with the 4th degree of Chinese
official rank.

570. — SHA!;rG Chodba |9f Jft !|# fi. — Councillor of the ^
Treasury (second class). Two in number; rank as above.

571. — ^Ykrts'angba fj^Wlt £.— Controller of the Revenue.
Two in number; 5th rank.

» «

^ >

104 PART XII* — ^TIBBT AND THE LAMAI8T HIERARCHY.

572.^— LangtsaiHia J^ ff (|.— Controller of Streets and
Boads. Two in number; 5th rank.

573. — HiERBANG f2 m ^. — Commissioner of Justice. Two
in number; 5th rank.

574. — SnlfeDiBA :j^ Hf Q. — Superintendent of Police. Two
in number; 5th rank.

575.— Taping % J$.— Controller of the stud. Two in
number; 6th rank.

C. ^^^^ ' 576. — Chung Yih tfi gg.— Secretary of the Council. Of

two ranks, having the characters ta ^ (great) and aiao ij> (lesser)
respectively prefixed the title. Invested with the 6th and 7th ranks.

577. — Chonir j^ ^ ^. — Secretary (second class) of the
Council. Three in number; 6th rank.

578. — DiBA ^ ^ ov J^ Ei- — (a). Commissioner. This
title, signifying in Tibetan one who rules or is chief, was borne
during the 17th and 18th centuries by the secular delegate of the
Dalai Lama, in whose name he wielded the government of the
country, (b). District governor or Headman. Thirteen func-
tionaries of this description are recognized in the Imperial Institutes.
They are divided into six classes, each with special functions, such
as superintendents of revenue, of cattle, etc., etc.

Military Ranks:

579. — Taip^ng ^ J$. — Commandant. Six in all. This,
the highest military position, is invested with the 4'th degree of
Chinese rank. The sound was formerly denoted by the characters
tai'pSn f^ ^.

580. — JupfeNG ft 5$. — Commander of 200 men; 5th rank.
Twelve in all.

581.— KiAPfeNG ^ J$.— Officer of the 6th rank. Twenty-
four in all.

582.— TiNGPfeNG j£ J$.— Officer of the 7th rank. One
hundred and twenty in all.

583. — Fan Muh ^ g. — A generic designation for

PART Xn* — TIBET AND THB LAMAIST HUERAROHY. 105

Tibetan officers of all ranks, both civil and military. Appoint-
ments of officers to the subordinate military ranks are made,
according to regulation, by selection from among the scions of the
ancient native nobility or aristocracy jjj: ^, known by the name
of Tongkhor « JplW (See * « # JH^f «, Book 741).

The Lamaist Hierarchy:

584. — Lama m ^, — This designation, applied to all members
of the priesthood observing the forms of Tibetan Buddhism, is
derived from a Tibetan word which, according to the Chinese, has
the meaning of m?m ^hang ^ J;, ».«., "unsurpassed" or "without
a superior."

585.— Dalai Lama ^ JB 1*1 IW-— One of the joint Pontiifs
of Tibet (see below). The word dalai or ^a^^in Mongolian signifies
** Ocean," and corresponds to the Tibetan word Djamta^o or
Chatnts^Oj which, in the combination Cheptsun Djarnts'o Rinpoc.h^4^
or Venerable Ocean Treasure, constitutes the proper title of this
dignitary. As already remarked above (see supra, No. 564), the
Dalai Lama is regarded as the reembodiment which is assumed
by the spirit of one of Tsongkhaba's two disciples, and at the
same time as an incarnation or Avatar of the Bodhisattwa
Avalokiteswara. Having engrossed in their own hands, as already
narrated, the temporal power in Tibet, successive Dalai Lamas of
the last century were recognized by the emperors of China as the
supreme pontiffs of the Yellow Church 'Sfi ^ ^ 'Mf fRy ^i^d the
utmost veneration has been manifested toward their successors
up to the present moment. Their residence is fixed at Mount
Fotala $ m ^ (one of the three sacred mountains of this name,
the original being situated, according to Buddhist legends, in
Lidia, and the third, known in Chinese by the name of P'u-t^o
Shan ^ PiS ill ) forming the well-known island of monasteries on
the coast of Chehkiang), near Lassa ^ m, the chief city of
Anterior Tibet At this place, the ancient capital of the kingdom,
are situated the la Chao ^ ^'and Siao Cliao *J^ J^j ^^ Greater
and Lesser Temples {chao in Tibetan signifying monastery or
shrine), w^bich date £rom the period of the Chinese alliance io

106

PABT XII. — TIBET AND THS LAMAI8T HIBRABCHT.

the seventh century. The Ta Chaoy in particular, is celebrated
as containing a famous effigy of the princess of the house of T^ang,
now worshipped, together with her consort from Nepal, among the
chief divinities of the Lamaist pantheon. (See suprd^ No. 564).

The succession to the office of Dalai Lama occurs, as already
mentioned above, by a process of "reembodiment." For some
centuries, and until within comparatively recent times, the rela-
tives or surrounding of each successive pontiff contrived, by
more or less open acts of fraud, to indicate after his decease the
individual whom it suited them to select as the new Avatar. In
order to obviate proceedings of this kind, which had more than
once brought forward persons distasteftil and dangerous to the
suzerain power, the emperor K^en Lung ordained, in A.D. 1792,
that for the future both the succession to this august office and
also the appointment to other spiritual dignities of a similar
nature (see infrd^ No. 589) should be determined by the drawing
of lots. At the decease of each Dalai Lama, accordingly, — when,
like all members of the class endowed with the privilege of
successive births, he is said to have ^' entered upon the perfection
of repose," yUan tsih [Q ^, enquiries are made by the priesthood
with reference to miraculous signs, ling i f| f|, which may have
been observed in attendance upon the birth of children at about
the same period. Particulars of the required kind are always
duly procured; and these are transmitted in proper form to the
Imperial Besidents at Lassa. After scrutiny of the documents
and report being made to Peking, a certain number of the children
are brought with their parents to Lassa. Here, on an appointed
day, their names are inscribed on slips of wood, wUch, after
being carefully sealed, are deposited in the "golden urn," kin pSn^
pa pHng ^ >4C £ JK? prescribed by the regulation instituted by
K'ien Lung. The name drawn forth from the urn is hailed amid
universal rejoicing as that of the new incarnation, and the Dalai
Lama is declared to have " come forth in reembodiment " — eh^u
^hubil^han ^H^SLMWy ^^^^ ^ Mongol word signifying " bodily
transformation" or metamorphosis (in Chinese, hwa shin ffj Jj^).
After a short period of instruction, the newly acclaimed pontiff.

PART Xn. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. 107

at the age of perhaps two or three)yeavs, is solemnly enthroned —
t8o chwang ^ ^ — and during his long ensuing minority he
remains, as a matter of course, a puppet in the hands of the
Chinese Imperial Residents.*

586.— Panshen Erdeni Lama mWUWBJB^B'—
One of the joint Pontiffs of Tibet (see above). Joint heir with
the Dalai Lama of the spiritual inheritance derived from Tsong-
khaba, the Panshen Erdeni is believed bv the Tibetans to be
worthy of the higher degree of adoration, his office and functions
being less contaminated by worldly cares and influences. To him
is confided the maintenance of the purity of religious doctrine, as
to the Dalai Lama is attributed the temporal governance of the
Tibetan realm. His title signifies "The Precious Teacher"
(Panshen or Banshen==the Indian Pandita, and Erdeni in Mon-
golian -being the equivalent of the Tibetan word Rin-pO'Clie\
signifying Treasure). His residence is at Tashilumbo JLfH&^j
or the Mountain of Blessings, a city lying at a distance of 700 li
or about eight days' journey to the westward of Lassa. Here the
Panshen Lama presides over an administration entirely composed
of ecclesiastics, sharing with the Dalai Lama the headship of the
Yellow Church, but mixing little, if at all, in questions of secular
administration. Succession is contrived, at each ensuing decease,
by the same device with is applied in the case of the Dalai Lama
{see above). The sixth in succession of the Panshen Lamas,
Lobtsang Tanishi by name, was persuaded by the emperor K'ien
Lung to undertake the journey to Peking, in order to take part
in the festivities on His Majesty's 70th birthday, in A.D. 1780;
and it was for this dignitary's special reception that the vast pile
of buildings at Jeh-ho, the emperor's summer retreat, was con-
structed on the model of those occupied by the Panshen Erdeni at
Tashilumbo. An attack of small-p9x carried off the illustrious
visitor toward the close of the year ; and whilst his remains were,
solemnly escorted back to Tibet, a magnificent mausoleum was

* For a detailed account of the selection and enthronement of the Dalai
Lama reference may be made to a paper by the author, entitled " Illuatrationu of
the Lamaist System in Tibet," in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of
Great Britain and Ireland^ Vol. IV, Part I, 1869.

108 F4JtT XU.— TlfiBT AKD THS LAMAIST H;p}BAB€i9T.

erected within the precincts of the temple he had inhabited during
his stay at Peking, in which the robes of the deceased Ponti^ are
enshrined.

587.~Noh£n <Han ^ ^ Sg.— Begent, or Dh&rma B&ja.
This is a title which, with sundry distinctive epithets, has long
been customarily bestowed upon eminent supporters of the Lamaist
hierarchy. The expression is rendered in Chinese by the charac-
ters Fall Wang ft I, or " Prince of the [Religious] Law, or True
F^ith" equivalent to the Sanskrit J)harmQ> RdjOf; apd the &r$jb
r^o^d instance of its bestowal was in the case of Gushi Ehan,
the celebrated IQioshoit spvereigij^, who pUced, in A.]). 1643, the
Dalai Lama in possession of the temporal sovereignty of Tibet
(see auprdy No. 564). The Imperial Listitutes record numerous
instances in which this title was conferred, in the course of the
18th century, upon a succession of ecclesiatical dignitaries^ under
whose d|ir^tio]|;i the Tibetan Council appears to have been placed
during the repeated minorities of the Dalai. It became customary,
$4so, to bestow a ming h^o £ it or title of honour, su^h as th^^t
of iGf^dan ^t^'m H H AftfiSH) ^^^^ with theoiBeeof
BiJdb^ B 32 # ( ^P Mojsigoli^n, Te^ujher or Pr^ceptqr, the
Chinese Slie {j|), or Samadi Bakhshi (apparently from the Sankrit
Sam&dhi, absorbed in contemplation), upon the Begent thus
appointed. The power which was consequ^itly wielded by
successive dignitaries of this class led to their receiving in populs^*
parlance the title of Trnng Wang H £ King (or feudatory Prince)
of Tibet The appointment of functionaries of such dievated rank
as this at length terminated in 1844, when the Begent, shortly
after the visit to Lassa which has been graphically described by
the Abbe Hue, was accused of treasonable designs and lawless
conduct in many respects, and, having been made a prisoner,
degraded, and unfrocked by an Imperial Decree, was banished
to the Amur. Allowed to return to his native place, on the
borders of Kansuh, he died in 1854; and an application lately
made for the recognition of his ^^ reembodiment,^' said to have
appeared on the spot in the person of a lad now aged 17, has
been negatived in pursuance of the Decree of 1844, by which he

PAltT Xn. — TL^m AND THS LAHAISt HIEKAItCllT. 109

was "forbidden foreyer the privitege of appearing again on ehx&i
in human form." (Bee Peking GcuttUB of July 25th, August
29th, and September 7th, 1877).— See also inftd, No. 595.

588. — K^AN-pa j§ ^^. — Abbot. The title bestowed upon
the chief ecclesiastic of all Lamaist monasteries. By a decree
of A.D. 1792, it was ordained that in the case of all K^an^fu
enthroned {tso ch^wang |S K:) in the larger class of lUonast^Tit^,
appointments should be made by the joint authority of the Dalai
Lama and the Imperial Residents ; the smaller class alone were
to be left to the appointment of the Dalai Lama himself. An
envoy, with presents by way of tribute from the Dalai and Pansheh
Lamas, who is sent annually to Peking, is selected from among
the k^an-pu of the Tibetan monasteries. He is designated in
Chinese by the title ErchHn ^ ^ \j^ — a representation of the
Manchu word signifying envoy.

589.— ^HuT^UKHT'u If B jg H-— Saint. This class of
dignitaries, to which the Dalai and Panshen Lamas themselves
belong, may be said to constitute the mo&t marked and essential
feature of the Tibetan form of Buddhism. Derived from a
Mongolian word which is interpreted in Chinese as signifying
Uai lujen J^ ^ Ay ^•^•9 one who returns again, an Avatar-^the
^hut^ukht^u supply, in their successive reembodiments, thstt trans-
mission of authority in safe or chosen hands which the enforcement
of a strict rule of celibacy might otherwise render impracti-
cable. Confined, at the outset, to the territory of Tibet proper,
the appearance of ^hut^ukld^u rulers has gradually overspread,
with the Lamaist form of worship, the whole of Mongolia.
According to traditional theory, the spirit of each 'hd^ukht^u
reappears, on his decease, in the person of some newly born infant,
and thus "comes forth reembodied" — eh^u^huhU^Iian — as has
already been described above (see suprdy No. 585). The number
of ^hut^ukht^u recognized in the Imperial Institutes, and registered
by the Mongolian Superintendency, is 160 in all. These are
distributed as follows : In Tibet, 30, including 12 who are known
by the distinctive appellation of ahaburung tp ^ ^; in Northern
Mongolia, 19 ; in Southern Mongolia, 57 ^ in the Kokonor region

.* 1

110 PART XII. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY.

of Tibet, 35 ; and in Chamdo, on the Sze-ch'wan border, 5. At
and near Peking there are, finally, 14 representatives of the class.
The special token by which they are identified, at the time of
their reembodiment, is the faculty of recalling events or of recog-
nizing objects connected with the history of their preceding
existences. With one exception — that of the Ch'akhan Nomen
*Han (see infrd^ No. 595), the system of drawing lots from the
golden urn, Icin p^ing ^ ^, according to the politic rule introduced
by K4en Lung (see supra, No. 585) is enforced in the case of
each succession. The ^hut^ukht^u are familiarly known as hicok
Full ^ ^, or living Buddhas.

590. — Shabinor ^ ^t 5ffi W- — The designation applied
to members of the Lamaist fraternity, undistinguished by any
special rank.

Ecclesiastics of the Government of Ulterior Tibet:

591. — Chi-chunq Lama ^ fiji jlH ^* — Chief Councillor.

592. — Sui-pSng Lama ;|| f $ (jj^ ^* — Lama of the second
deofree.

593. — Sit:!^-PEN Lama ^ 7|C 5H p|$. — Lama of the third
/ degree.

594.— Chonir Lama 41 >B W !!U Bft.— Lama of the fourth
degree.

^*^ The above ranks are filled by the appointment on the part
of the Imperial Eesident, on nomination proceeding from the
Panshen Erdeni Lama. The functions discharged by the respec-
tive individuals are not specified in the Imperial Institutes (cf.
:^ iS t * * W, B. 742, p. 18).

595.— Ch'aman Nomen ^Han |g 9I If fjg ^.— The title
enjoyed by the hereditary chieftain of one of the banners of
the T^umeds, claiming descent from Manchusri ^Hut^ukht^u, a
spiritual counsellor sent by the Dalai Lama about A.D. 1580 to
assist his warlike patron, Altan Khakan (Khan), the celebrated
chieftain of the Ordos tribes. This dignitary and his reembodi-
ments were long established at Koku ^Hotu, the modern Sui-yiian 1"^'

UJU. ''^-^A.

PART XII. — TIBET AND THE LAMAIST HIERARCHY. Ill

Ch^eng, where they enjoyed, with reference to the colour appro-
priate to the Bodhisattwa Manchusri, the above title, signifying
White Prince of the [Religious] Law, rendered in Chinese as
Pell Full 1^ "1% or White Buddha. The policy of the early
sovereigns of the present dynasty led to the displacement of this
spiritual potentate, who was compelled to remove with his tribe
to the region south of the Yellow River, and to pass under the
control of the Imperial Commissioner of Kokonor. Attempts on
the part of the Ch'akhan Nomen Han of the period to recross
the Yellow River in 1820-1821 rendered military operations
against him necessary, and since that period the tribe has con-
tinued submissive, its ruler wielding great influence at the same
time over all the Mongol and Tibetan population of this wild
region. A decree of A.D. 1794 makes an exception in favour of
the Ch^akhan Nomen ^Han with regard to the principle of reem-
bodiment, which is allowed, in his case only, to be restricted to
members of the same family, on the alleged ground of his being
a dzassak, ue., wielding temporal as well as spiritual authority.

596. — Cheptsundampa 'Hut'ukht'u ® ^ § iJJ- £ P? H
"^ g. — The title assigned to the Metropolitan or Patriarch of
the Khalkha tribes, ranking third (z.^., next to the two joint
Pontiffs of Tibet) in degree of veneration among the dignitaries of
the Lamaist church. The title takes its rise from the 'hut'uklit^u
commissioned in A.D. 1604 to take up his abode among the
Mongols of the North-west, where his authority was transmitted
by reembodiment in the person of a younger brother of the Khan
of the T^ushet^u tribe. In A.D. 1688, at a time when the
Khalkhas felt no longer able to contend successfully against their
adversaries the Sungars (see supra, No. 564), it was proposed in
council to seek refuge under the Russian sovereignty. The
'Hut^ukht'u, on being appealed to as umpire, decided against this
proposal, in view of the fact that protection of the Yellow Church
was not to be looked for in that quarter ; and the Khalkhas upon
this tendered their allegiance to the emperor K'ang Hi, by whom
territories were assigned to them and rank and titles were bestowed
upon their chiefs. (Sung Yiin, vol. i, p. 19). Since this period

112 PART XIL — TIBET AND THB LAMAKT HIBRARCHT.

the successors of the Cheptsundampa ^Hut^nkht^u have been
treated with high respect by the Chinese Court, although measures
were taken, during the reign of K4en Lung, to forbid the con-
tinuance of the succession as an appanage of the family of the
T^ushet^u Khan. The residence of the ^Hut'ukht^u, whose authority
is recognized as supreme by the T^ushet^u and Tsetsen Khanates^
is fixed at K^urun j$ jjf (Urga), where he acts as the spiritual
colleague of the Chinese Imperial Agent {see Part XI, No. 556).
The title he bears is derived from the Tibetan words Cliepimn^
^Wenerable," and Dampay " sacred." To this the Sanskrit appel-
lation Tdranatha^ signifying "resplendent divinity" is added,
whence the title of Taranatha Lama is derived as a common
substitute for the official designation. By the Mongols, the
patriarch is also frequently referred to as Maidari ^Hut^ukht^u
(from Maitreya, the Messiah of Buddhism). He is likewise
described as Gheghen (f.«., the Great) 'Hut^ukht'u.

597. — Chu King Lama ft ^ !(IJ IHt. — The Lamaist Or-
ganization in and near Peking.

In iui^therance of their policy of ensuring the control of the
Mongolian tribes by means of ecclesiastical influences, the Chinese
sovereigns of the reigning dynasty have been profuse in the
establishment of Lamaist places of worship and official dignities
in Peking and throughout the adjacent region. The emperors of
the Ming dynasty had indeed set an example in this respect,
intrgducing the indecent Sivaitic effigies worshipped in Tibet,
which are know to the Chinese as Hwan-hi Fuh iDt S ft ( i.^.,
Buddhas of Delight), into the palace itself; but the patronage
extended to the Yellow Church by K'ang Hi and his descendants
is conceived upon a far more extensive scale. Vast Lamaist
communities have been founded at Jeh-ho and Dolon Nor in
Inner Mongolia, and at Wu T'ai Shan in the province of Shansi,
where a famous temple dedicated to the Bddhisattwa Manehusri \
attracts annually crowds of pilgrims from all parts of Mongolia,
as well as in the imperial capital itself. At the imperial Mausolea,
likewise, lamaseries are established, at which services are con-
tinually performed in honour of the deceased sovereigns. The

P4lBT Xn. — TIB£T AND TH^i LAMAIST HISJUBCHT. 113

following are the principal dignitaries and other members of this
branch of the Lamaist hierarchy : —

596. — Chang-CHI A ^Hut^ukht^u j|t jK ^^ H j£ I- —
The Metropolitan. This dignitary is the acknowledged reembodi-
meat of a ^Imt^ukkt'u despatched, under the same title, to represent
him near the Chinese Court toward the close of the 17th century
by the Dalai Lama of that period. Heceived with profound
respect by the emperor K^ang Hi, h^ w^s assigned a residence at
Dolon Nor $ ^ fH (or ^ W)y ^^ *^® territory of Jeh-ho, with
powers of spiritual control over the Mongols of Ch'ahar ; and he
enjoyed the special favour likewise of the prince who afterwards
reigned with the title Yung Cheng. This sovereign converted
the palace appropriated to his use whilst heir apparent into a
vast and gorgeous monastery, which still retains its name of
Yung Ho Kung |K ft ^^ conferred upon it during his occupancy;
and, by decree of the emperor K'ien Lung, the successor of the
original Chang-chia *Hut*ukht*u removed his residence from Dolon
Nor to this place? Here the ceremony of drawing lots from the
golden urn is performed in the case of all such ^^hut^ukht^u as do
not fall within the jurisdiction of the Tibetan government; and
State services are performed under the direction of the Metropo-
litan, who is said to chang Mao ^ JK;, or wield supreme religious
sway. The principal ^hut^ukJu^u of the metropolitan organization
are enumerated below, in the order assigned to them by Decree
inA.D. 1786:

599.— MiNCHUB ^HUT^UEHT^U Ift |% W P^ ■ ]£ ■•

600.— Galdan SibSt^u <Hut'ukht<u f&Wl ^ISkV^ U
1^ ■ IS ■•

601 .— Chiluitg ^Hut'ukht^u 8| ^ 19^ ■ }£ B*
^n*» The foregoing all take rank in precedence of the tsung
k^an-pu Mimi ^ OT abbots-in-chief of the imperial lamaseries.
Eight other dignitaries of the same class, headed by the Tungkhor
JH ^ m ^Hut^ukht^u, are enumerated as dwelling at or near
Peking, beside two at Dolon Nor. (-^ Jft ^ j*, B. 52, p. 25).
The remaining ranks of the Lamaist hierarchy are as follows :

114 part xii. — tibet and the lamaist hierarchy.

602.— Chang Yin Dzassak Ta Lama ^ EO IL H j£ :^
^J ^. — Grand Chancellor of the Lamaseries (with seal of office).

603.— Fu Chang Yin Dzassak Ta Lama gij i^ Ep f L
H jE :^ 5B Ijflf.— Vice-Chancellor (as above).

604. — Dzassak Lama JL SI iS !!ip!l 8R- — Rulers or Superiors
of lamaseries. N.B, — Dzassak signifies a ruler or chieftain {see
Part. XI, No. 537).

605. — Da Lama j^ ^ |j|^. — Prior of a lamasery. This
dignitary is invested with the control over the management and
services of the monastery to which he belongs, subject to the
commands of the dzassak lama of the locality.

606.— Fu Da Lama g!| g| i| ^.—Vice-Prior.
K ! 607. — HiE^ San Lama ^ ^ IU S^. — Lamaist clergy

(without special office, but ranking above the grades mentioned
below).

608.— Te-mu-ch^i ^ ^ 5|p.— [Mong. Z^wicA'i].- Steward
of a lamasery. The dimcliH lama, subject to the authority of the
prior (see above) attends to all the secular a flairs of the monas-
tery. Also written ^ /fC ^.

609. — K^h-sze-kwei |gf Jg ^. — [Mong. Gishlmi or
CHhhui], — Precentor. Conducts the choral services.

61 0.— Keh-lung II H.— Gileng (Gylong). Priest of
the first order.

611. — Pan-ti JBE ^. — Bandi. Priest of the second order.

61 2.— Sha-pi 0^ >i:>.— Shabi. Novice.

APPENDIX.

SECTION I.-GHINESE OFFICIAX HAKKS.

The present work would be incomplete without some general
ontline, at least, of the system under which the ranks of the
Chinese official administration are organized. The bureaucracy
which forms the most active and important element in the national
life of China is a subject, indeed, not easily to be dealt witli in a
narrow compass. As the outcome of the history of two thousand
years, and inspired with traditions descending from periods of
fabulous antiquity, the huge fabric which is revered as Uio
depositary of all honour and all authority may well be thought
capable of defying attempts at analysis on any but the broadest
scale. Such particulars, at the same time, as are needed for a
general comprehension of the methods pursued in the ez^isting
organization, the results of which it has been sought to elucidate
in the preceding sections of this work, may nevertheless be briefly
assembled. The Chinese official hierarchy, as it is found esta-
blished in the Ta TsHng Hxoei Tien or Collected Institutes of the
Empire, is in all its leading features a continuation of the system
gradually established under the Ming dynasty, whose tenui*e of
power was marked, in the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries of our
era, by the introduction of the principle of universal competition
for literary degrees as the means of obtaining access to rank and
office, and by the mapping out of the territories of the Empire in
the divisions which still, for the most part, subsist. In Part IX
of the present work, the method by which advancement is obtained
in the various degrees at the official Examinations is categorically
set forth ; and it now remains to elucidate, with the help of the
details afforded by the Institutes, the system of classification
ordained for the ranks of the public service.

Under the head of s/ie tain ft |^ or the "official career,*' it
is laid down that the privilege of cli^u ahen ti] ^ or " advancement'*

116 SECTION I. — CHINESE OFFICIAL RANKS.

— in- other words, of public employ — may be obtained from eight
different starting-points, which may be enumerated as follows,
with references appended to those passages in the body of the
present work in which they have been severally dealt with:

i. Tsin She ^ i. — Metropolitan Graduate. (See Part IX,
No. 473).

ii. Ka Jen jjjk A» — Provincial Graduate. (See Part IX,
No. 472).

iii. Kung SMng ^ ^. — Senior Licentiate. (See Part IX,
No. 471).

iv. Yin ShSng Jg ^. — Honorary Licentiate.

The holder of a certificate granted in consideration of services
rendered to, or suffering undergone on behalf of, the State by a
progenitor of the person thus distinguished. According to the
circumstances of the case, the holder of such a certificate is termed
either ngSn yin shSng jg, jS £ or nan yin sliSng 11 ^ ^ (see
Part VIII, No. 455).

V. Kieti Shing ^ ^. — Collegian of the Imperial Academy
(see Part II, No. 247). Distinguished as Ngin Sheng ,@, ^,
receiving the degree after an examination, and Li ShSng ^ ^,
obtaining the same privilege by purchase, according to the now
almost invariable usage.

vi. ShSng Yoan ^ g.— Licentiate. (See Part IX, No 469).

vii. Kwan Hioh ShSng '^ ^ ^. — Pupil of the Banner Schools
pertaining to the Manchu military organization, or of the schools

■

established for the benefit of imperial clansmen.

viii. lA j[. — Government Clerk. (See Part VIII, No. 456,
Note).

The two higher classes of graduates, the Uin-she and kil-jSn,
are collectively designated as k*o Ida ch'u shSn f| 7 Hi ^ (see
Part IX, No. 467), and these, with the two next following classes,
take rank in what is ofiicially designated the chSng t^u ]f« ^ or
"proper path," i.e, the duly constituted avenue of advancement.
By courtesy, also, the remaining classes, candidates from which

SBCnOi!? K — CSIXBB OFflCUL KA:nE& 117

obUin emploTmoit thioogh the splem otpao iii {K j|| or ^^recouK
mcfidjitioDy"" L€L, sekdion br eompetefil »athorin\ mfe iiko
reoognued as baving entered the poblie serriee on m similar
fooliiig. A sabsidiaij means of obtaining rank and offiee> tbe
Han gku JS 4ft ^^ pnichase-sTstem, wbicb has no\r almo^ bope«
lesslv oTershadowed the ^' proper path/* althongh recogniaed in
the Institates and periodicallT resorted to since the days of the
Ming dynasty, owes the prodigious derelopment it has now amved
at to the necessities imposed on the Grovemment by the first war
with Great Britain and, a few years later, by the oatbreak of the
Taiping rebellion. The year 1M3 saw the introduction of a sale
of official titles, to a limited extent, which famished a precedent
for the extension of the system thronghout die Empire by a Decree
dated December 13th, 1850, sanctioning proposals to this effect on
the part of the Board of Revenue.* Immense sums of money
have been obtained, since that period, by the sale of patents of
rank or of steps of advancement in actual employ; and alUiough,
as a result of this policy, the Empire has been flooded with hosts
of titular officials, beyond all proportion to the needs of the public
service, it is undeniable that in some respects advantage has
accrued from it to the public interest. The purchase-system,
whilst admitting thousands of corrupt and incapable persons to
official positions, has at the same time opened avenues of advance*
ment to a class which is unfettered by literary traditions and
prejudices, and has tended to weaken the hold of the narrow
maxims of antiquity upon the conduct of public affairs.

In continuance of the regulations enacted under the Ming
dynasty, the existing system classifies all civil and military offices
under nine degrees of rank, or, more properly, under eighteen,
inasmuch as each rank or class— p^m a,— is divided into principal,
chSng j£, and secondary, ts^ung |£. To these must bo added a
nineteenth, or supplementary, class, embracing some of the lowest
offices, to which the name of wei juh liu ^ A j% (^*^» **the

* Ck'ow Manff She Li fl§ ffilft fft^ Memorials and Regulation! of the Board
of Bevenuei 1850.

118 SECTION I. — CHINESE OFFICIAL RANKS.

stream-not-yet-entered") is assigned. A distinction, something
analogous to which may be discovered in the Russian institution
of the tclnriy is drawn between rank, the p^in ^ as above mentioned,
with its accompanying qffiee, or chili ]||, and the actaal post or
official charge, jen ^, to which appointment may be obtained.
Although the three conditions are coordinated, in theory, by a
series of minute regulations, rank and official employ are practically
distinct and may be held irrespectively one of the other. The
rank prescribed by regulation for the incumbent of each separate
office is indicated as concisely as possible, in the body of the
present work, by combinations such as 1 a, 1 b, and so forth, for
the ^* principal" or "secondary" degrees of each of the nine
classes. For the nineteenth or supplementary class referred to
above, the equivalent "unclassed" has been adopted.

Once invested with office in any degree of rank, as the result
of competition or purchase, a Chinese official is placed upon the
list of candidates for employment in the category to which he has
been admitted, unless, indeed, as now habitually occurs, he has
purchased a simple brevet — hien ^ — without pretensions to official
employ. Whether admitted to his official position by competition
or by purchase, the candidate is required to seek presentation in
imperial audience, yin hien ^\ ^, before his claim for employment
is recognized by the Board of Civil Office or of War as the case
may be. This formality having been accomplished, the candidate
takes his turn in the periodical "drawings" which are held in
the course of each month at the offices of the Board, when the
province of the empire in which feach individual among the succes-
sive batches of candidates shall serve is determined by lot. When
nominated in this wise to a provincial staff, the candidate, be he
District Magistrate, Sub-Prefect, or Prefect by rank, on presenting
his credentials to the local government, is enrolled upon the list
of "expectants," the Iiow-pu pan ^ ^ JfiE, and resigns himself to
a period of unattached service which may last for a considerable
number of years. During this period of expectancy, however, a
variety of forms of temporary employment, in connection with the
judicial or revenue administration or upon special missions, are

SECTION I. — CHINESE OFFICIAL RAfTKS. 119

aecessible to the class of unattached officials, who discharge the
duties confided to them in this manner under the generic designa-
tion of wei yilan ^ ^ or delegates. From this expectant stage,
the duration of which may be abridged by purchase or by recom-
mendations on account of special services, the candidate at length
emerges into substantive employ, which is prefaced by a year of
probation — die yung {( ^ — made obligatory in all ranks from
that of Intendant of Circuit (Taotai) downwards. Above the
rank of Taotai, beyond which the operation of purchase scarcely
extends, the system of "expectancy" ceases to operate, officials of
the higher grades being either in continuous active employ or in
retirement. This last-named condition is frequently brought about
by means of a striking peculiarity of the Chinese system, in
accordance with which every official is liable to be withdrawn
from active service by the death of either of his parents. On the
occurrence of such an event he is required by a stringent regula-
tion to retire at once for the observance of the mourning rites —
ting yeo "J* j| — during a period of nominally three years, in reality
twenty-seven months. On the part of Manchu officials, the national
custom restricts this period of mourning to one hundred days.

Among the many devices which have been introduced in the
Chinese system, with indifferent success, to provide a check upon
corruption and misconduct, two may be especially noticed here.
One of these is the rule prohibiting civil employes of whatever
degree, with the exception of the local directors of instruction,
from holding office in their native provinces ; and another is the
practice of vacating office by the junior of two relatives who may
be brought into contact with each other, within certain prescribed
limits, in the same provincial area. This is designated hwd pi ^
^ or "respectful withdrawal" in the presence of a superior.
When to these checks upon the tenure of office is added the
virtually uncontrolled power which is wielded by the provincial
governor over his subordinates of the class of ti-fang kwan ^ jl^f
§, or "local authorities," i.«., the Prefects, Sub-Prefects, and
Magistrates or Assistant Magistrates of various degrees, in the
exercise of his functions of "impeachment" or "denunication" —

120 SBCTIOIT I.— K3HmESB OFFICIAL RANKS.

ts^an hSh jff^ ^ — as a result of which wholesale removals or
degradatious continually occur, it will be seen that the position of
a Chinese official^ especially in. the lower ranks, is at all times
eminently insecure.

With the foregoing particulars respecting the structure of
the public service in China, the indications embodied in the several
parts of the present work may be found the more readily avail-
able. For a host of questions relating to minor details, such as
cannot fail to suggest themselves to the student's mind, there
can be no escape from the necessity of consulting the stores of
information classified in the Ta IVing Hwei Tien and its vast
appendices.

SECTION II. — THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF DISTINCTIVE, &C. 121

SECTION II.-7THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF DISTINCTIVE

COLLOCATION OF CHARACTERS.

An element of Chinese composition, due in part to the structure
of the language itself, and in part to the rigorous formality of
its written style, is the "elevation" of characters by different
degrees as a means of indicating respect or reverence in varying
gradations of importance. This graphic expedient takes the place,
in fact, of the employment of either capital letters or a more
conspicuous form of type in alphabetic languages, for the repre-
sentation of honoured names or ideas; and, whilst its significance
is infinitely more extended than any of the devices in vogue for
the expression of respect, either at present or in past times, in
Western countries, the system is applied under circumstances and
subject to rules which cannot be safely ignored by any student of
the language.

The canon according to which the elevation of the written
character is regulated is laid down with much minuteness in the
K'o Ch'ang T'iao Li l^^iSk W? or Rules for the Literary Ex-
aminations; but it is needless to undertake, for the purposes of
the present work, any more than a condensed analysis of these
prescriptions. The principle upon which the system is based
may be most readily explained by premising that, as the ordinary
method of writing in Chinese consists in the arrangement of
characters, one after the other, in vertical columns, each column
being, under ordinary circumstances, complete from top to bottom,
respect is indicated by the elevation of certain characters to the
top of the column next ensuing after the context, or to still- higher
positions above the general level, as the case may be. Passing
over, for the moment, the most ordinary token of respect or
courtesy — that of position two spaces above the general upper plane
— ithe official system of elevation is found to be divided into three

122

SECTION II. — THE CHINESE SYSTEM OF

categories, indicative of as many degrees of respect or veneration.
The three categories thus formed are distinguished as those of
"single," "double," and "three-fold" elevation, these terms
denoting the height above the ordinary level of the column to
which the character is raised. Respect for the person and
attributes of the sovereign and religious veneration for super-
natural powers may thus be indicated, as also the sentiments of
the same nature which are cherished on the part of imperial
personages themselves with reference to their ancestors or elders
and to the powers of Nature and the deities whom they worship.
The several categories, collectively designated as t^ai sieh f§ ^ or
t'ai t^ow f§ ^, may be described as follows :

I. — Tan T'ai H |g. — Single Elevation.

The raising of the character by one space above the general
level is employed in referring to the abodes of Majesty, the Imperial
Courty the attributes of government, proceedings by which the
sovereign is addressed, and supernatural powers or beings of a
secondary order of importance, together with the places at which
their worship is conducted. The following examples are selected
for the purpose of illustrating each of these subdivisions of the
present category, the syllable representing the character elevated
being printed in small capitals :

i. Tlie abodes of Majesty:

Ch^ao

m

K'UBH

m

King She

:%Gi

KUNG

fr

KuNG men

§P1

Tien T4ng

Sst mi

Tien She

Km

Tan Pi

»m

h'PMQ Ch^fin

UM

ShSng King

iSi^,

The Court.

The Imperial palace.

The Imperial capital.

The Palace.

The Palace portals.

The Halls of the Palace.
{ The Examinations held in the Palace
t (see Part IX, No. 467).

The Throne and its approaches.

The Dwelling-places of Majesty.

The capital situated in Manchuria.

DISTDIOTIVB COLIOCATION OF CHABACTEBS. 123

TszE Kin Ch*6nff «ii«-f^'^® ^^ prohibited City (the

I. Impenal preeincts).
TuAJsr-ming Yiian Q §9 H The Scuniaer Palace.

ii. Attributes of government:
KwoH Kia iM The State.

KwohT4 Hfil I"'^® coBBtStution, or dignity, of

I i}ie State.
KwoH K'o B ^ The revenue.

KuNG Ling ^ ^ The laws.

iii. Proceedings addressed to the Sovereign:
TsiK jm To offer, present.

Tsm Knng jg 3| To make tribute-offering.

KuNa Wuh ^ f§i Articles of tribute.

T^i Pao ffi a&l /^^ report (in a certain prescribed

I form).
Tsow ^ To memorialize, report to the Throne.

4(*« With reference to the character tsow^ it should be noted
that, when used in combination with the .character lo^n H, form-
ing a compound signifying " to report for the; Sovereign's informa-
tion," its position is a matter of some uncertainty. The character
whi being naturally raised by two spaces (se^ Shwang T'ai^ below,)
the tsow which precedes it is seen by some Writers to be singly
elevated, as usual, whilst others leave it Undistinguished in the
column {cMh sieh ^ jg). The following examples, taken from
different memorials in Peking Gazettes publisted in close succes-
sion, will serve to illustrate both this anomaly in actual practice
and also the system of elevation itself:

« ^ ^ M m

When used in connection with the character mingy to form
the compound verb tsow ming ^ 58> signifying "to make report
to the Throne," no elevation is given to the character*

124

SBCTIOl? U.— THE CHINBSB SYSTEM OF

She Ying Etmg
NiEN Hiang

iv. References to Supernatural Powers:
SnfiN H The gods or spirits.

SHftN Che hien yeo JUiilifil ^® ""^"'^^^ interposition of the

i. gods.

EiAKO Sh^ {C H The God of the River.

Hwo ShSn Miao !K || JM Temple of the God of Fire.

It E « 1^* (imperial) Temple of Season-

i able Response to Prayer.
^ ^ To offer incense.

It should be farther noted that in all reproductions of or
quotations from imperial decrees of a reigning sovereign, the text
of the decree is raised by one place in the document in which
it is embodied. For the text of decrees of deceased Emperors,
see below.

11. Shwang T^ai C Ii^.— Double Elevation.
This distinction is allotted to characters which refer to the
person^ aUributeSf or actions of the reigning sovereign or his con-
sort, as will be seen from the following examples :

H. M. the Emperor,
do. do.

do. do.

His Majesty.
H. M. the Empress.
The imperial (sacred) person.
The celestial countenance.

{The celestial favour, — His Ma-
jesty's grace.
An Imperial decree.
Imperial instructions.
His Majesty's assent.
His Majesty's perusal.

{An expression of the imperial will
— a rescript or edict
{The Vermilion Pencil — equivalent
to the ^^sign manual."

Ta Hwang T!

:fcaft

Hwang Ti

a«

Hwang Shano

a±

Shang

±

Hwang How

aii

Sb&NG EtlNG

mm

T*ienY«n

Jim

T<ienNo£n

%B

Shang Y6

±m

SiiNSHK

M^

YttlflN

*«

Ye Las

«IK

Cms

ChuPih

P'iChun

tt«

MiNO

Chao Eien
Pi Kikn

PiT&'ZB

Em

m

KmKTKN
K'm P'AT
K'm Ch'ai
P'ai Ch'u

mn,

mm

ftH

W ANO MllTQ

£*

{

DISTmCTIVS COLLOCATION OF CHABACTEB8. 125

{Assent, or ratification, by the sign
manual.
His Majesty's commands.
His Majesty's information.
To summon to audience.
To have audience.
To have audience on departure.
To have audience (when coming

from a distance).
As above.

Imperially appointed.
An Imperial commissioner or envoy.
To appoint.
j The so verei^'s mandate ({.a.^death-
( warrant).

By means of this double elevation of the character, the same
effect is arrived at in Chinese as is produced in Western languages
by prefixing honorific epithets to the title employed. Thus hwang
shang ^ J^, written simply in the ordinary column (as is the
case in decrees issued in the names of the Empresses now acting
as Regents), must be translated simply as '^ the Emperor;" but
Hwang Shang^ elevated according to rule, is fully equivalent to
"His Majesty the Emperor."

An application of the same system, practically established,
although not recognized as yet by any formal canon, is employed
for the purpose of designating with a proper degree of respect the
countries with which China is now in diplomatic relation. Thus,
Ying Kwoh ^ gj, set forth in the body of the column, may mean
England, English, British; but Ying Kwoh or Ta Ying Kwoh J^
^ Bl elevated two places above the line, in correspondence with
Ta TsHng Kwoh ;/l; jH H^ the designation of the Chinese Empire,
conveys the meaning of Great Britain as a sovereign state, or
"the British Oovemment"

It is important to observe that the double elevation of the
characters set forth above, and others of the same class, is confined
to references to the reigning Sovereign or his consort, on the part

126 SBCTION II. — ^THB CHINES^ STSTEK OF

of those from whom a token of respect is due. Sach characters,
when used in decrees of the Emperor himself, with reference to
his own person or acts, or in decrees issued by the Empresses
Regent, are not exalted; but when emplojed in decrees with
reference to his Majesty's predecessors on the throne (to whom
reverence is due even from the Emperor himself) they are elevated
three spaces, in conformity with the principle upon which the
following and last remaining category is based.

The character KHn 0C is not elevated in the combination
K^iii Ts^ze £k ][{;> which is appended with the signification ^^rever-
ently this [received] " at the conclusion of all rescripts or decrees
when copied out by the clerks of the Grand Council of State.
The phrase forms no part of the decree itself, and should not bo
translated *' Bespect this ! " as is often erroneously done.

III. San T ^ai H il&- — Threefold Elevation.

The respect which is due from the sovereign himself toward
his ancestors or predecessors of the Imperial line, and their places
of sepulture^ his guardians during minority, and the powers of
nature and other objects of imperial worship, together with the
temples or altars at which this worship is celebrated, is typified by
the exaltation of characters to the third degree above the general
plane. The following are examples of this form of usage :

i. Imperial ^Ancestry and Places of Sepulture:
LlEH Tsu yj Jjj^ The earliest Imperial ancestors.

LiEH TsuNG JfJ ^ The Imperial ancestors.

Sh^ng H His Sacred Majesty.

Hwang K^ao ^ ^ [My] Imperial father.

iTo " ascend upon the dragon to be
a guest on high" (said on the oc-
casion of an Emperor's decease).

T'Ai Shang Hwang ± ± 1 I ^'' ^T^ ^^^ ^""P"™" ""^^ ^"^

I abdicated the Throne.

Hwang T^ai How ^ ic i§ H. M. the Empress Dowager.

TszE KuNG ^$ ^ The Imperial sarcophagus.

Ling Ts^in ^ f^ The Imperial mausoleum.

DISTINCTIVE COLliOOATION OF CHARACTERS. 127

HwEi LiNa ;§ ^ I ^^^^ ^^ ^"® ^^ ^^^ Imperial

I mausolea (see Part I, No. 130).

ii. The Powera of Nature and Places of Warship:
T^iEN 35 Heaven.

Ti ^ Earth.

The five Temples at which imperial
■rr mc j« i-iu J sacrifices are offered to Heaven,

^^ ** ' Earth, the bun, the Moon, and the

Spirits of the Land and Grain.
T^Ai MiAO -j^ ^ The Imperial Ancestral Temple.

The Temple of the Great Exalted

Ta Kao Tien + ^ B < ^""^ ^^^^ ""^'^^ "^^""^ ""^ '"'"'''^'P

^ m a« j fQj. ^YiQ divinities of the Taoist

pantheon).

^*^f All those characters, having reference to the Emperor's
person, acts, etc., which, when used in connection with a living
Sovereign, are doubly elevated, are honoured with tJireefold
elevation when used with reference to a deceased sovereign.

RESPECTFUL ELEVATION IN CORRESPONDENCE.

Distinct from the official categories of elevation, and yet
partaking of the same nature with these, is the system pursued
in forms of courtesy in correspondence, whether public or private,
between individuals. Respect is shewn in correspondence of this
kind by elevating the name or attributes of the person addressed
to the second space above the general level of the column {shwang
t'ai). Persons of rank superior to the writer are similarly
honoured when referred to in correspondence.

A practice has grown up in the semi-official correspondence
between the Chinese Foreign Office and the representatives of
foreign Powers, in view of the constant occurrence of passages
requiring respectful elevation, in accordance with which all
references to the individual addressed, on either side, are merely
raised to the head of the column (pHng t^ai 2|i J§). The following
is an example of this method ; —

128 SECTION IL — THE CHINESE STSTEM OF DISTINCTIVE &C.

M

K

*

m

^

m

li

±

m

m

— '

A

p.

^

m

m

m

ffr

z:

»

5*

^

il

m

5*

*
m

Both in this style and in that of ordinary correspondence, all
references to the person or attributes of a Sovereign necessitate
elevation in accordance with the usual rules.

In the issue of Proclamations, characters referring to the
imperial person, court, etc., are similarly elevated in accordance
with the rules set forth above. Beferences to superior authorities
are dignified by elevation to the head of the column (p^ing t^ai

An additional token of respect for individuals of superior
rank is found in the practice of leaving a blank space, equivalent
to one character, immediately following the name of the official
referred to, when this is raised, with its accompanying title, to
the head of the column. In cases where respect in a modified
degree may be due to any official person, whose name is not
entitled however to actual elevation, the desired result is obtained
by leaving a blank space above the first character of his official
title in the body of the column.

In printed books, where it is important to economize space,
the degree of "elevation" to which a character is entitled is fre-
quently indicated by a blank space extending over a corresponding
number of characters within the column. The courtesy of
"elevation" it may also be noted in conclusion, is not extended
to the Sovereigns of dynasties preceding that which is actually
upon the Throne.

SECTION III.— CHINESE RENDERINGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. 129

SECTION IIL-CHINESE RENDERINGS OF

EUROPEAN TITLES*

L — ^Titles of Sovereigns and Bulers.*

Queen of Great Britain and Ireland.— :7a Ywg [KwoK\
Ta Knn Chu :fc ^ [g] :fc S ±- (In the Treaty of Nanking,
1842, and the T^aty of Tientsin, 1858, the term Ta Ying Kan
Chu :fi^1S i ^^ employed as the equivalent of Her Majesty's
title; and this precedent, as introdaced in the rendering of the
Treaty of Nanking, has been followed in the translation of the
words ^^King'' or ^^ Queen" in the majority of the treaties
negotiated with European Powers. In order to bring the title of
Her Majesty more into harmony with that of the Emperor of
China — described as Ta TsHng Ta Hwang-ti :kfll:kdi ft — ^®
phrase was slightly altered in the rendering of the Convention of
Peking, 1860, thenceforward standing as it is given above, i.6.,
with the addition of the word Ta or ^^ Great" to the characters
Ktln Chu).

Empress of India. — Yin-tu Haw Ti PPft j§ ft. (Creden-
tials of Ewoh Sung-tao, Envoy Extraordinary to Great Britain,
October, 1876).

EiiPEROR OF the French. — Ta Fah Kwoh Ta Hwang-ti ^
life ■ A fi ft* (French Treaty of Tientsin, 1858).

President of the United States. — Ta Met Kwoh Ta PSh-
U-nih'^t'ien'tSh ^HHi^fdiiS^tt. (Additional Articles
signed at Washington, 1868. The rendering of "President" by
the phonetic compound given above was originally adopted at the
negotiation of the first United States' Treaiy with China in 1844,
and it has continued subsequently in use as the recognized equi-
valent for the title of the elected Rulers of republican — min chu

* These are invariably elevated by two spaces above the general level (skwang
tai). See Pftrt II, arUe.

130 SECTION m.— CHINESE RENDERINGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES.

J5 i — communities. The designation selected for the United
States, in the Treaty of 1844, was Holi Chung Kwoh ^ ^ gj, —
a term adopted with the view of expressing the Federal character
of the United States' aiSministration ; and in the Treaty of Tien-
tsin, in 1858, the rendering was expanded into the following
characters: Ta A^mei-li-kia Holt Chung Kwoh ;K; 3S % 3 S
^ fk W' ^"4^ unwieldy compound has now, however, been
abandoned in favour of the designation employed in 1868).

Czar of Russia. — Ta Ngo-lo-aze Kwoh Ta Hwang-ti :^ ^
li ^ B :fc S: ^* (Treaty of Peking, 1860. In the translation
of the Treaty signed at Tientsin by Count Futiatin, in 1858, the
twm employed is Teze Chwan Chu ^ 4^ £9 by which, apparently,
"Autocrat^' is meant to be rendered. In the concluding article
of the same Treaty the expression Siting Chu Hwang-ti £ ^ S
^ — Sacred Lord and Emperor — is applied to the sovereigns of
both the contracting Powers).

German Emperor. — Ta Teh Kwoh Ta Hwang-ti :K; ^ B
^ ^ ^. (Employed in correspondence since the assumption of
the above title by the King of Prussia. The character T4h ^,
adopted as the national designation for Germany, is an abbrevia-
tion of TSh'i^he ^ ^ i^, employed as the phonetic rendering of
the word DetUsch (German) in the Treaty signed at Tientsin in
1861. In this instrument, the King of Prussia is designated as
Ta Pu Kwoh Ta Kun Chu^^%:)^1^ i).

Emperor-King of Austria-Hungary. — Ta Ngao-aze Ma-

km Kwoh Ta Hwang Shang :fc|i*fJiftlH:*;l-t' (Treaty of
1869. In this instrument, the compound "Ma-kia" is employed
as an equivalent of " Magyar-orszdg," or Hungary).

King of Denmark.— Ta Tan KwohTa Kan Chu :fzitWi
*S ±- (Treaty of 1863).

King of the Belgians.— Ta Pi Kwoh Ta Kan Chu ^ flj
B ^ S £• (Treaty of 1865. In this instrument, Pi^lUshe
vHi ^ JHf ^^ adopted as the rendering of Beige or Belgique).

King of the Netherlands.— Ta Ho KwoJi Ta Kun Chu
:fc % B ifc S £• (Treaty of 1863. In this instnuneBt, the

SECTION III. — CHINESE RENDEBINOS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. 131

older designation Ho-lan ^ ||f, formerly in use as the equivalent
of " Holland," was superseded by the character given above).

KiiJg of Sweden and Norway. — Ta Jui-tien Kwoh No-wei

Kwoh Ta ^«n aw ^ § H H J5 IS a * ^ i- (Treaty of
1847).

Queen [or King] of Spain. — Ta JUi-sze-pa-ni-a Kwoh Ta
Kun C/m :fc' H JB B ;e 35 H :^ g ±. (Treaty of 1864.
According to this instrument, the name Lu-sung g 5|5, from
LuQon, the native designation of the Philippine Islands, which
is commonly applied to Spain itself by the Chinese, should be
abandoned).

King of Italy.— Ta 1 Kwoh Ta KUn Chu^H/^Jgi :fcg i-
(Treaty of 1866).

Mikado of Japan. — No title for either of the sovereigns of
the two contracting Powers is employed in the Treaty concluded
between Japan and China in 1871. The Treaty runs in the name
of the two countries, Ta TsHng Kwoh ::X; JH BJ and Ta Jih-pin
Kwoh :;K; B ^ B* The equality of the two Powers is fully expressed
in the position of the characters and in other needful respects).

President of Peru. — Ta Pi Kwoh Ta Peh-li-sze'tHen-Uh ^
IKB:fcf6aM35S- (Treaty of 1874. In this instrument, Pi-lu
^ ^ are the characters employed to represent the word Peru).

11. Designations of Governments, Departments of State,
and Public Functionaries.

The Government (head of the State). — Ch^ao THng, f| ®;
or Kwoh Kia B ^.*

The Government (Ministers of State collectively. — Ch^ao I

* It should be noted also that the word Kwoh B alone is not unfrequently
used in the sense of " Goyernment/' in which case it is elevated (tan fai) by one
space above the general column level — See Part II, ante. Thus, in the combina-
tion Ting Kn>oh ^ ■, elevation as above stated would convey the meaning
^'British Government;" whereas, when employed without elevation, the same
characters would signify ^* England" (or Great Britain), *' British" or "English,"
without reference to the soyereign or the government

132 SBCTION III.— CHINESE RENDERINGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES.

Ta Ch'hi t8i%^^\ or, Piy^g K'nan Ta Ch'hi J|l:feS- ^^y
T'ing Ch'iu g g.

The Imperial Parliament (of Great Britain and Ireland).—

/ a% Kxooh Hum li ift B #•
The Upper House Shang T^ang

The Lower House Eia T^ang

Member of Parliament Kwoh Hwei Ts^an I
The Privy Council Chung Koh

Privy Councillor Chung Koh Ts^an I

Cabinet
Treasury
Home Office
Foreign Office
Colonial Office
War Office

±

Admiralty

India Office

Board of Trade
Post Office

Shu Mill Yuan
Tu Che Yarn
Nui Ching Yamin
Wax Chhig Yamin
Fan ChSvg YamSn
Ping ChSng Yarn/n

{Shuei She Ping Ching
Yam4n

( Tsung Li Yin~tu Ching
\ Wuh YamSn

Shnng Ching Yamin
Yeo Ching Yamin

^^^

Local Government Board Hu Cliifng Yamin
Office of Works Kung Citing Yamin

High Court of Judicature T'ung Fah Sze

First Lord of the

TrlJ^'ryCP^^^^^^ ^^n Show Siang flgJgKt*

Cabinet Minister Ch^tng Siang

Chancellor of Exchequer Tu Che Y&an She
Lord Chancellor La Fah Ta Hioh She

Judge Nieh Sze

Under Secretary of State ^M Li Ta Ch'in

Clerk of a Department SeeXwan^'^^otTeungJPanig^^

SECTION III. — CHIKBSE RENDERINGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES. 133

Chancellor of University Chang YUan Hioh She
Lord Lieutenant

Lord Mayor

Alderman

Justice of the Peace

Barrister

Police Magistrate

Police

Tsieh Tu she 0£^

Chih Nien Show She Shin K'i || :^ #$i^^

Shin KH

Chang Fah Sliin She

La She

Pu Wuft Che Swei

(Pu Yih or
\ Ch'a Kiel Ping

III. Diplomatic and Consular Titles.

Ambassador

Envoy and Minister
Plenipotentiary*

Minister Resident

Charge d' Affaires

}

Secretary of Legation

Chinese Secretary

Consnl-General

Consul

Vice-Oonsol

Interpreter

Consular Assistant

Student Interpreter

f T'ow ting KHn Ch'ai
I Ta Ch'Sn

Urh tSng KHn Ch'ai
Ta Ch'en

fSan tSng ICin Ch^ai
\ Ta Ch'Sn

Shu KHn Ch'ai Ta Ch'in

Ts^an-tsan $9 (in dif-
ferent classes, as 1st
Secretary, T^ow teng

Ts'an^tsan M ^ ^ 9t,
^ and so on).

Han Wuh Ta^an-tsan^
Tsung Ling She Kwan
Ling She Kwan
Fu Ling She Kwan
Fan Yi/i Kioan
Fu Fan Yik Kwan
Fan Yih Hioh ShSng

AS

* The fuU title assigned to Her Britannic Majesty's Minister Plenipotentiary

inChinaisasfoUows: * iS^ «k H S fj + * ffi !£ fx » ;/t 6- The

ordinary designation employed in conversation and correspondence is chu Una

ta oh e/i it 3§C :;^ E- The expressions kung she ii^ ^y and she chin ^ Eg,
heretofore often erroneously used in correspondence, have been formally aban-
doned by the Chinese government.

t This rendering is adopted in lieu of the expression Han Win Cheng She

SI 3t iE ffi> formerly employed m the equivalent of " Chinese Secretary,"

134 SECTION ni. — CHINESE BENDERIHGS OF EUROPEAN TITLES.

jjVban-

British Supreme
Court (Shanghai)

Chief Judge of \ ^r ic ci

oupreme Court j ^

Deputy Chief Judge Fu Nieh^sze

Law Secretary Sze^li Hieh-shSn Kwan

cli^a She YamSn fiJSf'ffi^W

^m^

19:% PJ

IV. Indian and Colonial Titles.
Viceroy of India <

Yin-tu Til Kien Tswh Tu PPSftlttiUt
Ta Ch'Sfi

Commissioner of a \ rr i' m j-itc^

Tmng-tuh
Hieh4i Ta Ch'4n
I Cheng Kuh
Ting Li Kuh
Fu Chhig Sze
Ngan^ch'a Sze
Fu Nieh Sze

Province

Governor of a Colony

Lieutenant-Governor

Executive Council

Legislative Council

Colonial Secretary

Chief Justice

Puisne Judge

Registrar-General
of Hongkong

Harbour Master

Superintendent of Police 5«n Pu Kwan

V. Military and Naval Titles:
a. Army.

Commander-in-chief, \Ping Ma Yuan Shwai or JcMICfib; or
- -^'"-'-^ ^--^"^ f King Lioh %^ ^^ '^^^ '

}■ Hwa Min ChSng Wuh Sze ^JglgfciJr^
Ch'wan ChSng Ting JlSttJi

or Field Marshal
General

Lieutenant-General
Major-General
Brigade-General
Colonel

Tsiang Kiln jflFJS

T'ow'teng TH-tuh Kiln-m^^^^^^lgif^
TH'tuh Knn-mSn ||§ 5 f^

Tmng^ping ^£^

Fu-tsiang gjjff

♦ The foregoing titles, from "Executive Council" downwards, are taken from
a list officially published by the government of Hongkong, in Notification No. 210
of December 28th, 1874. The word cJi'u /£, it may be noted, would be prefer-
able, in substitution for kilh ^, in the rendering of " Council."

SXOTIOK m.— CfHINESfi BENDSBIKOS OF SUROPBAK TITCB8. 185

Lientenant-Colonel Ts^an-tsiahg ^JK

Major Yeo'ki fj^^

Captain Tu-sze |P^

Lieutenant . Show^pei i^H

Sub-lieutenant Ts^ien^tvung if||

Sergeant Pa-'tsung IQH

Corporal Wautvei f/^,^

Private Ping^ting Jg^f

Cavalry soldier Ma Ping JB||^

Artillery „ P'ao Ping ^^

Infantry „ Pu Ping ^|^

Engineer Km ^ung Ping IRXI?

Military Secretariat; & ) ^. „ , ^,

Military Secretary f ^'""S^ ^"* <^*'" SSA

Adjutant Ft'A Chang Hg

Aide-de-camp CAMnjf JTiXn ij^jv

Surgeon /^w^an ||<g»

Commissariat, and 1 ^ . ^, .

Commissaiy / ^'^''9 T'at ^^

b. Navy.

Commander-in-chief Shuei-^ske T'ung Ling ;j^mKfi|

Admiral / T'ow-Ung Shuei-she Ti^tuh M^il:U%!fH

\ KUn-mSn [SIK*

Vice-Admiral (Urh^tSng Shui^she Ti^tuh nflf^fiPJUl

( KUn-^mifii [Sn

Rear- Admiral (San-tSng Shuei-she Ti^tuh Hft^Jtttiilf

Commodore Shuei-she Tsung^t'ung ;jt6V||!|||

Post-captain (senior) Tmng-^Ping mSi

do. (junior) Fu-tdang mm

Commander Ts'an-tsiang ^^

Surgeon IKwan jg>^

Lieutenant-commanding YeO'ki MWt

• .The ordinary colloquial designation for an Admiral is Shuei-sh<, rutuh.
The title £iin MH is employed only in correspondence.

ids sBcmoir m.-^-ORijrBBx xsNDSsxikn of xmK^ sah mm.

Lieutenant (ainior)

Tu'8ze

mn

do. (junior)

Shaw'pei

^m

Sub-lieutenaai

Ts^ien-isung

^m

Engineer Offioer

Sze Lun Kwm

nnt

Midshipman

Eioh Shhig

m^

Warrant Offioer

Tauten FSng

m«

Petty Offiear

Lififf'-ts^ui

mm

Seaman

P'ao Show

m^

Marine

Pu Ping

**

Secretary to an Admiral Ying Wuh Ch^u

«»«

Flag LieoteiMint

Chung KUn

+:»

Surveying Offroer

Ts'ih^liang Kwcm

Mfttr

KBLLT k WAL8B, UMTISD, PEIKTSBB, SHAKaHAX.

INDEX OF CHINESE CHAEACTEES.

— BADICAL 1.

■^ H*|373,iii, Hj||283;
= ^472;HK86;
Ha 136; Hat 136;

jft79;H^l«0«C
517;HJ»«rM182,x,

H M « 414; ± IB
K86.

T S » 379.

;p X A fl' 23, 24.

T

iu.

IS IS ^10, 39; ill S 455;
igg^454;-KS9{583;
i£ 11^^28, 454 ;i!|
«j!E®387.

o&-% i^\i^ 288.

I RADICAL 2.
4* +«2;4»^135; + tt

147 ; ift K H 148 ; (f*

±

kiu

3l

wu

fT«272; + U;^^

456; 4» it :* * 456;
+ 2g 274; + H it
272 ; rf. II 273, 453 ;
*f* ^ 576.

'^ RADICAL 3.

chu i^l;i^65,166;i
Igt 166; i 0227, 292.

Za RADICAL 5.

:ft. PI S * 348; :ft. fi
A 456;^ 6 517.

J RADICAL 6.

y« «a3E48.

H RADICAL* 7,

"^ i:p291;-^477;-
& * A 456.

S# 200, 231; SHU
±211;£tiE265;

£i«342;3LM^£
189, 342.

138

INBBZ OF CHIHBSB CHARACTBBS.

king

RADICAL 8.

^, ^ 339.

8%n

\ RADICAL 9.

ling

«||S t 356.

rf» if SI 207 J if « US 456
i^WHSLt^ 456.

^«!rt«362j>^:^ft301.

cfcih i^ ^ M 379.

peh
tso

m

the

she

1? 5$ 569.
>^ 289.

#^BHE515;fll!^}||

St 557.

ffi 455 ; f6 ^ 532, 563 ;
(6 « m 373, iii.

«tl5l97;tE5|322;ffi
15: 288; B m 387,
429, 544.

^|ttpS85:f#j^ff

g96;#lr>l«l;f#
iai86;#g|206;f#

Hl^ ± 204; f^ ^
205; ft 18 ^±203.

^ n 468.

M^iT ^i%S411.

ch'toan. ft |t 477.

*•««» ^ ^ 334.

iS ft ^3 492; Itm 493;
ft jE 394 ; ft t 495.

S ft K ^471.

JL RADICAL 10-

^

*«>««<» 3fc«^#230;3feil;*:*

456.

«

w. j£ 5i l!5 i 53 ; ^ ft :S
512.

Jioui g| 455.

P3

nu*

7^ RADICAL 11.

^83;^iiil§83;
ft|gl34;ftgi^±

143;ftSf#fl^±
144;feS|irS151i

raOBX OF OHIHXen OEABiLCTBBS.

18»

147 ; ft 5lh SI 1& 508 ;
ft «| 83, 379; ft :^ E
93;ft««5f62;ft||
483; ft JK: 16 1^ 483 ;
«ll«^482.

««w^ ffi K 274.

A RADICAL 12.
-t

pah Aa[379;;\p«J|A466.

*tmj ^ 21, 455 ; ^ i 12 ; ^

+ ^ » 387.

:^ ^ 153, et seq.; jf; ^
247; pf; ^ 188.

^S|J156;£^Ji280;
:S ^ W it » 343; jg
ll^@Jitl|344.

liu

J9L

*«35;J(tJ|212,253;
H jg 146, 341, 254;
4k A 294.

kim II 455 ; ^ ^ 339.
RADICAL 14.

iman M9L^ 112.

JJ RADICAL 18.

^387.

ch! iW SP 273 ; fij ^ 273.

JO

««*« M A ^84.

SI]

1»5l;^Ei07;fl5r«Ef^

«S403;fr«[S405;

m»433; nn^

401 ; Hr IR 564.

SII«187;glJA334;giJ
SC ^ 340 ; lU H ^
471; glja^t 58;
glj ii H f@ 384; glj
||{ H 370, 381, 427 ;
glj JH 442 ; glj 3^ 442 ;
glj I? 448 ; glj HJ 492 ;
glj^ ^336; gH ^
472;glJlB164;g||g
■& 338 ; glj m 378 ; glj
m 306-; glj i ^ 480 ;

glj ^t 480; glj IK «
480;g|jJt^|Ll]£
:X: i«j l« 603 ; glj ^ Hi

Wl 606 ; glj gS :g 536 ;
glj JNf :S 552.

;fy RADICAL 19.
^» |&»256.

fidtl

15 455.

140

INDEX OF CHIKIBSS CHABACTEBS.

yung M ^^9 ; 465.

Uumj 3^ M ^66.

Wan Si ^ 550.
hun ® If ffi M 387.

iS

nan

1i

^ RADICAL 20.

-a

Q^ 36,379; Q^^

m37;€i^«m38.

{i RADICAL 21.

-f* RADICAL 24.

.Wfc +At272;qi|®i[5]8.

t.*e» ^ ^335; ^5^447 ;=f-

II 447.

pL ^MBM 388.

»:*:E56i;iawt5t

573 ; ia a ^ W 540.

llf4b#*El52;iflS

88;* 1)1247; if*
M259.

If i 240, 252.
f* RADICAL 25.

-^ » 517.
P RADICAL 26.

fP l!r « IR 382; EP » «
5?, 385; fpjgtsgi.

Jtinj ^ 232.

j^ /^ S" 182, ii;

4C a 585.

cho ^mB9i511;^;g1|}
577; $. ^ If fUM^ 594.

^k iai»*Jiil36;KI?
136; IS at K5 175, 245;
ft 439 ; ia •& 442 ; 18
^428;iaiK352;JS;

ngih

«hoio

P RADICAL 27.

JE # It 518.
J^ RADICAL 28.

^ {R 37, 382, 383, 384,
543;^»295;«i3^
443 ; 3R {» 443; ^ HT
443 ; « K :fc E 558.

% RADICAL 29.
li^ S 150, 483, 487.

INDEX OP CHINMB CHAKACrTERS.

141

t'at

yeo

%

sze

P BADICAL 80.

^ iS 538 ; ^ it 550.

$#II5161;^|f1fl99;

»iafel87,274;^
**& + A225;;e#
«^«-? 223; ^3g
294. See 2£.

3 439; gJH 282, 284 J
SI§ 152, 166, 343;
^1152;^iS^

343, 344; 3 fl^ 33;
^E 171; ^ I E
422 ; ^ a 305 ; g |5f
11182, iii; ^ HI 306;
nm$S^ 176; ^ IK
246; fl^ 170,302;

R)^279;^|gjg2%
.i|224;^|jfl68;g
II|250;SIJJ167.

i^h # W tt Ejf 425.

§ # i|S 373.

ehao

It

:fc g 585.

^»282;^^f^481;

1^ Ji ± ffl # 477.

£ ^ 153; |g ^ 456;
fi S 287, 345.

1^

•hu
'ho

'ha

■^if« 374; If II 1(3^
585; If IJISSB 589.

■

*Hi^iJ4;ft^®ja
3E 17; ftS^JiJE
173; %iW^^ Mm
174; ft ^!|t 521, 525.

»&S3£582;I^Pi||
#533.

eMh

yOan ^ ^ ^ 164.

s/iao P^ 439.

KM

'^ «l«||684;!Ba|585.

«M;f:95iO;||f^^

# G 596.

ea«g JS'j5r#564.

»'«»«? lar^t 4#E570; isf J:

568.

««|i$517;|$nf8gp«

11314; l$1i«£i|
512;l|flirii!}iC.611.

*ltffi^279;||«t
496.

m W :ll}- il P$ ■ 587,
600;|!Hlr||567;|!g
S567.

<^n

P

ka

142

n

SMe

INDEX OF CHINBSB CHARACTBES.

wei

±

JH RADICAL 31.

|J5^ 614; 18^548.
Bill 379; Hill ^^

20 ; a jisr a i 13.

B£f|215.

yi«.» m RQ a 88 ; n i^ SI A

IE 416 ; H Jg 585,

g^ 436,548; g^lit
437 ; B ift H ^ 438.

i RADICAL 32.

± t 328 ; ± ;l5f W fg
328;±g329;±|R

^511; ±m^^
5-^0; ±j»HfFfi5517.

ft'au ^ ^ 588.

tJ^g fe & 469.

IB « 374. ii.
± RADICAL 33.

&ng 5ft ^ 439, 452.

to

fari art 344.

a «iHM357;J«P5l|
3S9 ; « 1^ J» 371 ; J8
ii « 506.

?S tt 162; ^115+ 64;
^ i l|p 65, 165.

^ #1|182, xvi.

;^ RADICAL 36.

«> «| 879 ;«» 11483 ; ^
£«'&486;^IH:«
©487;^^^^
449 ; ^ ^ }C «| 450.
«»SSIl&M6;«»Ji508.

«J19; |;#tl&598.

^ Radical 37.
:*; fl «l 162 ; :fc ^, ffi

162 ; :*; ^ Ji 162 ; :fc

^Jg 162; rfc^a?
162;:^i8iat479;:fc

l&l* 188;. :km±

135;:^:^289;:^g
396;:^a443;^^

472 ; :^ i ^ 479 ; :«:

S 5Sf 195 ; :^ 31 # JBI
196;:^a#iJ?j|pi07;

iNDBX or casmtsB ohibactbbs.

143

t*ai

flng

wei

232;:fc^^232;:^
ff A250;:*;f|j|ft232.

35 III if » 557.

*Slil37;*Jil38

«#229;t*247;
i:«K 268; i;!^
281.

M^ M'M 565.

H a ^ 22 ; ^ g ;i|
I|27;$g.j(|3it28;
1^ a ^ 88 ; *1t 233;

456 ; $ H ;X; * 456.

Uow H ^ iS 1^^'

;^ RADICA L 88.
/« iB *. 5, 6.

*±*66;
31^ 102; H
m 355 ; ^Ji
390, 432 ; -^

«404.

p-m jjj[ 7.
pin

■y* BADICAL 39.
tsze ^ 455.

?L

^'ung F^ 9 214.

Wao tSK118;^]g|i|119;

478.

/ao/^

» »#fiI5 456;jg| A456.

mm 258, 304; |p|^ 257;
#1 K 323 ; 4fi ^ 323 ;
^ j^ 323.

*^ BADICAL 40,

'9't446;*3*JiJ446;«3i
|$g439; <^281.

Sr«^^334;^||5g
557 ; ^ A 456.

^m29;^Afl5F55;^

J|l58;^,^^iie99;

^fe232;^?&a564.

« * « 373.

-tJ-

ngan

tsung

ning

»«<»» 1lr»ft84;'|f.|S847,

144

INDKX or CBENBSK CHABACTBB8.

ting

8uan

il£ gij in « 332 ; ^

e|128; J£}$582.

r JK A 456.

n 331 ; JteiB 456 ;
ItaiAS 436 ; 1[ $il W

^ m 315.

«»136;g/t221;g
K 226 ; ;& :fc 225 ; ar

Jcung

;r ^4B]35;^ 11538.

ch'a. gfF|gJH?595;^B&
HIOSII 349 ; ^ n^ 18

527.

«m^363;«i||^
364; ft £4.57.

^t* JRADICAL 41.
Z # ^ 198, 234.

it

^9 ^456; »» 456.

uSng )» SI 25 to 28, 367, 426,
456, 557.

'J

siao

4

Si «««490.

>^^ 3ADICAL 42.

>J«%»133;>J,^«
418;*J>^j||200.

:hao *p^ 162 ; tp^i^ 162 ;

'>^ (6 162 ; >> fl H

162 ; fj? SI 3g 162 ; iJ?
^ S 162 ; 4|^ 1$ 140
4? 1i 141 ; il? » 142
0? fll 233 ; >> If 222
fj> ^ 222, 294 ; fl? fj
JI«250;iJ?^294;>>
Jj!f 294.

thanir fq 41^ 160.

ill RADICAL 46.
lU

shan III # 491.

^«j #!SCl1ffi«460.

c/iott;

A«<

«iin

(^< RADICAL 47.
jH1272,284;iW^J^285;

m n 286 ; m^m

286 ; !Hi 1^ 285.

^11274; JSS^Ji 273; JSS
m 293 J JS as 348.

X RADICAL 48.

X

i^n« X tt 138-

iKOK ov cHimBfiS' cn^RAaneasai

tao

pa

145

2fe ^ US 161; £ IS fim

185;/fc^glJ«lllA
187; 2fe;ef#gE 198,

234;^3&ff*l®9;
4«?»ffitt861;2fe

ft29l;£^«tSr«E
li!ffi402;£$i[J^

+ *225;2E;ei6|ij

264; ^>&K^270;

««rJ|.|l:^349;^

«iEar«^223;2£

«.JE- 504; 4:^11

ft 496; 2£;&rlltt

505;2£«ft||499;
£«&l&498;£«

W « 497; ^ ;& MJI
507;2£^JiJ| 506.

g< RADICAL 49.

a W If 628 ; B # 512;
B ■# 465; a^p
565 ; B Jg.ff- 587.

r|j feADICA L 50.

«ftiS^^275;$if|#
^2; ;iir«i||#533.

c'Vo»j flj ^£ 9.

pang

«j»*E 561, 564, 565;

f* RADICAL 5^:
•« ^ JE 180; 236.

Vu

*W«|290; jj5f^339,
368; J(SF272,281j ;fip
S 66, 340, 369.

iij||617,596;j$||'if
»*B5S6;J»:^«
297; jS|||297.

rtnj Jg 272.

fi aW±210,473;|l|flJ
11210.

Zin

«5: ai«294; Altf 276.

St, n x 303^ a ^ -a' «7.

ji ^ 470; sum So. 470-
iJL RADICAL 54.

fing |g |IJ 196.

^ RADICAL 57.

jiarjr48a

;f RADICAL 60.

igA:f:Si06; ag

564.

v« tt|-Mr:X:S 103; i||tj#

« 104; »m^j|

mt

how

146

INSIX OV CHmiSE CHAB1CTBB8.

105;|ip£189;tt|£
«HB271.

M at 31 305 ; at IS 9C Ift
305 ; at M 306; at fj
m « 306.

cvSis at ft ^^56.
tfh* ^ 7t^ H ^^^•

i^v RADICAL 61.

tf^

r -tgais*.

fA

fc'io t^ ^ ■ 556.

SI

■ ^ JBS^471;lli455;
f.ttj»455;lSi:467.

hung ^ A 456.

IS B H 130 ; lit « 557.

S

Ain ft ^ ^ 81.

u »g| 126; Big 11127.

mu

*•<»? JK S 9 '^^•

:^ RADICAL 62.

tSi 18 5$ 579.

^ RADICAL 63.

hu, ]^ % 154.

fomg § ^ 481.

■^ RADICAL 64.

if

cfti fL§!|*510; }L#!|#

5il;fLS$ilfF%

517 ; ft SI ^ 537 ; ft,

»&«i:>531;afPft*

564, 586 J }L 1 }£ l«l
8^604.

ta Jrtt375.

It

p=< It i^^:^ ^312.

cV^git^l!|5456;3|^l[^lrigfc
-^^272.

pa IE H 448.

'a ^m&47i.

eft" ®W^327;Sltffi3
333.

e][e ^ IS is ^ 330.

S * S E 266.

l^n «gS276;«tt469.

^ lifiEmi!)283;|gfi274.

IKDSX OF CHOnSl CHASACT1B8.

147

^ Sa«182,xv.

show a 456.

^1^

£189;Sfl|^75;

m^m^j^mm 602.

?an ll«476.

« HIB 150,217; Jgfit
485 ; H iH 182, xvi; H
^440;Ji^440;||
#:>Ln348;Ji|f^
n347;S#||K323.
H fl 309 ; ii g 439

? «K274;a|^274;a|
3t274;a|g439.

m m 329.

J^ RADICAL. 66

.7^ IR Si 150, 483, 487.
ioi Bfc±«i«328.

^ JKl$303;tfc||305;»
•g 472, 303—306.

5)at

mtti

1=/ «:«r456.

ao

m

san

ttW*393jttff512.

«t|210;«!W284;tfc

ft:fcE9*-

^<;tt«firn5.

;^ RADICAL 67.

tSr 3SC*JR135;UtS323;

i|^182,xviii;^JK
11273.

>5r RADICAL 70.

& *f6 275; J5r^t|150;
* ft 492.

Hi IR379.

RADICAL 72.

ev?»9 lg!124:g|fttl25.
^j, ^j|Sf289;l)Q|l9lf^580.*

cAao US W 19! 117; BH ifiji B

512.
wnj il; K 120.

ch'o^ d $ H 88.

148

iHmx OF eHmn ohasacubs.

RADICAL 73.

Bg 4&1A.

ttSI78.
^ RADICAL 74.

" «i!t473;im^*456.
;t; RADICAL 75.

e» *tlit!|#510,519;tt

r»«j )KS2,10;}KWI|116;

m^ 135; mmm

583 ; 3K H ^ 365.

^ iEt«Jftl89.

3P, S 512.

^t Kf 45A; t JB a 609;
# K 610.

nai

panflf tff BR ^"7^-

ngan

m » 468.

£ i;g }$ !N Ml 593.

^ flltB57l.

yoh I!lflll59j!||^177,

S* 1t»209;4i|«321,

ftll:fc*456.

^ RADICAL 76,

w« fir 35 11260.

ywfiflf

Tiivow St 4P 'ft ^^' '

Jh RADICAL 77-

jg 281, 289 ; iEft 379;
jE 6 379 ; jE IE 379 ;
aE« 8.79; jE*t
479 ; jE HJ 492.

^ ^ m S 347, 406 ; ^ W
«ltli348;^a«f354.

«

^ ^^JBJ35;|$J8if£
^ 182, xi; It-t K
87;|CJB|t»||3182,

xvii ; IS m « 273.

592.

8Ut

INEKEX OF

OKABACZBBS.

149

jt RADICAL 79.

J^J RADICAL 81.

pi Jfc532; Jfcfi5l57.
^ RADICAL 83.

min J5 "pp 153.

;}C RADICAL 85.

439; JlCtt^ 435;
iCmm^ 282.

s-wn- p\ 439.

690;a?^ir^589;a?

81 516.

fto^ j!Jii818;JiJ^326,439;
?i?]ltilirii|g«326;
Rr fe J9F 318.

;um ff 516.

cS7 Ji&+341jjg_j||.21l4.

f«? «R121;«]|tR122.

9l§t

«»»? IB iff 1601.

hao f&ff#513.

AiT j»iP88;JtKflift282;

JIIBII£$324;^^

327.
ai ^ 505.

yen

shuh ^ A 456.

hwo fg ^ 564, 589.

i&g «S3182;fS^^3^
524, 562.

ts?o ?fgi«S827;?f g439.

han ]§| ^^ 379.

e7 »li60];.ifji^i|ii|591.

v^ Ji 4fc 376, 377, 378.
^ RADICAL 86.

tou
u

529; ,iifl[#614;.^
513;.it*^||J|6

4» K :^ E 553.

150

INDBZ 01 CHINB8B CHASACTEB8.

cC US » 296 ; H « 296.

%fc ^ M IB H 548.

y^g Sii^ 80; SliflS 273;
ji 379, 489; nil 410,
452.

Jt^ RADICAL 87.

t«>o't "JS S( 454.

>r BADICAL 91.

m B 578.

4=- RADICAL 93.

tieh

muh Ig^ 284.

;>« JP ^ 156.

;^ RADICAL 94.

Hit

« RADICAL 96.

ivmg I]7,46etseq.;3EKl];
Iiff31;I:^E152.

Bmm 586.

9 $ 1 55; 9ff [^ 183;

It

282; S^^ ^282;
S 9 €11 548; 115111
pi M 548.

hien, H IP dt 182, iz.

ywh S iSI 55.

4fe RADICAL 100.

aheng ^ 1 469.

BB RADICAL 102.

¥

liu

Wa f Jl 383; ^ 547; ^ Jf
581.

1^455.
e 11 210.

182, v.

ll«IBi$418.
Q RADICAL 106.

6 m 595.
■g ^ 337.

*l;a±l;^;g

2;a:k^3;SJt&
4;l«10;S^ll.

fei

pah

hiJbang

INDEX OP CHINBSB CHARACTERS.

151

JDl RADICAL 109.

9h4ng Si ^ 366.

M

^ 9 509 ; |g ;g 535.

S25lj 119263,264.
g ^ 280 ; g tf 324,
860,361; HElff 484;

g RADICAL 109.

Ii«272;li^ffl272,

chik 284.

aiang m B 135.

^f«»182. iy; «a|
274; tffM273, 439;

#l|277;§4|t#
3a3;*||Jt278j#

m H 279.

<u7i

^Ml

# « I 47.

^ RADICAL 111.

ftlJfip281;^W284;^
K289;,^^300;^

Jt*484.

.)5 RADICAL 112.

<<'«« ti^$j$69.

<M»

IIPJ

t8ze

^ RADICAL 113.

^W^^; iPi>t9IS415;
»t^*«jE238;ip|i
^ ;! it S 239.

11243.

-<J>

^ SS249;gJB^||
©424.

A'> )iB # 16.

" ll^3E46; jji^ 155.
^ RADICAL 115.

»itt f|:J' 469.

f4

*><, ^?467;^|iS5 510;

^^^^«J»:lfeE555.

shue. W^^X-ffi 314; ift
^^*ffi316.

yV RADICAL 116.

**«»? $• M 60.

jfe RADICAL 117.

hang * ]§( 133, 385, 517; ^t

X 9 ■ 3£ H 598.

fimg Ht^ 468.

152

INDEZ Of CHUnUlK 0HA£AJCT1IBS.

jfy RADICAL 118.

ii ^ E 575.

pa S/:i^^l8V,§$:^l81;

* S 541; <a? :K 19 «

#,542;ta|H?S
:^e248;^^||y

*E261.
^RADICAL 119.

y^h #J(IBS«|5 324.

U^ tt^566;%|t278;;e

283.
^ RADICAL 120.

i» f^^fiF 188.

&<«« e^ 472; iSMI 295;
ill m 55, 295.

^t^h ^ ji 439.
ofo 3^11 »f 523.

twan

ISI$70.

^;;: H 11208.

»^ UtW ^52.

1

/«» H m 477.

ch'an 8 IP @ 568;

hZ II i 42 ; IK ^ 44 ; Hi
272, 289; S^ 291.

^g ««*e63;|»»272,
273 ; « :^ 441 ; « ^

152 ; It E 186 ; tfttf

420, 437 ; « ]^ 408 ;
|B|gl50, 216;||S

ff^^^:fcE562;

152 ; « H 218.
't'^ ^ ^ i(fc ft Sf Ji 458.

«o ^ ^ 557.
c^fc iiSfe^73;||Ji325.

^^ mm^ 30.

Pl^ RADICAL 122.

"^ J&El73,237;«fgl74j

«iRm« 101.

^ RABrcAL m.

^'

"•J 8 ^ fN^ 512,

INDEX 01* CHIKISII CHABAOTBBS.

153

han Vi Vf' ^ 201.

ling |»i|459.

:^ RADICAL 125.

182, xix.
!^ RADICAL 128.

RADICAL 129.
^ RADICAL 132.

^ *^ 276;JjJ-^276.
1^ RADICAL 134.

WU

la $ A 472 ; H ^ 473.
^ RADICAL 136.

H ^ 178.

jjNp RADICAL 140.

if ^ 329.

«>ow ^ 9 $ 514.

ffi

mtoo

ch*a i|^ j$ 72.
chwang ffi jR I 51.

II

wan

{on

if

/aw

Sftlii;%^Wmi32.

Sf|275; SSM^
276 ; Ji -g 275.

«a Sl^^l'^'

®»455;»|g455.

8U

ytw

^!^ il 564; 811587.
Jig RADICAL 141.

fe» ^tt«413.
ff RADICAL 144.

king

It jfe 259 ; fj ^ 458.

^ ^ ^ fi 346.

^ fj!f564;f(|j$439, 327;

mmigt 518.

:^ RADICAL 145.
i « » 71.

.154

JKDBZ or CHnCUI 0HA1SACTXB8.

^ RADICAL 146.

^ .Ii«f2;l«f.iri57;15
Jg i^ 4# 525.

aT a a 473.

:^ BADICAL 147.

100; 1^9^91.

»^ ft 1130; ft 11499.

mi

1^ 11^280.

^ RADICAL 148.

S j|P:3C472.

RADICAL 149.

U tf IS 164.

^ m II 306.
*oo IS 'fif 466.

?«"» I»«lt489.

jR If 242.

PJ

m 398; SHiHiJS 397.

' Chan mV-M 220;;^

nip: -221.

^ tt%34;S.9«|396;

K W 198.

h^g g| S 498.

If

*'<«? 4ff * 199.

]g RADICAL 261.

t^ Sffca54S6jSft^SU
456;

^ RADICAL 168.

Iw I519E#«5 108.

^ RADICAL 154.

M

yOan ^ ^ ^ 164.

*«^ H ^ 471 ; Jt te 473.

^ )K ifif 282 ; JK J» 291.

« JliB5;itA«.

INDEX OF CHINISB1 CSASACTEBS.

156

uze g ©: :^ ^ 456.

U'ing H 456.

t»an 1^ j§ ^ 244; K ^ 226.
^ BADICAL. 156

'ch'ao j^ §, 454.

$ RADICAL 159.
|g ^ 182, xiii.

11

^i'ing li:^$i^^ 454.

w

hwei t|[ !|# 522.

^ RADICAL 160.

nung

p»^ 1^ ^ :^ E 556, 560,
M KADICAL 161.

9k n 154.

^ RADICAL 162.

«•««» 1 i& ^ 190; Jl H ^ ^:

191 ; lift ^glljjg 192;

^
>'

tain

yeo

JiW:^El52;lift
^«a|i93;li^||

^27.9;j|iftgg|g
194; 1^283; ji$

:^*466;i^:A:*

456.

±473; jiiffi^
477 ; 1 ± R ^ 476.

yun

ta

»444;*g^444;^

iff 444 ;^4Jt 376-378,
626.

^^277; '311^307;^
glJ308;Jgf5 310;g|
}|!r.327.

Ji280;Jt-A280;Jig(

rI 500 ; jt ije.501 ; Jt

JE 502 ; Jt t 603.

^*534; ^ !g«fl||||
585 ;^ Ig flft 606 ;
J$ 575.

^ RADICAL 163.

yih g, d|: 289.

IB

lang B + 163; ||5 jj ]f|f 572.

m

*«n a5aE18;f|5i41;||5g

43; IP f- 281.

pi a5^160,273;a5ggl61,

156

INDEX OF OHnniSI OSABAOTEBS.

a ]$ 167.

ho'oh lis Hi! ^510.

no ^m 538.

TO

« ■547j^fc^532;

fU tS 517,

t« »E^74;|BJ||380;

184;|pg|445;|QS^
445; 185^^ 189; 15
^fi 298; US $298;
n & 456.

^Sv9 II SC 467 ; 1$ ^ 45.

f^9!IKiR£50

g, EADICAL 166.

ch'ung :£Sg||<8|472.

^ RADICAL 167.

557.

fh^ |»B^925;i^M439;
H^441.

..an? ^ ft 379; ii 6 379;^
«t 379 ; ^ M 379.

ruh i|ili|^128.

& ^l|ii$110;^ltlll

RADICAL 168.

c/^«3;S^40;^A32;ft'g
ohar,^ fl^'t338;;g'gfl

g B 339.
P^ RADICAL 169.

«« iE*G585;^)R589.

^ «-&190;«jBjr68.

^ it 395, 544; ^ff^m
607.

(•"iiaw is W l53.

^ SI S ft 182, vii.

Zh |iH'g320.

JS SI^^E473.

®^135;H»143,

fcoh

INDEX OF CHINESE CHABACTEBS.

157

ilZ H :^ ft 317; BS m 324.

Shan tn H; ^97.

i»

J^ |J BADIOAL 170.

fi^ Kf li 423, 430 ; jSjf «gp jjl
372.

512;|i^U^550;|l^
G«513;|J^BI!&j^
H? 513 ; il^ i» ^ 1$

373. y.;nit^mt

525.
/« F»^469;|l|a^471.

vfiTu K ft 269 ; K ^ 270.

m

Ung m 18 H^ 6$ 419.

'n:^ ^ [^ 439.

tut H^ 439.

H RADICAL 173.

Kftll3;l|||»455.

a/»n

w»s ft 1& i^ 267.

RADICAL 180.

Man? f^ ^ ^ 412.

RADICAL 181.

mi '

s^n «35lF339;JK|tl|5I52.

15 «il95:^E559;|afl|391,
546, 434 ; ^ ^ 439 ;

m ^ I9r ^ ;^ e 92.

ngih

et a* 190.

« S» 15 ; « Wit 588 ;
1i^^^45];|Si^

A » 525.

® ff E 574.
:^ RADICAL 184.

M

fan IK IR ig 182, viii.

m

8hih

yang

« W I? 394.

"if RADICAL 185.

.U •& iff 281 ; -g- JBR 289.
j^ RADICAL 187.

"»»

imT Jif 392,544jJtU|Jg
458.

/» S9 »^ 15.

S etJiJsi82,xvi;ja

158

IKDIZ or CHINB8E' CHABA0TBB8.

H 182, xvi; e g5 417,
419, 425 ; ft i{ :^ E
565.

i^i lif IV il^^ss; £15^456.

I* ^ 389, 545, 431 ;:
383.

hiao

n

y^ ISF S 3-19.

v» » it « A fl 182, XX.
*^ RADICAL 188.

rt II til 135.

mtng

,% BADICAL 196.
in 3t 236.

ml

31

'>u^1r filll ^ 231.

^ BADICAL 197.

:^«3i];»^:Jt«

313 ;m^'M 280.
RADICAL 198.

ven

i-K Jl A II 393; H in 472.
H RADICAL 201.

fcKHMtj |ll'?29-;ffftg61;
3ia:564;||.g|^458.

H RADICAL 20a.

M

mi a « 374.
^ RADICAL 210.

Wi ^^^M 374 iii*

SHAKGHAI:
Prtuiedi by KIellt fr. Walsh, Ldotbd.

V